OptiX OSN 550 Hardware Description (V100R007)

OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service Optical Transmission
System
V100R007C10
Hardware Description
Issue 01
Date 2013-12-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 01 (2013-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
About This Document
Product Version
The following table lists the product versions applicable to this documentation.
Product Name Product Version
OptiX OSN 550 V100R007C10
iManager U2000 V200R001C00

Intended Audience
This document describes the OptiX OSN 550 in terms of hardware architecture, boards, cables.
This document is intended for:
l Network planning engineers
l Hardware installation engineers
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
DANGER indicates a hazard with a high level or medium
level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
WARNING indicates a hazard with a low level of risk
which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
injury.
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation that,
if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description About This Document
ii
Symbol Description
Provides a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time.
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement
important points in the main text.

GUI Conventions
Convention Meaning
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are
in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs.
For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change History
Changes between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issue contains all the
changes made in earlier issues.
Updates in Issue 01 (2013-12-30) Based on Product Version
V100R007C10
This is the first document issue for the V100R007C10 product version. Compared with the
document issue for the V100R007C00 product version, this issue has the following updates:
l Optimized the "DC Power Cable" and "AC Power Cable" section.
l Optimized the "Overview" of the "Pluggable Optical Modules" section.
V100R007C00
This document is the second issue for product version V100R007C00. Compared with issue 01
of product version V100R007C00, version 02 includes the following updates in
V100R007C00SPC100:
l Deleted the description of MPLS-TP Ring Protection Switching (MRPS) in the "Functions
and Features" section of the EF8F, EM6T/EM6F, and EG4C boards.
iii
l Added the description that only 10GE ports support MRPS in the "Functions and Features"
section of the PCX board.
l Deleted 10GE single-fiber bidirectional optical ports originally supported by the PCX and
EX1 boards. Accordingly, deleted the function description in the "Functions and Features"
and "Technical Specifications" sections of the PCX and EX1 boards.
V100R007C00
This is the first document issue for the V100R007C00 product version. Compared with the
document issue for the V100R006C01 product version, this issue has the following updates:
l Added MPLS-TP Ring Protection Switching (MRPS) in the "Functions and Features"
section of each packet processing board (MPLS-TP is short for multiprotocol label
switching transport profile.)
l Added the EGS4 board in the "EoS" section.
l Added 10GE single-fiber bidirectional optical ports for the PCX board and EX1 board in
sections "Functions and Features" and "Technical Specifications".
V100R006C01
This document is the second issue for product version V100R006C01. Compared with issue 01
of product version V100R006C01, version 02 includes the following updates in
V100R006C01SPC100:
l Added EF8F boards' support for FE electrical ports.
l Added the number of supported line clock sources to SDH boards.
V100R006C01
This document is the first issue for product version V100R006C01. Compared with issue 1 of
product version V100R006C00, this issue incorporates the following updates:
l Added the 1x10GE Ethernet processing board EX1.
l Added the 4xchannelized STM-1 service processing board CQ1.
l Optimized the "Functions and Features" section of the system control, switching, and
timing board.
l Optimized the "Functions and Features" sections of the packet processing boards.
iv
V100R006C00
This issue is used for first office application (FOA).
v
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Chassis.............................................................................................................................................1
2 Boards and Their Appearances...................................................................................................5
2.1 Board List.......................................................................................................................................................................6
2.2 Board Appearance........................................................................................................................................................15
3 System Control, Switching, and Timing Boards...................................................................18
3.1 PCX..............................................................................................................................................................................19
3.1.1 Version Description...................................................................................................................................................19
3.1.2 Functions and Features..............................................................................................................................................20
3.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow..........................................................................................................................36
3.1.4 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................40
3.1.5 DIP Switches and CF Card........................................................................................................................................42
3.1.6 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................................45
3.1.7 Feature Code..............................................................................................................................................................46
3.1.8 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................47
3.2 CXL..............................................................................................................................................................................59
3.2.4 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................65
3.2.5 DIP Switches and CF Card........................................................................................................................................67
3.2.6 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................................71
3.2.7 Feature Code..............................................................................................................................................................71
4 Packet Processing Boards...........................................................................................................78
4.1 EF8F.............................................................................................................................................................................79
4.1.4 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................85
4.1.5 DIP Switches and Jumpers........................................................................................................................................87
Hardware Description Contents
vi
4.1.6 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................................88
4.1.7 Feature Code..............................................................................................................................................................88
4.2 EM6T/EM6F................................................................................................................................................................91
4.2.4 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................99
4.2.5 DIP Switches and Jumpers......................................................................................................................................102
4.2.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................................102
4.2.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................................102
4.2.8 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................................102
4.3 EG4C..........................................................................................................................................................................109
4.3.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................................109
4.3.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................................109
4.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................................114
4.3.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................117
4.3.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................................120
4.3.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................................120
4.4 EX1.............................................................................................................................................................................126
4.4.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................133
4.4.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................................134
4.4.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................................134
4.5 MD1............................................................................................................................................................................138
4.5.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................143
4.5.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................................145
4.5.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................................146
4.6 CQ1.............................................................................................................................................................................147
vii
4.6.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................152
4.6.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................................153
4.6.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................................154
5 SDH Boards................................................................................................................................157
5.1 SL1D...........................................................................................................................................................................158
5.1.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................162
5.1.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................................163
5.1.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................................163
5.2 SL1Q...........................................................................................................................................................................166
5.2.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................170
5.2.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................................171
5.2.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................................171
5.3 SL4D...........................................................................................................................................................................174
5.3.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................178
5.3.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................................179
5.3.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................................179
6 PDH Boards................................................................................................................................183
6.1 SP3D...........................................................................................................................................................................184
6.1.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................187
viii
6.1.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................................190
6.1.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................................190
6.2 PL3T...........................................................................................................................................................................192
6.2.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................195
6.2.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................................196
6.2.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................................196
7 EoS Boards.................................................................................................................................. 198
7.1 EFS8...........................................................................................................................................................................199
7.1.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................206
7.1.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................................209
7.1.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................................209
7.2 EGS4...........................................................................................................................................................................209
7.2.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................217
7.2.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................................220
7.2.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................................221
7.3 EGT1..........................................................................................................................................................................227
7.3.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................232
7.3.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................................233
7.3.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................................233
ix
8 WDM Board................................................................................................................................237
8.1 DMD2.........................................................................................................................................................................238
8.1.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................239
8.1.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................................240
8.1.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................................240
9 Auxiliary Boards........................................................................................................................243
9.1 AUX............................................................................................................................................................................244
9.1.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................246
9.1.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................................250
9.1.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................................250
9.2 FAN............................................................................................................................................................................253
9.2.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................254
9.2.5 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................................255
10 Power Boards............................................................................................................................257
10.1 UPM..........................................................................................................................................................................258
10.1.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................................258
10.1.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................................258
10.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................................259
10.1.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................260
10.1.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................262
10.1.6 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................................262
10.2 PIU............................................................................................................................................................................263
10.2.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................265
x
10.2.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................267
10.3 APIU.........................................................................................................................................................................267
10.3.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................269
10.3.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................271
11 Outdoor Cabinet......................................................................................................................272
12 Filler Panel................................................................................................................................275
12.1 Functions..................................................................................................................................................................276
12.2 Appearance and Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................276
13 Optical Attenuators.................................................................................................................278
14 Pluggable Optical Modules...................................................................................................280
14.1 Overview..................................................................................................................................................................281
14.2 SFP/eSFP Optical/Electrical Modules......................................................................................................................282
14.3 XFP Optical Modules...............................................................................................................................................287
14.4 CWDM/DWDM.......................................................................................................................................................289
15 Pluggable electrical Modules................................................................................................302
16 Cables.........................................................................................................................................304
16.1 Fiber Jumper.............................................................................................................................................................306
16.2 DC Power Cable.......................................................................................................................................................307
16.3 AC Power Cable.......................................................................................................................................................308
16.4 UPM Power Cable....................................................................................................................................................308
16.5 PGND Cable.............................................................................................................................................................310
16.6 STM-1 Cable............................................................................................................................................................310
16.7 16xE1/T1 Cable........................................................................................................................................................311
16.8 21xE1/T1 Cable........................................................................................................................................................316
16.9 E3/T3 Cable..............................................................................................................................................................320
16.10 Network Cable........................................................................................................................................................321
17 Parameter Settings...................................................................................................................326
A Glossary......................................................................................................................................327
xi
1 Chassis
The OptiX OSN 550 is a 2U chassis. It can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several
different types of cabinets and surfaces.
Chassis Structure
Hardware Description 1 Chassis
1
Chassis Structure and Board Installation Area
Board
installation
area

SLOT
9
(PIU)
SLOT 7 (CST/CSH)
SLOT 1 (EXT )
SLOT 5 (EXT)
SLOT 3 (EXT)
SLOT 2 (EXT )
SLOT 4 (EXT)
SLOT 6 (EXT)
SLOT 8 (CST/CSH)
SLOT
10
(PIU)
SLOT
11
(FAN) SLOT
92
(PIU)
SLOT 7
SLOT 1 (EXT)
SLOT 5 (EXT)
SLOT 3 (EXT)
SLOT 2 (EXT)
SLOT 4 (EXT)
SLOT 6 (EXT)
SLOT 8
SLOT
91
(PIU)
SLOT
93
(FAN)
Power supply boards
System control, switching,
and timing boards
Extended boards
Fan board
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
W
H
D
NOTE
An OptiX OSN 550 NE can automatically save its NE ID, extended ID, IP address, and subnet mask to its
backplane. After a new system control, switching, and timing board replaces an original one, the NE
automatically uses the saved information. Therefore, you do not need to set the NE ID, extended ID, IP
address, and subnet mask for the substitute board.
Installation Mode
The equipment can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of cabinets
and surfaces. such as in an ETSI or 19-inch cabinet, APM30H outdoor cabinet, or open rack, or
on a wall or desk.
Label Description
Table 1-1 provides the description of the labels on the chassis and boards. Actual labels may
vary depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards.
2
Table 1-1 Description of labels
Label Label Name Description
ESD protection label Indicates that the
equipment is
sensitive to static
electricity.
Grounding label Indicates the
grounding position
of the chassis.
Fan warning label Warns you not to
touch fan leaves
when the fan is
rotating.
Power caution label Instructs you to
read related
instructions before
performing any
power-related
tasks.
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT

Laser safety class
label
The laser safety
class label CLASS
1 indicates that the
maximum optical
power of the
optical port is less
than 10 dBm (10
mW).
/ QUALIFICATION CARD

MADE IN CHINA HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
HUAWEI
Qualification card
label
Indicates that the
equipment has
been quality
checked.
3
Label Label Name Description
RoHS label Indicates that the
equipment
contains certain
hazardous
substances
specified in the
RoHS directive.
The equipment
needs to be
recycled after the
environment-
friendly use period
of 50 years expires.
l DC power
l AC power
Product nameplate
label
Indicates the
product name and
certification.

Technical Specifications
Table 1-2 lists the technical specifications of an OptiX OSN 550 chassis.
Table 1-2 Technical specifications of an OptiX OSN 550 chassis
Item Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D) 88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (H x W x D)
Weight (empty chassis with a
backplane)
3.5 kg (net weight of a chassis that contains one fan board
and two PIU boards)
Power consumption l Maximum power consumption: 300 W
l Typical power consumption in Hybrid mode: 149 W
l Typical power consumption in TDM mode: 67 W
4
2 Boards and Their Appearances
About This Chapter
This chapter lists the following types of boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports: system control,
switching, and timing boards, packet processing boards, SDH boards, PDH boards, auxiliary
boards, power supply boards, and fan boards. This chapter also provides the appearances of these
boards.
2.1 Board List
This section describes the boards that the equipment supports. The equipment provides various
functions with different boards inserted.
2.2 Board Appearance
This section describes the appearances, dimensions, and bar codes of boards.
Hardware Description 2 Boards and Their Appearances
5
2.1 Board List
This section describes the boards that the equipment supports. The equipment provides various
functions with different boards inserted.
Slot Layout
Figure 2-1 shows the slot layout in an OptiX OSN 550 NE.
Figure 2-1 Slot layout in an OptiX OSN 550 NE
SLO
T
9
SLOT 1
(EXT
)
SLOT 5
(EXT)
SLOT 3
(EXT)
SLOT 2
(EXT
)
SLOT 4
(EXT)
SLOT 6
(EXT)
SLOT 8 (CST/CSH)
10
(PIU
)
SLO
T
11
(FAN
)
Slot
92
(PIU)
Slot 7 (System control,
switching, and timing boards)
Slot 1 (EXT)
Slot 5 (EXT)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 2 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 6 (EXT)
Slot 8 (System control,
switching, and timing boards)
Slot
91
(PIU)
Slot
93
(FAN)

Board List
Table 2-1 lists the boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports.
6
Table 2-1 Boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports
Board
Classificat
ion
Board
Acron
ym
Board
Name
Port Type Valid
Slot
System
control,
switching,
and timing
board
(Hybrid)
TNM1
PCXL
X
The cross-
connect,
timing,
system
control, and
line board
supports:
l A packet
switching
capacity
of 60
Gbit/s
l A higher
order
cross-
connect
capacity
of 20
Gbit/s
and a
lower
order
cross-
connect
capacity
of 5 Gbit/
s
l One
10GE and
one STM-
N ports
l System
communi
cation
and
control
l One Ethernet NM port/NM serial
port (sharing one RJ45 port)
l One STM-1/STM-4/STM-16
small form-factor pluggable
(SFP) optical port. The optical
port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1,
L-1.2, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2,
S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2.
l One 10GE XFP optical port:
10GBASE-SR (LAN),
10GBASE-SW (WAN),
10GBASE-LR (LAN),
10GBASE-LW (WAN),
10GBASE-ER (LAN),
10GBASE-EW (WAN),
10GBASE-ZR (LAN), or
10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
Slots 7 and
8
7
Board
Classificat
ion
Board
Acron
ym
Board
Name
Port Type Valid
Slot
TNM1
PCXX
The cross-
connect,
timing,
system
control, and
line board
supports:
l A packet
switching
capacity
of 60
Gbit/s
l A higher
order
cross-
connect
capacity
of 20
Gbit/s
and a
lower
order
cross-
connect
capacity
of 5 Gbit/
s
l One
10GE
port
l System
communi
cation
and
control
l One 10GE XFP optical port:
10GBASE-SR (LAN),
10GBASE-SW (WAN),
10GBASE-LR (LAN),
10GBASE-LW (WAN),
10GBASE-ER (LAN),
10GBASE-EW (WAN),
10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
Slots 7 and
8
8
Board
Classificat
ion
Board
Acron
ym
Board
Name
Port Type Valid
Slot
TNM1
PCXL
G
The cross-
connect,
timing,
system
control, and
line board
supports:
l A packet
switching
capacity
of 40
Gbit/s
l A higher
order
cross-
connect
capacity
of 20
Gbit/s
and a
lower
order
cross-
connect
capacity
of 5 Gbit/
s
l One GE
and one
STM-N
ports
l System
communi
cation
and
control
l One STM-1/STM-4/STM-16
small form-factor pluggable
(SFP) optical port. The optical
port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1,
L-1.2, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2,
S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2.
l One GE SFP optical port:
1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/
1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX
Slots 7 and
8
9
Board
Classificat
ion
Board
Acron
ym
Board
Name
Port Type Valid
Slot
TNM1
PCXG
A
The cross-
connect,
timing,
system
control, and
line board
supports:
l A packet
switching
capacity
of 20
Gbit/s
l A higher
order
cross-
connect
capacity
of 20
Gbit/s
and a
lower
order
cross-
connect
capacity
of 5 Gbit/
s
l One GE
port
l System
communi
cation
and
control
Slots 7 and
8
10
Board
Classificat
ion
Board
Acron
ym
Board
Name
Port Type Valid
Slot
TNM1
PCXG
B
The cross-
connect,
timing,
system
control, and
line board
supports:
l A packet
switching
capacity
of 40
Gbit/s
l A higher
order
cross-
connect
capacity
of 20
Gbit/s
and a
lower
order
cross-
connect
capacity
of 5 Gbit/
s
l One GE
port
l System
communi
cation
and
control
Slots 7 and
8
System
control,
switching,
and timing
board
(TDM)
TNM1
CXL1
The cross-
connect,
timing,
system
control, and
line board
supports:
l A higher
order
cross-
l One STM-1 SFP optical port. The
optical port type can be S-1.1,
L-1.1, or L-1.2.
Slots 7 and
8
TNM1
CXL4
l One STM-4 SFP optical port of
the S-4.1, L-4.1, or L-4.2 type
Slots 7 and
8
11
Board
Classificat
ion
Board
Acron
ym
Board
Name
Port Type Valid
Slot
TNM1
CXL16
connect
capacity
of 20
Gbit/s
and a
lower
order
cross-
connect
capacity
of 5 Gbit/
s
l System
communi
cation
and
control
l One STM-16 SFP optical port of
the S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2 type
Slots 7 and
8
Packet
processing
board
TNM1
MD1
32xsmart E1
service
processing
board
75/120-ohm E1 port Slots 1 to 6
TNM1
EM6T
6xRJ45 FE/
GE
processing
board
l Four FE electrical ports:
10/100BASE-T(X)
l Two GE electrical ports (they can
serve as FE electrical ports):
1000BASE-T
Slots 1 to 6
TNM1
EM6F
4xRJ45 and
2xSFP FE/
GE
processing
board
l Four FE electrical ports:
10/100BASE-T(X)
l Two GE/FE SFP optical/
electrical ports: 1000BASE-SX/
1000BASE-LX/1000BASE-VX/
1000BASE-ZX/1000Base-T/
100BASE-BX/100BASE-FX/
100BASE-ZX
Slots 1 to 6
TNM1
EG4C
4xGE (SFP/
RJ45)
processing
board
l Four GE electrical ports:
1000BASE-T
l Four GE/FE SFP optical ports:
1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX/
100BASE-BX/100BASE-FX/
100BASE-ZX
Slots 3 to 6
12
Board
Classificat
ion
Board
Acron
ym
Board
Name
Port Type Valid
Slot
TNM1
EF8F
8xFE
processing
board
l Eight FE SFP optical/electrical
ports: 100BASE-BX/100BASE-
FX/100BASE-LX/100BASE-
VX/100BASE-ZX/100BASE-T
Slots 1 to 6
TNM1
EX1
1x10GE
processing
board
One 10GE XFP optical port:
10GBASE-SR (LAN), 10GBASE-
SW (WAN), 10GBASE-LR (LAN),
10GBASE-LW (WAN), 10GBASE-
ER (LAN), 10GBASE-EW (WAN),
10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
Slots 1 and
2 (An EX1
board
cannot
work with
a PCXGA
board.)
TNM1
CQ1
4-port
channelized
STM-1
service
processing
board
l Four STM-1 SFP optical/
electrical ports of the S-1.1,
L-1.1, or L-1.2 optical type or of
SFP electrical modules
Slots 1 to 6
SDH board TNH2S
L1D
2xSTM-1
interface
board
Two STM-1 SFP optical ports. The
optical port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1,
or L-1.2.
Slots 1 to 6
TNH2S
L1Q
4xSTM-1
interface
board
Four STM-1 SFP optical ports. The
optical port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1,
or L-1.2.
Slots 1 to 6
TNH2S
L4D
2xSTM-4
interface
board
Two STM-4 SFP optical ports of the
S-4.1, L-4.1, or L-4.2 type
Slots 1 to 6
PDH board TNH2S
P3D
42xE1/T1
tributary
board
Forty-two 75/120-ohm E1 ports or
forty-two 100-ohm T1 ports
Slots 1 to 6
TNH2P
L3T
3xE3/T3
tributary
board
Three 75-ohm E3/T3 ports Slots 1 to 6
EoS board TNH2E
FS8
8xFE
switching
and
processing
board
Eight FE electrical ports:
10/100BASE-T(X)
Slots 1 to 6
TNH2E
GT1
1xGE
transparent
transmission
board
One GE SFP optical/electrical port:
1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX/
1000Base-T
Slots 1 to 6
13
Board
Classificat
ion
Board
Acron
ym
Board
Name
Port Type Valid
Slot
TNM1
EGS4
4xGE
switching
and
processing
board
Four GE/FE SFP optical/electrical
port: 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-
LX/1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-
ZX/1000Base-T/100BASE-BX/
100BASE-FX/100BASE-LX/

WDM board TNM1
DMD2
2-port optical
add/drop
multiplexing
board
l wIN/wOUT
l wA1/wA2
l wD1/wD2
l eIN/eOUT
l eA1/eA2
l eD1/eD2
slot 1 to 6
Auxiliary
interface
board
TNM1
AUX
Auxiliary
interface
board
l One orderwire phone port
l One asynchronous data port
l One synchronous data port
l 6-input/2-output alarm port
l One 2-channel external clock
port
l Two 2-channel external time
ports
Slots 1 to 6
Power
supply
board
UPM Uninterrupti
ble power
module
l One 110 V/220 V AC power
input port
l Two -48 V DC power output
ports
Slot 97
TND1P
IU
Power
supply board
One -48 V/-60 V DC power input
port
Slots 91
and 92
TNF1A
PIU
Power
supply board
Two 110 V/220 V AC power input
ports
l Slots 4
and 6
(recom
mended
)
l Slots 2
and 4
Fan board TNM1
FAN
Fan board N/A Slot 93

14
2.2 Board Appearance
This section describes the appearances, dimensions, and bar codes of boards.
Appearances and Dimensions
Table 2-2 lists the appearances and dimensions of the boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports.
Table 2-2 Appearances and dimensions of the boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports
Board
Type
Board
Name
Appearance Dimensions (H x
W x D)
System
control,
switching,
and timing
board
PCX/CXL For example, PCXLX: 22.36 mm x 193.80
mm x 269.73 mm
Packet
processing
board
MD1/
EM6T/
EM6F/
EG4C/
EF8F/
EX1/CQ1
For example, EM6F: 19.82 mm x 193.80
mm x 225.80 mm
SDH board SL1D/
SL4D/
SL1Q
For example, SL1D: 19.82 mm x 193.80
mm x 225.80 mm
PDH board SP3D/
PL3T
For example, SP3D: 19.82 mm x 193.80
mm x 225.80 mm
EoS board EFS8/
EGT1/
EGS4
For example, EFS8: 19.82 mm x 193.80
mm x 225.80 mm
15
Board
Type
Board
Name
W x D)
WDM
board
DMD2 19.82 mm x 193.80
mm x 225.80 mm
Auxiliary
board
AUX 19.82 mm x 193.80
mm x 225.80 mm
Power
supply
board
UPM
G
IE4805S
44.0 mm x 438.0
mm x 240.0 mm
PIU 41.4 mm x 21.0 mm
x 229.9 mm
APIU 40.1 mm x 193.8
mm x 208.7 mm
Fan board FAN 86.2 mm x 28.5 mm
x 217.6 mm
16
Board
Type
Board
Name
W x D)
Note: The figure in the right cell shows the three dimensions. "H" and "W" indicate the height
and width of the front panel respectively and "D" indicates the depth of the printed circuit
board (PCB).
W
H
D

Bar Code
The front panel of a board has two ejector levers and two captive screws. The ejector levers help
you remove or insert a board. The captive screws fasten a board to the chassis. A board bar code
(as shown in Figure 2-2) is attached to one of the ejector levers.
Figure 2-2 Bar code
Bar code
2 Internal code
3
4
Board version
Board name
Feature code
1
5
Last six digits of the part number
020XES10AA800077-TNM1MD1 A
1 2 3 4 5

NOTE
l Only the bar codes of some boards contain feature codes, which further classify boards.
l The bar code shown in this figure is only for your reference and may differ from that of an actual board.
17
3 System Control, Switching, and Timing
Boards
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN 550 uses the system control, switching, and timing board PCX.
3.1 PCX
The PCX is a system control, cross-connect, timing, and line board that works in Hybrid mode.
It is available in five types of finished boards.
3.2 CXL
The CXL is a system control, cross-connect, timing, and line board that works in TDM mode.
Hardware Description 3 System Control, Switching, and Timing Boards
18
3.1 PCX
The PCX is a system control, cross-connect, timing, and line board that works in Hybrid mode.
It is available in five types of finished boards.
3.1.1 Version Description
The functional version of the PCX is TNM1. PCX boards are available in five types of finished
boards: PCXLX, PCXX, PCXLG, PCXGA, and PCXGB.
Table 3-1 lists the differences between the five types of PCX finished boards.
Table 3-1 Differences between the five types of PCX finished boards
Fini
she
d
Boa
rd
Packet
Switching
Capability
TDM
Cross-
Connect
Capability
TDM Service Port Packet Service Port
PCX
LX
60 Gbit/s A higher
order cross-
connect
capacity of
20 Gbit/s and
a lower order
cross-
connect
capacity of 5
Gbit/s
One STM-1/STM-4/
STM-16 small form-
factor pluggable
(SFP) optical port.
The optical port type
can be S-1.1, L-1.1,
L-1.2, S-4.1, L-4.1,
L-4.2, S-16.1,
L-16.1, or L-16.2.
One 10GE XFP optical
port: 10GBASE-SR
(LAN), 10GBASE-SW
(WAN), 10GBASE-LR
(LAN), 10GBASE-LW
(WAN), 10GBASE-ER
(LAN), 10GBASE-EW
(WAN), 10GBASE-ZR
(LAN), or 10GBASE-
ZW (WAN)
PCX
X
60 Gbit/s None One 10GE XFP optical
port: 10GBASE-SR
(LAN), 10GBASE-SW
(WAN), 10GBASE-LR
(LAN), 10GBASE-LW
(WAN), 10GBASE-ER
(LAN), 10GBASE-EW
(WAN), 10GBASE-ZR
(LAN), or 10GBASE-
ZW (WAN)
19
Fini
she
d
Boa
rd
Packet
Switching
Capability
TDM
Cross-
Connect
Capability
TDM Service Port Packet Service Port
PCX
LG
40 Gbit/s One STM-1/STM-4/
STM-16 small form-
factor pluggable
(SFP) optical port.
The optical port type
can be S-1.1, L-1.1,
L-1.2, S-4.1, L-4.1,
L-4.2, S-16.1,
L-16.1, or L-16.2.
One GE SFP optical
port: 1000BASE-SX/
1000BASE-LX/
1000BASE-VX/
1000BASE-ZX
PCX
GA
20 Gbit/s None One GE SFP optical
port: 1000BASE-SX/
1000BASE-LX/
1000BASE-VX/
1000BASE-ZX
PCX
GB
40 Gbit/s None One GE SFP optical
port: 1000BASE-SX/
1000BASE-LX/
1000BASE-VX/
1000BASE-ZX

3.1.2 Functions and Features
This section describes the functions and features that the PCX supports.
System Control, Switching, and Timing Unit
Table 3-2 lists the functions and features that the system control, switching, and timing unit of
the PCX supports.
Table 3-2 Functions and features that the system control, switching, and timing unit of the PCX
supports
Function and Feature Board
Basic
function
s
Packet
switching
capability
l The PCXLX/PCXX supports 60 Gbit/s packet switching
function.
l The PCXLG/PCXGB supports 40 Gbit/s packet switching
function.
l The PCXGA supports 20 Gbit/s packet switching function.
20
Time division
multiplexing
(TDM) cross-
connect
capacity
l A higher order cross-connect capacity of 20 Gbit/s and a
lower order cross-connect capacity of 5 Gbit/s
System control and
communication
l Manages and controls the running status of an NE.
l Works as a communication service unit between the
network management system (NMS) and NEs to help the
NMS to control and manage the NE.
Packet system performance See Table 3-4.
Multiprotocol Label
Switching (MPLS)
functions
The packet switching unit of the PCX works with its service
interface unit or a service board to implement MPLS functions.
l Setup mode: static tunnels
l Protection: 1:1 tunnel automatic protection switching (APS)
l Operation, administration and maintenance (OAM):
supports Tunnel OAM and multiprotocol label switching
transfer profile (MPLS-TP) tunnel OAM. Tunnel OAM
complies with ITU-T Y.1711, and MPLS-TP tunnel OAM
complies with ITU-T G.8113.1.
Pseudo wire emulation
edge-to-edge (PWE3)
functions
interface unit or a service board to implement PWE3 functions.
l Service categories
TDM PWE3 services (circuit emulation services
[CESs])
Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) PWE3 services
ETH PWE3 services
l Setup mode: static pseudo wires (PWs)
l Supports single-segment PWs (SS-PWs) and multi-segment
PWs (MS-PWs).
l PW encapsulation mode: Ethernet or Ethernet Tagged Mode
l PW control word: supported by the PCXLG/PCXGA/
PCXGB board whose printed circuit board (PCB) version is
Ver.B and the PCXLX/PCXX board.
l Protection: 1:1 PW APS
l OAM: supports MPLS PW OAM and MPLS-TP PW OAM.
MPLS PW OAM complies with ITU-T Y.1711, and MPLS-
TP PW OAM complies with ITU-T G.8113.1.
Equipment-level
protection
l 1+1 hot standby
21
Synchro
nization
Clock/Time
source
The traced clock source at the physical layer can be any of the
following:
l External clock
l Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) line clock
l Plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH) tributary clock
l Synchronous Ethernet clock
l Internal clock source
The traced packet clock/time source can be any of the
following:
l External time
l IEEE 1588v2 clock and time
l IEEE 1588 adaptive clock recovery (ACR) clock
Clock protocol l Standard Synchronization Status Message (SSM) protocol
l Extended SSM protocol
l Best master clock (BMC) protocol
Data
commun
ication
network
(DCN)
Outband DCN l Mode 1: 32 data communications channels (DCCs) that are
composed of D1-D3 bytes
l Mode 2: 12 DCCs that are composed of D1-D3 bytes or six
DCCs that are composed of D4-D12 bytes
Inband DCN l Supports the inband DCN function.
Network
manage
ment
protocol
Huawei
Embedded
Control
Channel
(HWECC)
protocol
Supported by outband and inband DCNs
IP Supported by outband and inband DCNs
Open systems
interconnectio
n (OSI) over
DCC protocol
Supported only by outband DCNs
Simple
Network
Management
Protocol
(SNMP)
Supported
Auxiliary and management
ports
Provides one 10M/100M Ethernet NMS port or NMS serial
port.

22
Packet Processing Unit and SDH Line Unit
Table 3-2 lists the functions and features that the packet processing unit and SDH line unit of
the PCX support. The packet processing unit includes logical units PEX1 and PEG1, and the
SDH line unit includes logical units SL16S, SL4S, and SL1S. For the mapping between the
logical units and logical slots, see 3.1.6 Valid Slots.
Table 3-3 Functions and features that the packet processing unit and SDH line unit of the PCX
support
Basic functions l PCXLX: receives/transmits and processes 1x10GE signals
and 1xSTM-1/STM-4/STM-16 signals.
l PCXX: receives/transmits and processes 1x10GE signals.
l PCXLG: receives/transmits and processes 1xGE signals and
1xSTM-1/STM-4/STM-16 signals.
l PCXGA/PCXGB: receives/transmits and processes 1xGE
signals.
Port
specifica
tions
TDM service
port
l PCXLX/PCXLG: One STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 small form-
factor pluggable (SFP) optical port. The optical port type
can be S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, S-16.1,
L-16.1, or L-16.2.
l PCXX/PCXGB/PCXGA: none
l An optical port can be a colored coarse wavelength division
multiplexing (CWDM) optical port or a colored dense
wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) optical port. A
colored CWDM optical port supports a transmission
distance of 40 km or 80 km. A colored DWDM optical port
supports a transmission distance of 120 km.
l The following types of small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
modules are supported:
STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 two-fiber bidirectional
pluggable optical module
STM-1/STM-4 single-fiber bidirectional pluggable
optical module
STM-1 pluggable electrical module
NOTE
Only an STM-16 optical port can be a colored DWDM optical port.
23
Packet service
port
l PCXLX/PCXX: One 10GE XFP optical port: 10GBASE-
SR (LAN), 10GBASE-SW (WAN), 10GBASE-LR (LAN),
10GBASE-LW (WAN), 10GBASE-ER (LAN), 10GBASE-
EW (WAN), 10GBASE-ZR (LAN), or 10GBASE-ZW
(WAN)
l PCXLG/PCXGB/PCXGA: One GE SFP optical port:
1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/1000BASE-VX/
1000BASE-ZX
l A 10GE optical port can be a colored CWDM optical port
or a colored DWDM optical port. A colored CWDM optical
port supports a transmission distance of 70 km. A colored
DWDM optical port supports a transmission distance of 40
km or 80 km.
l A GE optical port can be a colored CWDM optical port. A
colored CWDM optical port supports a transmission
distance of 40 km or 80 km.
l The following types of SFP modules are supported:
GE two-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module
GE single-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module
l The following types of XFP modules are supported:
10GE two-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module
10GE single-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical
module
Port
attribute
s
Working mode l The GE optical port supports 1000M full-duplex and auto-
negotiation.
l The 10GE optical port supports 10G full-duplex and the
setting of LAN mode or WAN mode.
TAG attributes l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access, or hybrid.
Traffic control
at ports
l Supports the port-based traffic control function that
complies with IEEE 802.3x.
Port type query Supported
Query and
setting of
optical power
thresholds
Supported
24
Packet
services
E-Line services l Native ETH services:
E-Line services based on point-to-point transparent
transmission
E-Line services based on virtual local area networks
(VLANs)
E-Line services based on 802.1Q in 802.1Q (QinQ)
l ETH pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) services:
E-Line services carried by PWs (VPWS services)
E-LAN
services
l Native ETH services:
E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
l ETH PWE3 services: E-LAN services carried by PWs
(virtual private LAN services [VPLSs])
l MAC address learning modes:
Independent VLAN learning (IVL) and shared VLAN
learning (SVL) for native Ethernet services
SVL for VPLS services
Ethernet data
frame format
IEEE 802.3/Ethernet II
Jumbo frame Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes.
MTU Ranges from 960 bytes to 9600 bytes, with 1620 bytes being
the default value.
SDH service functions (for
PCXLX/PCXLG boards)
Processes VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services, VC-4-4c services
(supported by STM-4/STM-16 service ports), and VC-4-16c
services (supported by STM-16 service ports).
Packet
protectio
n
schemes
Tunnel APS Supports 1:1 tunnel APS.
PW APS Supports 1:1 PW APS.
MPLS-TP ring
protection
switching
(MRPS)
Supports MRPS.
l Protection group type: two-fiber bidirectional
l Switching type: wrapping switching
NOTE
Only 10GE ports on PCXLX/PCXX boards support MRPS.
MSTP Supports MSTP that runs only Common and Internal Spanning
Tree (CIST) instances. This type of MSTP provides the same
functions as the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP).
ERPS Supports ERPS that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344.
25
LAG l Aggregation types: manual aggregation and static
aggregation
l Load sharing modes: load sharing and non-load sharing
LPT Point-point and point-multipoint LPT.
TDM
protectio
n
schemes
(for
PCXLX/
PCXLG
boards)
Sub-network
connection
protection
(SNCP)
Supports SNCP at the VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 levels.
Ring multiplex
section
protection
(MSP)
Supports ring MSP at the STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 levels.
Linear MSP Supports linear MSP at the STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 levels.
Quality of service (QoS)
functions
interface unit or a service board to implement QoS functions.
l DiffServ
Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB
service classes for service flows based on their QoS
information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP
values, or MPLS EXP values) carried by packets.
l Complex traffic classification
Supports complex traffic classification based on C-VLAN
IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities,
C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-
VLAN priorities, or DSCP values carried by packets, and
V-UNI ingress policies.
l QoS policies
Supports port policies and V-UNI ingress policies.
l Access control list (ACL) policy
Passes or discards packets in a flow that matches rules
specified by a port policy or V-UNI ingress policy.
l CAR
Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports and V-
UNI ingresses.
l Shaping
Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, PW ingress,
prioritized queue, or traffic flow.
l Congestion management
Supports tail drop and WRED dropping.
l Queue scheduling policies
Supports SP, WRR, and SP+WRR.
26
Mainten
ance
features
MPLS/MPLS-
TP OAM
l Tunnel OAM and PW OAM are supported.
l MPLS OAM supports connectivity verification (CV), fast
failure detection (FFD), backward defect indication (BDI),
forward defect indication (FDI), ping, and traceroute tests
in compliance with ITU-T Y.1711.
l MPLS-TP OAM supports continuity checks (CCs), remote
defect indication (RDI), alarm indication signal (AIS)
insertion, loopback (LB) tests, linktrace (LT) tests, PW loss
measurement (LM), locked signal function (LCK), test
(TST) (only packet loss test supported), PW Client Signal
Fail (CSF) indication, and two-way delay measurement
(DM) in compliance with ITU-T G.8113.1.
ETH OAM l Ethernet service OAM:
Supports CCs, LB tests, LT tests, and AIS insertion in
compliance with IEEE 802.1ag.
Implements IEEE 802.1ag-based LM and DM with
reference to ITU-T Y.7131.
l Ethernet port OAM: supports OAM auto-discovery, link
performance monitoring, remote loopbacks, and selfloop
checks in compliance with IEEE 802.3ah.
Warm reset and cold reset
Board power consumption query
Board temperature detection
Board voltage detection
Port mirroring l Supports local port mirroring.
l Supports mirroring in the egress direction of a UNI port.
l Supports mirroring in the ingress direction of UNI and NNI
ports.
l Supports mirroring of PORT+VLAN services in the ingress
direction of a UNI port.
Synchro
nization
SDH clock
source
Transmits SDH line clock signals at one port.
Synchronous
Ethernet
Transmits synchronous Ethernet clock signals at one port.
IEEE 1588v2 Transmits IEEE 1588v2 time and clock signals at one port.
IEEE 1588
ACR
Transmits 1588 ACR clock signals at one port.
NOTE
Ports working in 10GE WAN mode do not support IEEE 1588v2 or
IEEE 1588 ACR.
27
DCN l Each TDM port supports one embedded control channel
(ECC).
l Each GE/10GE port supports one inband DCN channel.
Internet Group
Management Protocol
(IGMP) snooping
Supported

NOTE
For the packet processing unit, the SDH line unit, and the logical unit that consists of the system control
and communication unit, cross-connect unit, and clock unit on a PCX board, switching of services carried
on any of the three units does not cause switching of services carried on the other two units.
Packet System Performance Specifications
Table 3-4 lists the packet system performance specifications of the OptiX OSN equipment.
Table 3-4 Packet system performance specifications
It
e
m
Specifications
Pr
ot
ec
tio
n
MPLS/
MPLS-TP
tunnel
automatic
protection
switching
(APS)
64
NOTE
Tunnel APS, MPLS PW APS, MPLS-TP tunnel APS, and MPLS-TP PW APS share
resources.
MPLS/
MPLS-TP
PW APS
Numbe
r of
MPLS/
MPLS-
TP PW
APS
protecti
on
groups
64
NOTE
Tunnel APS, MPLS PW APS, MPLS-TP tunnel APS, and MPLS-TP
PW APS share resources.
Numbe
r of
bound
membe
rs
512
28
It
e
m
Specifications
MRPS Numbe
r of
rings
4
Numbe
r of
nodes
per ring
64
Numbe
r of
virtual
nodes
per
ring
a
32
Numbe
r of
multica
st
services
l Number of multicast services supported by an NE: 16
l Number of multicast services supported by a ring: 8
Link-state
pass
through
(LPT)
16
Link
aggregatio
n group
(LAG)
Numbe
r of
LAGs
16
Numbe
r of
membe
rs in a
LAG
8
Multiple
Spanning
Tree
Protocol
(MSTP)
Numbe
r of
instanc
es
support
ed by a
port
1
Numbe
r of port
groups
1
29
It
e
m
Specifications
Numbe
r of
ports
provide
d by
port
groups
16
Ethernet
ring
protection
switching
(ERPS)
8
Linear
multiplex
section
protection
(LMSP) on
the packet
plane
8
M
ai
nt
en
an
ce
MPLS/
MPLS-TP
tunnel
OAM
128
NOTE
Tunnel OAM, MPLS PW OAM, MPLS-TP tunnel OAM, MPLS-TP PW OAM,
ETH OAM, and MRPS OAM (one MRPS ring uses two OAM resources) share
resources.
MPLS/
MPLS-TP
PW OAM
128
NOTE
Tunnel OAM, MPLS PW OAM, MPLS-TP tunnel OAM, MPLS-TP PW OAM,
ETH OAM, and MRPS OAM (one MRPS ring uses two OAM resources) share
resources.
ETH OAM
(MPLS/
MPLS-TP
tunnel
OAM,
MPLS/
MPLS-TP
PW OAM,
ETH
OAM, and
MRPS
OAM
share
resources.)
Numbe
r of
mainten
ance
domain
s (MDs)
64
Numbe
r of
mainten
ance
associat
ions
(MAs)
64
30
It
e
m
Specifications
Numbe
r of
mainten
ance
associat
ion end
points
(MEPs)
64
Numbe
r of
mainten
ance
associat
ion
interme
diate
points
(MIPs)
64
MRPS
OAM
128
NOTE
l One MRPS ring uses two OAM resources. MRPS OAM is automatically created
during the creation of an MRPS ring.
l Tunnel OAM, MPLS PW OAM, MPLS-TP tunnel OAM, MPLS-TP PW OAM,
ETH OAM, and MRPS OAM share resources.
ATM
OAM
l Number of local services: 128
l Number of remote services: 256
Se
rv
ic
es
E-Line
services
1k
NOTE
Native ETH services and ETH PWE3 services (VPWSs) share resources.
31
It
e
m
Specifications
E-LAN
services
Numbe
r of E-
LAN
services
(E-
LAN
VSIs)
support
ed by an
NE
(VSI is
short
for
virtual
switch
instanc
e.)
l Native ETH services: 1
l ETH PWE3 services (VPLSs): 128
NOTE
Native ETH services and ETH PWE3 services (VPLSs) cannot coexist
on the same NE.
Numbe
r of
logical
ports
support
ed by a
VSI
l Native ETH services: 1k
Numbe
r of
virtual
user-
networ
k
interfac
es (V-
UNIs)
support
ed by an
NE
(VPLS)
Number of V-UNIs Number of VLANs
32 4096
64 2047
128 1023
256 511
512 255
1024 127
Numbe
r of split
horizon
groups
support
ed by a
VSI
l Native ETH services: 1
32
It
e
m
Specifications
Numbe
r of
logical
ports
support
ed by an
NE
1k
CES
services
256
ATM
services
Numbe
r of
local
services
128
Numbe
r of
remote
services
256
M
ult
i-
Li
nk
Po
int
-
to
-
Po
int
Pr
ot
oc
ol
(
M
L-
P
P
P)
Number of
ML-PPP
groups
supported
by an NE
64
Number of
PPP links
supported
by an NE
504
Number of
member
links
supported
in an ML-
PPP group
16
IG
M
P
sn
Number of
multicast
groups
512
33
It
e
m
Specifications
oo
pi
ng
Number of
members
in a
multicast
group
1K
Q
oS
Number of
port
weighted
random
early
discard
(WRED)
policies
8
Number of
virtual
user-
network
interface
(V-UNI)
ingress
policies
256
Number of
port
policies
256
Number of
Differentia
ted
Services
(DiffServ)
domains
8
Number of
port flows
512
Number of
V-UNI
ingress
flows
512
Number of
traffic
classificati
on rules
1
34
It
e
m
Specifications
Number of
access
control
lists
(ACLs)
512
Ot
he
rs
Number of
Tunnels
l Unidirectional: 1K
l Bidirectional: 512
NOTE
l One bidirectional Tunnel is counted as two unidirectional Tunnels.
l If Tunnels do not carry PWs, the sum of PWs and Tunnels must not exceed 1K.
If Tunnels carry PWs, the Tunnels are not counted and the number of carried
PWs must not exceed 1K. Therefore, if each Tunnel carries one PW, the number
of Tunnels and the number of PWs can both be 1K.
l One MPRS ring uses 4 x N tunnels (N is the number of nodes on the MPRS
ring.) Tunnels are automatically assigned during the configuration of MRPS.
Number of
static PWs
1K
NOTE
If Tunnels do not carry PWs, the sum of PWs and Tunnels must not exceed 1K. If
Tunnels carry PWs, the Tunnels are not counted and the number of carried PWs
must not exceed 1K. Therefore, if each Tunnel carries one PW, the number of
Tunnels and the number of PWs can both be 1K.
Number of
MS-PWs
128
Number of
QinQ links
1K
MAC
addresses
Numbe
r of
static
MAC
address
es
support
ed by an
E-LAN
512
Numbe
r of
MAC
address
es
support
ed by E-
LAN
services
16K
35
It
e
m
Specifications
Numbe
r of
MAC
address
es
support
ed by an
NE
16K
VLAN ID
range
supported
by a port
1 to 4094
a: MRPS supports protection on intersecting rings. When two rings intersect, one virtual
intersecting node can be created to contain the two most remote physical intersecting nodes.
If one physical intersecting node fails, services can travel across the rings through the other
node. When a ring intersects with multiple rings, a virtual intersecting node must be created
to contain the two most remote physical intersecting nodes of the ring and each other ring.

NOTE
The values listed in the preceding table are the maximum values supported by the OSN equipment.
The packet performance counters supported by the packet processing boards (including PEX1 and PEG1)
are the same those supported by the OSN equipment.
3.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The PCX consists of a system control and communication unit, a packet switching unit, a packet
processing unit, a TDM cross-connect unit, a SDH line unit, a clock unit, and a power supply
unit.
36
Function Block Diagram
Figure 3-1 Function block diagram of the PCX
Backplane
Power
supply
unit
Clock unit
Control bus
Packet
switching unit
Packet
processing unit
Packet
service
GE/10GE
signal
GE/10GE signal
TDM cross-
connect unit
TDM service
Service board
STM-1/4/16 signal
SDH line unit
Ethernet NM port
NM serial port
System control and
communication unit
+3.3 V power supplied to other boards
+12 V power supplied to fans
Power supplied to the other
units on the board
Clock signal
provided to the
other units on
the board
Clock signal
received from
the service unit
on the board
Clock signal received
from other boards
Clock signal provided
to other boards
Service board
System power supply
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse
System power supply

System Control and Communication Unit
The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit. The
system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
l The CPU unit performs the following control functions using the control bus:
Manages other boards and the other units on the PCX, and collects alarms and
performance events.
Implements software loading by reading information from the CF card.
l The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control
unit.
l The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port.
l The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enables
FPGA loading.
l The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit,
the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes:
Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit
37
Adding or dropping orderwire and synchronous/asynchronous data services
Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines
l The system control and communication unit on a PCX board communicates with the system
control and communication unit on the standby PCX board by carrying FE signals over the
communication bus in the backplane. In this manner, the active and standby PCX boards
form a 1+1 hot backup relationship.
Packet Switching Unit
The packet switching unit grooms services and processes protocols for packet services.
l After receiving services from a packet service board, the packet switching unit grooms the
services based on the configurations delivered by the system control and communication
unit.
l After receiving protocol packets from a packet service board, the packet switching unit
transmits the protocol packets to the system control and communication unit for processing.
After processing, the system control and communication unit sends the protocol packets
back to the packet switching unit. The packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets
to the packet service board.
TDM Cross-Connect Unit
The TDM cross-connect unit grooms TDM services over the entire system using the higher order
cross-connect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-2 shows the function
block diagram of the cross-connect unit.
Figure 3-2 Function block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM
service unit
Higher
order cross-
connect
module
HOXC
Lower order
cross-
connect
module
LOXC
Sink TDM
service unit

The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect module
over cross-connect buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order cross-
connect module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM
service unit. If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect
module grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower
38
order cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the
services back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module
processes the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.
Clock Unit
l The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from service clock sources at service
ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means of the phase-locked
loop, the clock unit provides the system clock to other units on the PCX and other boards.
l The clock unit receives IEEE 1588v2 messages and IEEE 1588 ACR messages from the
GE/10GE signal access unit, and performs protocol processing to achieve clock/time
synchronization.
l The clock unit supports synchronous Ethernet clock.
l The clock units on the active and standby PCX boards transmit clock signals to each other.
Packet Processing Unit
The packet processing unit receives/transmits and processes 1xGE/10GE optical signals.
l In the receive direction:
After performing optical-to-electrical (O/E) conversion, decoding, and serial/parallel
conversion for GE/10GE optical signals, the GE/10GE signal processing unit extracts
framed GE/10GE signals by delimiting frames and adding preambles. The GE/10GE
signal processing unit also performs cyclic redundancy checks (CRCs).
The GE/10GE signal processing unit works with the packet switching unit to process
VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames, process labels in Multiprotocol Label Switching
(MPLS) or pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) packets, perform quality of
service (QoS) processing such as traffic classification and committed access rate (CAR)
restriction for Ethernet data frames, and process operation, administration and
maintenance (OAM) packets and protocol packets.
l In the transmit direction:
The GE/10GE signal processing unit works with the packet switching unit to process
VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames, process labels in MPLS or PWE3 packets, perform
QoS processing such as traffic shaping and queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames,
and process OAM packets and protocol packets.
After delimiting frames, adding preambles, and calculating CRC codes, the GE/10GE
signal processing unit performs parallel/serial conversion and encoding and then
transmits GE/10GE signals to the GE/10GE optical port after performing electrical-to-
optical (E/O) conversion.
SDH Line Unit
The SDH line unit performs the following functions: STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 signal receiving,
serial/parallel conversion, clock signal extraction, data restoration, overhead processing, alarm
monitoring/reporting, signal inloops/outloops, MSP, and ALS functions.
Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions:
39
l Combines two -48 V/-60 V DC power supplies, and converts the supplied power into the
power supply required by the chips of the other units on the local board.
l Combines two -48 V/-60 V power supplies, and converts the supplied power into the +3.3
V power supply required by other boards.
l Combines two -48 V/-60 V DC power supplies, and converts the supplied power into the
+12 V power supply required by fans.
3.1.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, ports, buttons, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Table 3-5 shows the front panel of each PCX finished board.
Table 3-5 Front panel of each PCX finished board
Finish
ed
Board
Front Panel Diagram
PCXL
X
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
NMS1/ COM EXT
RST S
T
A
T
P
R
O
G
S
Y
N
C
S
R
V
A
C
T
L
O
S
L
/
A
P
C
X
TX2 / RX2 TX1 / RX1
PCXX
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
NMS1/ COM EXT
RST S
T
A
T
P
R
O
G
S
Y
N
C
S
R
V
A
C
T
L
/
A
P
C
X
TX / RX
PCXL
G
a
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
NMS1/ COM EXT
RST S
T
A
T
P
R
O
G
S
Y
N
C
S
R
V
A
C
T
L
O
S
L
/
A
P
C
X
STM T/R GE T/R
PCXG
A
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
NMS1/ COM EXT
RST S
T
A
T
P
R
O
G
S
Y
N
C
S
R
V
A
C
T
L
/
A
P
C
X
TX/RX
PCXG
B
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
NMS1/ COM EXT
RST S
T
A
T
P
R
O
G
S
Y
N
C
S
R
V
A
C
T
L
/
A
P
C
X
TX/RX
a: There are two types of front panels for the PCXLG, which differ only in silkscreen
information. The front panel described in this section is of a later version.

Indicators
The front panel of the PCX has the following indicators: STAT, PROG, SYNC, SRV, ACT,
LOS, and L/A. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
40
Clock Ports, Auxiliary Ports, and Management Ports
Table 3-6 Description of the clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports
Port Descript
ion
Connector Type Pin Assignment Required
Cable
NMS/
COM
Ethernet
NM port/
NM serial
port
RJ45
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
For status
explanation for the
indicators of an
RJ45 port, see Table
3-5.
l Pin 1: transmitting data (+)
l Pin 2: transmitting data (-)
l Pin 3: receiving data (+)
l Pin 4: grounding end of the
NM serial port
l Pin 5: receive end of the NM
serial port
l Pin 6: receiving data (-)
l Pin 7: not defined
l Pin 8: transmit end of the
NM serial port
16.10
Network
Cable
EXT Reserved - - -

Table 3-7 Status explanation for indicators on an Ethernet port
Indicator State Meaning
LINK (green) On The Ethernet link is working
properly.
Off The Ethernet link is interrupted.
ACT (yellow) On or blinking The port is receiving or transmitting
data.
Off The port is not receiving or
transmitting data.

Service Ports
Table 3-8 Description of the service ports on the PCX
Boar
d
Port Descr
iption
Connector Type Pin
Assignment
Required
Cable
PCX
LX/
PCX
X
TX/
RX
10GE
optical
port
l 10GE optical port:
LC XFP optical
module
l TX represents
the transmit
port.
SFP optical port:
16.1 Fiber
Jumper
41
Boar
d
Port Descr
iption
Connector Type Pin
Assignment
Required
Cable
PCX
LG
l GE/STM-1/4/16
optical port: LC SFP
optical module
TX RX
l STM-1 electrical
port: SFP electrical
module
TX
RX
l RX represents
the receive
port.
SFP electrical
port: 16.6 STM-1
Cable
GE T/
R
GE
optical
port
PCX
GA/
PCX
GB
TX/
RX
PCX
LX
TX/
RX
STM-
1/4/16
optical
/
electri
cal
port
PCX
LG
STM
T/R

Buttons
Table 3-9 Buttons
Button Name Description
RST Warm reset button After this button is pressed, a warm
reset is performed on the board.

Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel.
The laser safety class label CLASS 1 indicates that the maximum launched optical power of the
optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
3.1.5 DIP Switches and CF Card
This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF card.
CF Card
NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), software
packages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. To synchronize the NE databases, system
parameters, and NE logs on the PCX board to the CF card, enable the regular backup function.
42
NOTE
The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the PCX board during package diffusion.
Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations are not needed to synchronize software packages
on the PCX board and the CF card. If the active system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card
have different software packages, the associated NE reports an SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH alarm if it
restarts after a power failure.
Positions of the DIP Switches and CF Card
3
1 2
ON DIP
1 2 3 4
S
W
2
S
W
2

1. DIP switches 2. CF card 3. Daughter board
Meanings of DIP Switch Settings
Setting of DIP Switches
a
Meaning
4 3 2 1
0 0 0 0 Indicates that
the board works
with the
watchdog
enabled.
0 0 0 1 The value is
reserved.
43
a
Meaning
4 3 2 1
the board is
being debugged.
the board is
being debugged.
the board works
with the
watchdog
disabled and a
full memory
check is
running.
0 1 0 1 Indicates the
BIOS holdover
state.
BIOS exhibition
state.
reserved. (By
default, this
value indicates
that the board
works with the
watchdog
enabled.)
reserved. (By
default, this
value indicates
that the board
works with the
watchdog
enabled.)
1 0 0 1 Restores the
data of the CF
card.
1 0 1 0 Erases data in
the system
parameter area.
44
a
Meaning
4 3 2 1
1 0 1 1 Erases
databases.
1 1 0 0 Erases NE
software,
including
patches.
1 1 0 1 Erases
databases and
NE software
(including
patches).
1 1 1 0 Erases all data in
the file system.
1 1 1 1 Erases all the
data except for
the board
manufacturing
information and
basic BIOS
data. That is, all
data in the file
system,
extended BIOS
area, and system
parameter area
is erased.
NOTE
a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a
DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.

3.1.6 Valid Slots
The PCX can be inserted in slot 7 (preferred) or slot 8 in the chassis.
Figure 3-3 shows the mapping between physical slots and their logical slots. Physical slot 7 has
the following logical slots on the NMS: slot 7, slot 9, slot 81, slot 83, and slot 85; physical slot
8 has the following logical slots on the NMS: slot 8, slot 10, slot 82, slot 84, and slot 86.
Figure 3-3 Logical slots for a PCX board
SLO
T
9
SLOT 7
(CST/CSH)
SLOT 1
(EXT
)
SLOT 5
(EXT)
SLOT 3
(EXT)
SLOT 2
(EXT
)
SLOT 4
(EXT)
SLOT 6
(EXT)
SLOT 8 (CST/CSH)
10
(PIU
)
SLO
T
11
(FAN
)
Slot
92
(PIU)
Slot 81
(SCC)
Slot 1 (EXT)
Slot 5 (EXT)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 2 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 6 (EXT)
Slot 8 Slot
91
(PIU)
Slot
93
(FAN)
Slot 7 Slot 83
Slot 85
(STG)
Slot 82
(SCC)
Slot 84
Slot 86
(STG)
Slot 9 Slot 10
45

The board that can be created in a logical slot varies according to the manufactured board that
is installed in a physical slot. Table 3-10 provides the mapping between manufactured boards
and their logical boards.
Table 3-10 Mapping between manufactured boards and their logical boards
Manufact
ured
Board
Logical
Slot 7/8
Logical
Slot 9/10
Logical
Slot 81/82
Logical Slot
83/84
Logical Slot
85/86
PCXLX SL16S/
SL4S/SL1S
PEX1 SCC PUXC STG
PCXX - PEX1 SCC PUXC STG
PCXLG SL16S/
SL4S/SL1S
PEG1 SCC PEXC STG
PCXGB - PEG1 SCC PEXC STG
PCXGA - PEG1 SCC PGXC STG

3.1.7 Feature Code
The feature code of a board refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code and
indicates the type of optical port. PCX boards have feature codes.
Table 3-11 Feature codes of the PCX
Feature Code Port Type
TNM1PCXLG1604 1xGE (SFP)/1xSTM-16 (ESFP, L-16.2, LC)
TNM1PCXLX1604 1x10GE (XFP)/1xSTM-16 (ESFP, L-16.2, LC)
TNM1PCXLG406 1xGE (SFP)/1xSTM-4 (ESFP, L-4.1, LC, Single
Fibre Bidirectional, TX 1490nm)
TNM1PCXLG405 1xGE (SFP)/1xSTM-4 (ESFP, L-4.1, LC, Single
TNM1PCXLX406 1x10GE (XFP)/1xSTM-4 (ESFP, L-4.1, LC, Single
TNM1PCXLX405 1x10GE (XFP)/1xSTM-4 (ESFP, L-4.1, LC, Single
46
Feature Code Port Type
TNM1PCXLG1601 1xGE (SFP)/1xSTM-16 (ESFP, S-16.1, LC)
TNM1PCXLG401 1xGE (SFP)/1xSTM-4 (ESFP, S-4.1, LC)
TNM1PCXLX1601 1x10GE (XFP)/1xSTM-16 (ESFP, S-16.1, LC)
TNM1PCXLX401 1x10GE (XFP)/1xSTM-4 (ESFP, S-4.1, LC)

3.1.8 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including the port performance, dimensions,
weight, and power consumption.
Table 3-12 lists the technical specifications of the PCX.
Table 3-12 Technical specifications of the PCX
Item Performance
Auxiliar
y ports
and
manage
ment
ports
NMS/
COM
Ethernet NM port/NM
serial port
Not involved
EXT Reserved Not involved
Service
ports
TX/RX
(PCXL
X/
PCXX)
10GE optical port See Table 3-13, Table 3-26, Table
3-27, Table 3-14, and Table 3-15.
TX/RX
(PCXL
G/
PCXGA
/
PCXGB
)
GE optical port See Table 3-16, Table 3-17, Table
3-25, and Table 3-18.
47
Item Performance
TX/RX
(PCXL
X/
PCXLG
)
STM-1/4/16 optical/
electrical port
See Table 3-20, Table 3-21, Table
3-22, Table 3-23, Table 3-28, Table
3-29, Table 3-19, and Table 3-24.
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
22.36 mm x 193.80 mm x 269.73 mm
Weight 0.80 kg
Power consumption l PCXLX: 45 W
l PCXX: 44.5 W
l PCXLG: 37 W
l PCXGA/PCXGB: 36.5 W

Table 3-13 Specifications of the 10GE two-fiber bidirectional optical ports
Item Value
Optical port
type
10GBASE-SR
(LAN)
/10GBASE-SW
(WAN)
10GBASE-LR
(LAN)
/10GBASE-LW
(WAN)
10GBASE-ER
(LAN)
/10GBASE-EW
(WAN)
10GBASE-ZR
(LAN)
/10GBASE-ZW
(WAN)
Optical fiber
type
Multi-mode LC Single-mode LC Single-mode LC Single-mode LC
Transmission
distance (km)
0.3 10 40 80
Operating
wavelength
(nm)
840 to 860 1260 to 1355 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
Mean
launched
power (dBm)
-1.3 to -7.3 -8.2 to 0.5 -4.7 to +4 0 to 4
Receiver
minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
-7.5 -12.6 -14.1 -21
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-1 0.5 -1 -7
48
Item Value
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
3 3.5 3 3

Table 3-14 Specifications of the 10GE single-fiber bidirectional optical ports
Item Value
Optical port
type
10GBASE-LR (LAN)
/10GBASE-LW (WAN)
10GBASE-ER (LAN)
/10GBASE-EW (WAN)
Optical fiber
type
Single-mode LC Single-mode LC
Transmission
distance (km)
10 40
Operating
transmit
wavelength
(nm)
1330 1270 1330 1270
Operating
receive
wavelength
(nm)
1270 1330 1270 1330
Mean
launched
power (dBm)
-5 to 0 1 to 5
Receiver
minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
-14 -15
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
0.5 0.5
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
3.5 3.5

49
Table 3-15 Ethernet performance specifications of the 10GE optical ports
Item Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Latency (us) Packet Loss
Ratio (%)
Delay jitter
(us)
64.00 14880952.00 13.00 0.00 0.57
128.00 8445945.00 13.60 0.00 0.50
256.00 4528985.00 14.90 0.00 0.60
512.00 2349624.00 16.00 0.00 0.60
1024.00 1197318.00 16.40 0.00 0.60
1280.00 961538.00 16.60 0.00 0.50
1518.00 812743.00 16.80 0.00 0.60
2000.00 618811.00 17.20 0.00 0.50
9600.00 129937.00 23.30 0.00 0.50

Table 3-16 Specifications of the GE two-fiber bidirectional optical ports
Item Value
Optical port
type
1000BASE-SX 1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-VX 1000BASE-ZX
Optical fiber
type
Transmission
distance (km)
0.5 10 40 80
Operating
wavelength
(nm)
770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Mean
launched
power (dBm)
-9.5 to -2.5 -9 to -3 -5 to 0 -2 to +5
Receiver
minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
-17 -20 -23 -23
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
0 -3 -3 -3
50
Item Value
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
9 9 9 9

Table 3-17 Specifications of the GE single-fiber bidirectional optical ports
Paramete
r
Value
Type of
optical
interface
1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-VX
Transmiss
ion
distance
(km)
10 40
Type of
fiber
Operating
transmit
wavelengt
h (nm)
1490 1310 1490 1310
Operating
receive
wavelengt
h (nm)
1310 1490 1310 1490
Launched
optical
power
range
(dBm)
-9 to -3 -2 to 3
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19.5 -23
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3 -3
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
9 9

51
Table 3-18 Ethernet performance specifications of the GE optical ports
Item Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back
(Frames)
64.00 1488095.00 18.70 0.00 14880950.00
128.00 844595.00 20.10 0.00 8445950.00
256.00 452899.00 24.60 0.00 4528990.00
512.00 234962.00 31.00 0.00 2349620.00
1024.00 119732.00 39.90 0.00 1197320.00
1280.00 96154.00 44.10 0.00 961540.00
1518.00 81274.00 48.30 0.00 812740.00
2000.00 61881.00 56.30 0.00 618810.00
9600.00 12994.00 184.00 0.00 129940.00

Table 3-19 Specifications of STM-1 electrical ports
Item Value
Bit rate 155520 kbit/s
Code pattern CMI
Connector SAA straight female
Signal bit rate at the output port Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Permitted frequency deviation at
the input port
Allowed attenuation at the input
port
Input jitter tolerance

Table 3-20 Specifications of the STM-1 two-fiber bidirectional optical ports
Item Value
Nominal bit rate 155520 kbit/s
Optical port type S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2
52
Item Value
Transmission distance
(km)
15 40 80
Operating wavelength
range (nm)
1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
Optical fiber type Single-mode LC Single-mode LC Single-mode LC
Launched optical power
range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0
Receiver sensitivity
(dBm)
-28 -34 -34
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8 -10 -10
Minimum extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2 10 10
NOTE
Format of optical port type is defined as follows: transmission distance-signal rate.fiber type
Explanation for optical port type "S-1.1" is as follows: "S" represents short distance; the first digit "1"
represents STM-1 signals; the second digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm).
Explanation for optical port type "L-1.1" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first digit "1"

Table 3-21 Specifications for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the STM-1
optical ports
Parameter Value
Line code pattern NRZ
Type of optical interface S-1.1 L-1.1
(km)
15 40
Type of fiber Single-mode LC Single-mode LC
Operating transmit
wavelength (nm)
1550 1310 1550 1310
Operating receive
wavelength (nm)
1310 1550 1310 1550
53
Parameter Value
range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -5 to 0
(dBm)
-32 -32
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8 -10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.5 10

Item Value
Transmission
distance (km)
15 40 80
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1274 to 1356 1280 to 1335 1480 to 1580
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -3 to +2 -3 to +2
(dBm)
-28 -28 -28
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8 -8 -8
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2 10 10
NOTE

54
optical ports
Paramete
r
Value
Nominal
bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Line code
pattern
NRZ
Type of
optical
interface
S-4.1 L-4.1
Transmiss
ion
distance
(km)
15 40
Type of
fiber
Operating
transmit
wavelengt
h (nm)
1490 1310 1490 1310
Operating
receive
wavelengt
h (nm)
1310 1490 1310 1490
Launched
optical
power
range
(dBm)
-9 to -3 -2 to 3
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19.5 -23
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3 -3
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
9 9

55
Item Value
Transmission
distance (km)
15 40 80
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-5 to 0 -2 to +3 -2 to +3
(dBm)
-18 -27 -28
Minimum overload
(dBm)
0 -9 -9
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2 8.2 8.2
NOTE
Explanation for optical port type "S-16.1" is as follows: "S" represents short distance; the first two digits
"16" represent STM-16 signals; the third digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm).
Explanation for optical port type "L-16.1" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first two digits

Table 3-25 Parameters specified for colored GE optical ports (CWDM)
Parameter Value
CWDM
Nominal bit
rate
1,250,000 kbit/s
Type of fiber Single-mode LC
Transmission
distance (km)
40 80
56
Parameter Value
CWDM
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
0 to 5 0 to 5
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1471 to 1611, in steps of
20
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19 -28
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-3 -9
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2 8.2

Table 3-26 Parameters specified for colored 10GE optical ports (CWDM)
Parameter Value
CWDM
Nominal bit rate l LAN mode: 10,312,500 kbit/s
l WAN mode: 9,953,280 kbit/s
Transmission distance (km) 70
range (dBm)
0 to 4
Operating wavelength range
(nm)
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) l 1451 nm to 1551 nm: -23
l 1571 nm: -22
l 1591 nm to 1611 nm: -21
Minimum overload (dBm) -9
(dB)
8.2

57
Table 3-27 Parameters specified for colored 10GE optical ports (DWDM)
Parameter Value
DWDM
Transmission
distance (km)
40 80
Launched optical
power range
(dBm)
-1 to +2 -1 to +3
Central frequency
(THz)
192.1 to 196.0 192.1 to 196.0
Central frequency
deviation (GHz)
10 10
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
-17 -24
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-1 -9
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
9.5 8.2

Table 3-28 Parameters specified for colored STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 optical ports (CWDM)
Parameter Value
CWDM
Nominal bit
rate
155,520 kbit/s (STM-1), 622,080 kbit/s (STM-4), 2,488,320 kbit/s
(STM-16)
Transmission
distance (km)
40 80
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
0 to 5 0 to 5
58
Parameter Value
CWDM
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
20
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19 -28
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-3 -9
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2 8.2

Table 3-29 Parameters specified for colored STM-16 optical ports (DWDM)
Parameter Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate 2,488,320 kbit/s (STM-16)
(km)
120
range (dBm)
-1 to +3
Central frequency (THz) 192.1 to 196.0
Central frequency
deviation (GHz)
10
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -28
(dB)
8.2

3.2 CXL
The CXL is a system control, cross-connect, timing, and line board that works in TDM mode.
59
The functional version of CXL boards is TNM1. Depending on the rates of line units, CXL
boards are available in three types: TNM1CXL1, TNM1CXL4, and TNM1CXL16.
Table 3-30 describes the versions of the CXL.
Table 3-30 Versions of the CXL
Board Type Available Port Type of Optical Port
TNM1CXL1 1xSTM-1 optical/electrical
port
Optical port: S-1.1, L-1.1,
L-1.2
Electrical port: SFP electrical
port
TNM1CXL4 1xSTM-4 optical port S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2
TNM1CXL16 1xSTM-16 optical port S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2

The CXL has a system control and communication unit, a cross-connect unit, a clock unit, and
an STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 line unit.
Table 3-31 lists the functions and features that the CXL supports.
Table 3-31 Functions and features that the CXL supports
Cross-connection
functions
l Provides a higher order cross-connect capacity of 20 Gbit/s and
a lower order cross-connect capacity of 5 Gbit/s.
l Supports cross-connections at the VC-4, VC-3, VC-12,
VC-4-4c, and VC-4-16c levels, and achieves service grooming
between lines, between tributaries, and between lines and
tributaries.
60
Line functions l Provides one STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 optical port. STM-1
optical ports support SFP electrical modules.
l The STM-1/STM-4 optical port supports single-fiber
bidirectional optical modules.
l Provides the clock unit with one synchronous timing source.
l Processes section overheads and higher order path overheads.
l Sets K-byte reporting, transmission, and pass-through.
l Provides transparent DCCs.
l Sets and queries J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
l Processes AU pointers.
l Supports maintenance features such as inloops and outloops on
VC-4 paths, setting of overhead bytes to be sent/received, and
pass-through tests and checks of K bytes.
Optical module
specifications
l The STM-16 optical port can be of the S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2
type.
type.
type.
l An optical port can be a colored CWDM optical port or a
colored DWDM optical port. A colored CWDM optical port
supports a transmission distance of 40 km or 80 km. A colored
DWDM optical port supports a transmission distance of 120
km.
l The characteristics of all optical ports comply with ITU-T G.
957.
l Appropriate SFP optical modules can be used and the running
status can be monitored. This facilitates your maintenance.
l Allows setting the on/off state of a laser and supports the ALS
function.
l Optical module information can be detected and queried.
NOTE
Only an STM-16 optical port can be a colored DWDM optical port.
Clock functions l Supports the non-standard SSM protocol, standard SSM
protocol, and extended SSM protocol.
l Provides synchronous clock signals for boards in the system.
l Supports the following working modes: trace mode, holdover
mode, and free-run mode.
l Controls clock source priorities.
l Controls the clock source switching function.
l Processes and sets the S1 byte.
61
System control
functions
l Exchanges information with other boards, provides the data
configuration function, and collects performance data and
alarm data.
l Provides a standard Ethernet NM port/RS-232 data terminal
equipment (DTE) port so that the NMS can manage the
equipment.
Alarms and
performance events
Provides various alarms and performance events, facilitating
equipment management and maintenance.
Protection schemes l Supports the following equipment-level protection scheme:
1+1 backup
l Supports the following network-level protection schemes:
Two-fiber unidirectional ring MSP
CXL4/CXL16: Two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP
Linear MSP
SNCP
Maintenance features l Inloops and outloops at optical ports
l Warm resets and cold resets (with warm resets having no impact
on services)
l Board manufacturing information query
l In-service FPGA loading
l Smooth upgrade of the board software

NOTE
For the SDH line unit and the logical unit that consists of the system control and communication unit, cross-
connect unit, and clock unit on a CXL board, switching of services carried on either unit does not cause
switching of services carried on the other unit.
The CXL consists of a system control and communication unit, a cross-connect unit, a line unit,
a clock unit, and a power supply unit.
Figure 3-4 shows the functional block diagram of the CXL.
62
Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CXL
Backplane
System control and
communication unit
Cross-
connect unit
Power
supply
unit
Clock
unit
Control bus
TDM service
units on the board
Ethernet NM port
NM serial port
FE signal
Service board
STM-1/4/16
Line unit
+3.3 V power supplied
to other boards
+12 V power supplied to fans
Clock signal provided to the
other units on the board
Clock unit of the
standby CXL board
Clock signal required
by other boards
System control and
communication unit of the
standby CXL board
System power supply
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse
System power supply

System Control and Communication Unit
The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit. The
system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
l The CPU unit performs the following control functions using the control bus:
Manages other boards and the other units on the CXL, and collects alarms and
performance events.
Implements software loading by reading information from the CF card.
l The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control
unit.
l The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port.
l The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enables
FPGA loading.
l The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit,
the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes:
Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit
Adding or dropping orderwire and synchronous/asynchronous data services
Exchanging orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines
l The system control and communication unit on a CXL board communicates with the system
control and communication unit on the standby CXL board by carrying FE signals over the
63
communication bus in the backplane. In this manner, the active and standby CXL boards
form a 1+1 hot backup relationship.
Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order cross-
connect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-5 shows the functional
block diagram of the cross-connect unit.
Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM
service unit
Higher
order cross-
connect
module
HOXC
Lower order
cross-
connect
module
LOXC
Sink TDM
service unit

The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect module
over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect
module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit.
If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect module
grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower order
cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services
back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module processes
the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.
Clock Unit
l The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from service clock sources at service
ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means of the phase-locked
loop, the clock unit provides the system clock to other units on the CXL and other boards.
l The clock units on the active and standby CXL boards transmit clock signals to each other.
Line Unit
The line unit performs the following functions: STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 signal receiving, serial/
parallel conversion, clock signal extraction, data restoration, overhead processing, alarm
monitoring/reporting, signal inloops/outloops, MSP, and ALS functions.
64
Power Supply Unit
l Combines and then converts -48 V/-60 V DC power inputs into the power supply required
by the chips of the other units on the local board.
l Combines and then converts -48 V/-60 V DC power inputs into the +3.3 V power supply
required by other boards.
l Combines and then converts -48 V/-60 V DC power inputs into the +12 V power supply
required by the fan.
3.2.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, ports, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CXL
C
X
LCLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
S
T
A
T
P
R
O
G
S
Y
N
C
S
R
V
A
C
T
L
O
S
TX/RX
RST
EXT NMS1/COM
Indicators
The front panel of the CXL has the following indicators: STAT, PROG, SYNC, SRV, ACT, and
LOS. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
65
Management Ports
Table 3-32 Description of the clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports
Port Description Connector Type Pin Assignment Required
Cable
NMS1/
COM
Ethernet NM port/
NM serial port
RJ45
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
For status
explanation for the
indicators of an
RJ45 port, see
Table 3-33.
l Pin 1: for the
network port to
transmit data
(+)
l Pin 2: for the
network port to
transmit data (-)
l Pin 3: for the
network port to
receive data (+)
l Pin 4: signal
ground
l Pin 5: receive
end of the NM
serial port
l Pin 6: for the
network port to
receive data (-)
l Pin 7: not
defined
l Pin 8: transmit
end of the NM
serial port
16.10
Network
Cable
EXT Reserved - -

NOTE
When an NE is configured with two CXL boards, only port COM on the working CXL board is available.
properly.
data.
66
transmitting data.

Service Ports
Table 3-34 Description of the service ports on the CXL
Por
t
Descriptio
n
Connector Type Pin
Assignm
ent
Required
Cable
TX/
RX
Transmits
and receives
STM-1/
STM-4/
STM-16
optical/
electrical
signals.
STM-1/4/16 optical port: LC SFP optical
module
TX RX
STM-1 electrical port: SFP electrical
module
TX
RX
l TX
repres
ents
the
transm
it port.
l RX
repres
ents
the
receiv
e port.
SFP optical
port: 16.1
Fiber
Jumper
SFP
electrical
port: 16.6
STM-1
Cable

Buttons
Table 3-35 Buttons
Button Name Description
RST Warm reset button After this button is pressed, a warm
reset is performed on the board.

Labels
3.2.5 DIP Switches and CF Card
This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF card.
67
CF Card
NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), software
packages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. To synchronize the NE databases, system
parameters, and NE logs on the CXL board to the CF card, enable the regular backup function.
NOTE
The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the CXL board during package diffusion.
Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations are not needed to synchronize software packages
on the CXL board and the CF card.
Positions of the DIP Switches and CF Card
1
2
S
N D
1 2 3 4
S W 2
I P
W 2
O

1. DIP switches 2. CF card
68
Meanings of DIP Switch Settings
a
Meaning
4 3 2 1
the board works
with the
watchdog
enabled.
reserved.
0 0 1 0 Indicates that a
memory self-
check is
running.
the board is
being debugged.
the board works
with the
watchdog
disabled and a
full memory
check is
running.
BIOS holdover
state.
BIOS exhibition
state.
reserved. (By
default, this
value indicates
that the board
works with the
watchdog
enabled.)
69
a
Meaning
4 3 2 1
the equipment is
being tested and
the NE software
is started
directly without
a self-check.
1 0 0 1 Restores the
data of the CF
card.
1 0 1 0 Erases data in
the system
parameter area.
1 0 1 1 Erases
databases.
1 1 0 0 Erases NE
software,
including
patches.
1 1 0 1 Erases
databases and
NE software
(including
patches).
1 1 1 0 Erases all data in
the file system.
1 1 1 1 Formats the
flash file
system, and
erases data in
the system
parameter area
and extended
BIOS, with
basic BIOS
reserved.
NOTE
a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a
DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.

70
3.2.6 Valid Slots
The CXL can be inserted in slot 7 (preferred) or slot 8 in the chassis.
3.2.7 Feature Code
indicates the type of optical port. CXL boards have feature codes.
Table 3-36 Feature code of the CXL
Feature Code Type of Optical Port
01 S-1.1
02 L-1.1
03 S-4.1
04 L-4.1
05 S-16.1
06 L-16.1
07 L-16.2
08 S-1.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical
module (The transmit wavelength is 1310 nm
and the receive wavelength is 1550 nm.)
10 L-1.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical
11 L-1.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical

71
This section describes the board specifications, including the parameters specified for optical
ports, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Table 3-37 lists the technical specifications of the CXL.
Table 3-37 Technical specifications of the CXL
Item Performance
Auxiliar
y and
manage
ment
ports
NMS1/
COM
Network management
system (NMS) port or NMS
serial port
Not involved
EXT Reserved Not involved
Service
ports
TX/RX STM-1/4/16 optical/
electrical ports
Table 3-39, Table 3-40, Table 3-41,
Table 3-42, Table 3-43, Table 3-38,
Table 3-44, Table 3-45
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
22.36 mm x 183.80 mm x 197.70 mm
Weight 0.50 kg
Power consumption 21 W

Item Value
Code pattern CMI
the input port
port

72
Item Value
(km)
15 40 80
range (nm)
1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0
(dBm)
-28 -34 -34
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8 -10 -10
(dB)
8.2 10 10
NOTE

optical ports
Parameter Value
(km)
15 40
Operating transmit
wavelength (nm)
1550 1310 1550 1310
73
Parameter Value
Operating receive
wavelength (nm)
1310 1550 1310 1550
range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -5 to 0
(dBm)
-32 -32
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8 -10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.5 10

Item Value
Transmission
distance (km)
15 40 80
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1274 to 1356 1280 to 1335 1480 to 1580
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -3 to +2 -3 to +2
(dBm)
-28 -28 -28
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8 -8 -8
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2 10 10
NOTE
74

optical ports
Paramete
r
Value
Nominal
bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Line code
pattern
NRZ
Type of
optical
interface
S-4.1 L-4.1
Transmiss
ion
distance
(km)
15 40
Type of
fiber
Operating
transmit
wavelengt
h (nm)
1490 1310 1490 1310
Operating
receive
wavelengt
h (nm)
1310 1490 1310 1490
Launched
optical
power
range
(dBm)
-9 to -3 -2 to 3
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19.5 -23
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3 -3
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
9 9

75
Item Value
Transmission
distance (km)
15 40 80
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-5 to 0 -2 to +3 -2 to +3
(dBm)
-18 -27 -28
Minimum overload
(dBm)
0 -9 -9
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2 8.2 8.2
NOTE
Explanation for optical port type "S-16.1" is as follows: "S" represents short distance; the first two digits

Table 3-44 Parameters specified for colored STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 optical ports (CWDM)
Parameter Value
CWDM
Nominal bit
rate
155,520 kbit/s (STM-1), 622,080 kbit/s (STM-4), 2,488,320 kbit/s
(STM-16)
Transmission
distance (km)
40 80
76
Parameter Value
CWDM
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
0 to 5 0 to 5
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
20
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19 -28
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-3 -9
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2 8.2

Table 3-45 Parameters specified for colored STM-16 optical ports (DWDM)
Parameter Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate 2,488,320 kbit/s (STM-16)
(km)
120
range (dBm)
-1 to +3
Central frequency (THz) 192.1 to 196.0
Central frequency
deviation (GHz)
10
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -28
(dB)
8.2
77
4 Packet Processing Boards
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN 550 supports the following packet processing boards: EF8F, EG4C, EM6T,
EM6F, EX1, PEX1, PEG1, CQ1, and MD1.
NOTE
PEX1 and PEG1 are integrated on the PCX board.
4.1 EF8F
The EF8F is an 8xFE processing board.
4.2 EM6T/EM6F
The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE processing board.
4.3 EG4C
The EG4C is a 4xGE processing board.
4.4 EX1
The EX1 is a 1x10GE Ethernet processing board.
4.5 MD1
The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service processing board.
4.6 CQ1
CQ1 boards are 4-port channelized STM-1 processing boards.
Hardware Description 4 Packet Processing Boards
78
4.1 EF8F
The EF8F is an 8xFE processing board.
The functional version of the EF8F is TNM1.
The EF8F receives/transmits, processes, and converges 8xFE signals.
Table 4-1 lists the functions and features that the EF8F supports. The EF8F needs to work with
the packet switching unit of the system control, switching, and timing board to implement
Ethernet service functions.
Table 4-1 Functions and features that the EF8F supports
Basic functions Receives/Transmits fast Ethernet (FE) service signals and
works with the packet switching unit to process the received
FE service signals.
Backplane bus bandwidth 1.25 Gbit/s
Port specifications l FE optical port: 100BASE-BX/100BASE-FX/100BASE-
LX/100BASE-VX/100BASE-ZX
l FE electrical port: 100BASE-T
l The following types of small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
modules are supported:
FE two-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module
FE single-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module
FE pluggable electrical module
Port
attributes
Working mode l FE optical ports support 100M full-duplex.
l FE electrical ports support auto-negotiation.
TAG attributes l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access, or
hybrid.
l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of a port.
Traffic control
at ports
Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies
with IEEE 802.3x.
79
Query and
setting of
optical power
thresholds
Supported
Packet
services
Ethernet line
(E-Line)
services
transmission
(VLANs)
l ETH pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3)
services: E-Line services carried by PWs (VPWS
services)
Ethernet local
area network
(E-LAN)
services
l ETH PWE3 services: E-LAN services carried by PWs
(virtual private LAN services [VPLSs])
Ethernet data
frame format
Jumbo frame Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600
bytes.
Maximum
transmission
unit (MTU)
Supports an MTU ranging from 960 bytes to 9600 bytes for
FE optical ports, with 1620 bytes being the default value.
Supports an MTU ranging from 960 bytes to 9016 bytes for
FE electrical ports, with 1620 bytes being the default value.
Protection
schemes
Tunnel
automatic
protection
switching
(APS)
Supports 1:1 tunnel APS.
Pseudo wire
(PW) APS
Supports 1:1 PW APS.
80
Multiple
Spanning Tree
Protocol
(MSTP)
Supports MSTP that runs only Common and Internal
Spanning Tree (CIST) instances. This type of MSTP provides
the same functions as the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
(RSTP).
Ethernet ring
protection
switching
(ERPS)
Supports ERPS that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344.
Link
aggregation
group (LAG)
l Aggregation types: manual aggregation and static
aggregation
Link-state pass
through (LPT)
Point-point and point-multipoint LPT
Quality of service (QoS) l DiffServ
Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB
service classes for service flows based on their QoS
information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities,
DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values) carried by packets.
Supports complex traffic classification based on C-VLAN
IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN
priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN
IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values carried by
packets, and V-UNI ingress policies.
l QoS policies
Passes or discards packets in a flow that matches rules
specified by a port policy or V-UNI ingress policy.
l CAR
Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports and
V-UNI ingresses.
l Shaping
81
Maintenan
ce features
Multiprotocol
Label
Switching
(MPLS)/
Multiprotocol
label switching
transport
profile (MPLS-
TP) operation,
administration
and
maintenance
(OAM)
failure detection (FFD), backward defect indication
(BDI), forward defect indication (FDI), ping, and
traceroute tests in compliance with ITU-T Y.1711.
l MPLS-TP OAM supports continuity checks (CCs),
remote defect indication (RDI), alarm indication signal
(AIS) insertion, loopback (LB) tests, linktrace (LT) tests,
PW loss measurement (LM), locked signal function
(LCK), test (TST) (only packet loss test supported), PW
Client Signal Fail (CSF) indication, and two-way delay
measurement (DM) in compliance with ITU-T G.8113.1.
Ethernet OAM
(ETH OAM)
l Ethernet service OAM:
Inloops at the physical (PHY)/media access control (MAC) layer of Ethernet
ports
Warm resets and cold resets (with warm resets having no impact on services)
SFP module information query
Ethernet performance monitoring (remote network monitoring [RMON])
Hot board swapping
Hot swapping for pluggable optical modules
l Supports mirroring in the ingress direction of UNI and
NNI ports.
l Supports mirroring of PORT+VLAN services in the
ingress direction of a UNI port.
Synchroni
zation
Synchronous
Ethernet
Transmits synchronous Ethernet clock signals at eight FE
optical ports.
82
IEEE 1588v2 Transmits IEEE 1588v2 time and clock signals at eight FE
optical ports.
IEEE 1588
adaptive clock
recovery
(ACR)
Transmits IEEE 1588 ACR signals at eight FE optical ports.
Data communication network
(DCN)
Each FE port provides one inband DCN channel.
Internet Group Management
Protocol (IGMP) snooping
Supported

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the EF8F.
Figure 4-1 EF8F board function block diagram
FE signal
access unit
Dual-fed and
selective-
receiving unit
Clock unit
Backplane
Control bus of the board
System control and
communication unit
Packet switching unit
FE signal
Ethernet
signal
Ethernet
signal
System control bus
Control signal
System clock signal
Power
supply unit
to the board

System power supply
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse
System power supply
Service
processing unit
Logic control
unit

83
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 4-2 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EF8F
Step Function Unit Processing Flow
1 FE signal access unit l Receives FE signals.
l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel
conversion for FE signals.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, and
CRC checks for frame signals.
2 Service processing
unit
Works with the system control, switching, and timing
board to provide the following functions:
l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames.
l Processes labels in Multiprotocol Label Switching
(MPLS) or pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge
(PWE3) packets.
l Performs QoS processing such as traffic classification
and committed access rate (CAR) restriction for
Ethernet data frames.
l Processes OAM packets and protocol packets.
3 Dual-fed and
selective-receiving
unit
Transmits Ethernet data frames to the active and standby
packet switching units.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 4-3 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EF8F
1 Dual-fed and
selective-receiving
unit
l Selects Ethernet data frames from the packet
switching unit.
l Transmits Ethernet data frames to the Ethernet
processing unit.
unit
l Processes labels in MPLS or PWE3 packets.
l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and
queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames.
84
3 FE signal access unit l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, and
CRC code computing.
l Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for
Ethernet data frames, and sends out the generated FE
signals through Ethernet ports.

Control Signal Processing
The service processing unit controls the FE signal access unit using management control signals.
The logic control unit controls the service processing unit and the dual-fed and selective-
receiving unit using the control bus on the board.
The logic control unit communicates with the active and standby system control and
communication units using the system control bus. Specifically, the logic control unit transmits
the configuration data and query commands from the system control and communication unit
to various units of the board; it also transmits the command responses, alarms, and performance
events reported by units on the board to the system control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit
Receives two -48 V/-60 V DC power supplies from the backplane, converts the supplied power
into +3.3 V power by using the DC-DC unit, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other
units on the board.
Clock Unit
l The clock unit receives the system clock from the control bus on the backplane, and supplies
clock signals to other units on the EF8F.
FE signal access unit, and performs protocol processing to achieve clock/time
synchronization.
4.1.4 Front Panel
There are indicators and ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 4-2 shows the front panel of the EF8F.
Figure 4-2 Front panel of the EF8F
E
F
8
F
OUT1 IN1
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
L
/
A
1
L
/
A
2
L
/
A
3
L
/
A
4
L
/
A
5
L
/
A
6
L
/
A
7
L
/
A
8
OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4 OUT5 IN5 OUT6 IN6 OUT7 IN7 OUT8 IN8
85

Indicators
The front panel of the EF8F has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, L/A1, L/A2, L/A3, L/
A4, L/A5, L/A6, L/A7, and L/A8. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status
Explanation.
Ports
Table 4-4 Ports on an EF8F board
Port Descripti
on
Cable
IN1-
IN8
Input ports
for the first
to eighth
FE optical/
electrical
signals
LC SFP optical module:
OUT IN
RJ-45 SFP electrical module:
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LC SFP optical
module:
l OUT represents
the transmit
port.
l IN represents
the receive port.
RJ-45 SFP
electrical module:
An FE electrical
port supports the
MDI, MDI-X, and
auto-MDI/MDI-X
modes. For pin
assignments for the
port, see Table
4-5 and Table 4-6.
LC SFP
optical
module:
16.1 Fiber
Jumper
RJ-45 SFP
electrical
module:
16.10
Network
Cable
OUT1-
OUT8
Output
ports for
the first to
eighth FE
optical/
electrical
signals

Table 4-5 Pin assignments for an RJ45 port in MDI mode
Pin 10/100BASE-TX 1000BASE-T
Signal Function Signal Function
1 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A
(+)
2 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A
(-)
3 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B
(+)
4 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C
(+)
86
5 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C
(-)
6 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B
(-)
7 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D
(+)
8 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D
(-)

Table 4-6 Pin assignments for an RJ45 port in MDI-X mode
(+)
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
(-)
(+)
(-)

4.1.5 DIP Switches and Jumpers
None.
87
4.1.6 Valid Slots
The EF8F can be inserted in slots 1-6. The slot allocation priority is as follows: slots 3 and 5 >
slots 1 and 2 > slots 4 and 6. The logical slots of the EF8F on the NMS are the same as its physical
slots.
4.1.7 Feature Code
None.
Table 4-7 lists the technical specifications of the EF8F.
Table 4-7 Technical Specifications of the EF8F
Item Performance
Service ports For the specifications of the FE optical port, see Table 4-10, Table
4-11, and Table 4-12.
For the specifications of the FE electrical port, see Table 4-8 and Table
4-9.
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight 0.55 kg

Table 4-8 Specifications of the EF8F Ethernet electrical ports
Service Port Port Rate Code Pattern Port Type
FE electrical
port
100BASE-T MLT-3 coding
signals
RJ45

88
Table 4-9 Ethernet performance specifications of the FE electrical ports
Item Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back
(Frames)
64.00 148810.00 12.80 0.00 744050.00
128.00 84459.00 17.90 0.00 422295.00
256.00 45290.00 28.00 0.00 226450.00
512.00 23496.00 48.40 0.00 117480.00
1024.00 11973.00 89.40 0.00 59865.00
1280.00 9615.00 109.80 0.00 48075.00
1518.00 8126.00 129.00 0.00 40635.00
2000.00 6188.00 167.50 0.00 30940.00
9600.00 1299.00 773.10 0.00 6459.00

Table 4-10 Specifications of the FE two-fiber bidirectional optical ports
Item Value
Optical port
type
100BASE-FX 100BASE-LX 100BASE-VX 100BASE-ZX
Optical fiber
type
Transmissio
n distance
(km)
2 15 40 80
Operating
wavelength
(nm)
1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
Mean
launched
power (dBm)
-19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0
Receiver
minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
-30 -28 -34 -34
89
Item Value
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-14 -8 -10 -10
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
10 8.2 10 10

Table 4-11 Specifications of the FE single-fiber bidirectional optical ports
Parameter Value
Type of optical interface 100Base-BX
(km)
15 40
Operating transmit
wavelength (nm)
1550 1310 1550 1310
Operating receive
wavelength (nm)
1310 1550 1310 1550
range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -5 to 0
(dBm)
-32 -32
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8 -10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.5 10

Table 4-12 Ethernet performance specifications of the FE optical ports
Item Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back
(Frames)
64.00 148810.00 44.90 0.00 744050.00
128.00 84459.00 65.90 0.00 422295.00
256.00 45290.00 106.50 0.00 226450.00
90
Item Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back
(Frames)
512.00 23496.00 182.20 0.00 117480.00
1024.00 11973.00 241.10 0.00 59865.00
1280.00 9615.00 269.20 0.00 48075.00
1518.00 8126.00 292.20 0.00 40635.00
2000.00 6188.00 341.90 0.00 30940.00
9600.00 1299.00 1133.30 0.00 6459.00

4.2 EM6T/EM6F
The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE processing board.
The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is TNM1.
The EM6T/EM6F receives/transmits and processes four FE signals and two GE signals.
Table 4-13 lists the functions and features that the EM6T/EM6F supports. The EM6T/EM6F
needs to work with the packet switching unit of the system control, switching, and timing board
to implement Ethernet service functions.
Table 4-13 Functions and features that the EM6T/EM6F supports
Function and
Feature
Board
EM6T EM6F
Basic functions Receives/Transmits FE/GE service signals and works with the
packet switching unit to process the received FE/GE service
signals.
Backplane bus
bandwidth
2.5 Gbit/s
Port
specifica
tions
FE
electrical
port
Provides four 10/100BASE-T(X) ports.
91
Function and
Feature
Board
EM6T EM6F
FE optical
port
- l GE ports can function as FE optical
ports if pluggable FE optical
modules are used. The following
types of FE optical ports are
supported: 100BASE-BX/
100BASE-FX/100BASE-LX/
l The following types of small form-
factor pluggable (SFP) modules are
supported:
FE two-fiber bidirectional
FE single-fiber bidirectional
GE port Provides two fixed
ports:
l 10/100BASE-T(X)
l 1000BASE-T
l Provides two GE ports by using SFP
modules of any of the following
types: 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-
LX/1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-
ZX/1000Base-T
l The following types of SFP modules
are supported:
GE two-fiber bidirectional
GE single-fiber bidirectional
GE pluggable electrical module
l A GE optical port can be a colored
CWDM optical port. A colored
CWDM optical port supports a
transmission distance of 40 km or 80
km.
Port
attributes
Working
mode
l The FE electrical port supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-
duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, and auto-
negotiation.
l The FE optical port supports 100M full-duplex.
l The GE electrical port supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-
duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, 1000M full-
duplex, and auto-negotiation.
l The GE optical port supports 1000M full-duplex and auto-
negotiation.
92
Function and
Feature
Board
EM6T EM6F
TAG
attributes
l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access, or hybrid.
Traffic
control at
ports
Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with
IEEE 802.3x.
Port type
query
Supported
Query and
setting of
optical
power
thresholds
Not supported Supported
Packet
services
E-Line
services
transmission
(VLANs)
l ETH pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) services: E-
Line services carried by PWs (VPWS services)
E-LAN
services
l ETH PWE3 services: E-LAN services carried by PWs (virtual
private LAN services [VPLSs])
Ethernet
data frame
format
Jumbo
frame
Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes.
93
Function and
Feature
Board
EM6T EM6F
Maximum
transmissio
n unit
(MTU)
Ranges from 960 bytes to 9600 bytes, with 1620 bytes being the
default value.
Protectio
n
schemes
Tunnel
automatic
protection
switching
(APS)
Pseudo
wire (PW)
APS
Multiple
Spanning
Tree
Protocol
(MSTP)
Supports MSTP that runs only Common and Internal Spanning
Tree (CIST) instances. This type of MSTP provides the same
functions as the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP).
Ethernet
ring
protection
switching
(ERPS)
Supports ERPS that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344.
Link
aggregatio
n group
(LAG)
l Aggregation types: manual aggregation and static aggregation
Link-state
pass
through
(LPT)
94
Function and
Feature
Board
EM6T EM6F
Quality of service
(QoS)
l DiffServ
Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB service
classes for service flows based on their QoS information (C-
VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS
EXP values) carried by packets.
Supports complex traffic classification based on C-VLAN IDs,
S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, C-
VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN
priorities, or DSCP values carried by packets, and V-UNI
ingress policies.
l QoS policies
Passes or discards packets in a flow that matches rules specified
by a port policy or V-UNI ingress policy.
l CAR
Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports and V-UNI
ingresses.
l Shaping
Mainten
ance
features
Multiproto
col Label
Switching
(MPLS)/
Multiproto
col label
switching
transport
profile
(MPLS-
TP)
operation,
administrat
ion and
maintenanc
e (OAM)
failure detection (FFD), backward defect indication (BDI),
forward defect indication (FDI), ping, and traceroute tests in
compliance with ITU-T Y.1711.
l MPLS-TP OAM supports continuity checks (CCs), remote
defect indication (RDI), alarm indication signal (AIS) insertion,
loopback (LB) tests, linktrace (LT) tests, PW loss measurement
(LM), locked signal function (LCK), test (TST) (only packet
loss test supported), PW Client Signal Fail (CSF) indication,
and two-way delay measurement (DM) in compliance with
ITU-T G.8113.1.
95
Function and
Feature
Board
EM6T EM6F
Ethernet
OAM
(ETH
OAM)
Inloops at the physical PHY/MAC layer of Ethernet ports
Warm resets and cold resets (with warm resets having no impact on services)
Hot board swapping
Port
mirroring
l Supports local port mirroring.
l Supports mirroring in the ingress direction of UNI and NNI
ports.
l Supports mirroring of PORT+VLAN services in the ingress
direction of a UNI port.
Synchro
nization
Synchrono
us Ethernet
Transmits synchronous Ethernet clock signals at six ports.
NOTE
SFP electrical modules do not support synchronous Ethernet clocks.
When working in 10BASE-T mode, FE/GE ports do not support
synchronous Ethernet clocks.
Data communication
network (DCN)
Each FE/GE port provides one inband DCN channel.
Internet Group
Management Protocol
(IGMP) snooping
Supported

96
This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F.
Figure 4-3 EM6T/EM6F board function block diagram
GE signal
access unit
FE signal
access unit
Dual-fed and
selective-
receiving unit
Logic control
unit
Clock unit
Backplane
System control and
communication unit
GE signal
FE signal
Ethernet
signal
Ethernet
signal
System control bus
Control signal
Control signal
System clock signal
Power
supply unit
to the board

System power supply
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse
System power supply
Service
processing unit

Table 4-14 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EM6T/EM6F
1 GE signal access
unit/FE signal access
unit
l Receives GE/FE signals.
conversion for GE/FE signals.
cyclic redundancy checks (CRCs) for frame signals.
97
unit
(PWE3) packets.
3 Dual-fed and
selective-receiving
unit

Table 4-15 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EM6T/EM6F
1 Dual-fed and
selective-receiving
unit
switching unit.
processing unit.
unit
3 GE signal access
unit/FE signal access
unit
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, and
CRC code computing.
Ethernet data frames, and sends out the generated GE/
FE signals through Ethernet ports.

The service processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit using management control
signals.
98
Power Supply Unit
units on the board.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
4.2.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, FE service ports, and GE service ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 4-4 Front panel of the EM6T
E
M
6
T
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4
GE2
E
M
6
T
GE1
P
R
O
G

Figure 4-5 Front panel of the EM6F
E
M
6
F
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
GE2
E
M
6
F
GE1
L
I
N
K
1
L
I
N
K
2
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4
P
R
O
G

Indicators
The front panel of the EM6T has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, and PROG. The front
panel of the EM6F has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, PROG, LINK1, and LINK2. For
status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
99
Ports
Table 4-16 Ports on an EM6T/EM6F board
Port Bo
ard
Descri
ption
Cable
FE1,
FE2,
FE3,
FE4
EM
6T/
EM
6F
FE
service
port
RJ45
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
For status
explanation
for the
indicators of
an RJ45 port,
see Table
4-17.
The FE ports and GE
electrical ports
support the MDI,
MDI-X, and auto-
MDI/MDI-X modes.
Table 4-18 and
Table 4-19 provide
the pin assignments
for an RJ45 port in
different modes.
16.10
Network
Cable
GE1
/
GE2
EM
6T
GE
service
port
(fixed
electric
al port)
RJ45
EM
6F
FE/GE
service
port
(using
SFP
module
s)
GE
electrical
port: SFP
electrical
module
FE/GE optical port: LC
SFP optical module
TX RX
l TX represents the
transmit port.
l RX represents the
receive port.
16.1 Fiber
Jumper

properly.
data.
transmitting data.

100
(+)
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
(-)
(+)
(-)

(+)
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
(-)
101
(+)
(-)

Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EM6F.
None.
4.2.6 Valid Slots
The EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 1-6. The slot allocation priority is as follows: slots 4
and 6 > slots 1 and 2 > slots 3 and 5. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the NMS are the
same as its physical slots.
4.2.7 Feature Code
None.
Table 4-20 lists the technical specifications of the EM6T/EM6F.
Table 4-20 Technical specifications of the EM6T/EM6F
Item Performance
Service
ports
FE1,
FE2,
FE3,
FE4
FE electrical port See Table 4-21 and Table 4-22.
GE1,
GE2
FE optical port See Table 4-23, Table 4-24, and
Table 4-25.
102
Item Performance
GE electrical port See Table 4-21 and Table 4-26.
GE optical port By using different SFP modules,
the equipment provides GE
optical ports with different
application codes and
transmission distances.
For port specifications, see Table
4-27, Table 4-28, Table 4-30, and
Table 4-29.
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight l EM6T: 0.37 kg
l EM6F: 0.40 kg
Power consumption l EM6T: 10.4 W
l EM6F: 11.3 W

Table 4-21 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's Ethernet electrical ports
GE/FE electrical
port
10BASE-T Manchester coding
signals
RJ45
GE/FE electrical
port
100BASE-T(X) MLT-3 coding
signals
GE electrical
port
1000BASE-T 4D-PAM5 coding
signals

Table 4-22 Ethernet performance specifications of the FE electrical ports
Item Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back
(Frames)
64.00 148810.00 12.80 0.00 744050.00
128.00 84459.00 17.90 0.00 422295.00
256.00 45290.00 28.00 0.00 226450.00
512.00 23496.00 48.40 0.00 117480.00
103
Item Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back
(Frames)
1024.00 11973.00 89.40 0.00 59865.00
1280.00 9615.00 109.80 0.00 48075.00
1518.00 8126.00 129.00 0.00 40635.00
2000.00 6188.00 167.50 0.00 30940.00
9600.00 1299.00 773.10 0.00 6459.00

Item Value
Optical port
type
Optical fiber
type
Transmissio
n distance
(km)
2 15 40 80
Operating
wavelength
(nm)
1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
Mean
launched
power (dBm)
-19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0
Receiver
minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
-30 -28 -34 -34
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-14 -8 -10 -10
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
10 8.2 10 10

104
Parameter Value
(km)
15 40
Operating transmit
wavelength (nm)
1550 1310 1550 1310
Operating receive
wavelength (nm)
1310 1550 1310 1550
range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -5 to 0
(dBm)
-32 -32
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8 -10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.5 10

Item Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back
(Frames)
64.00 148810.00 44.90 0.00 744050.00
128.00 84459.00 65.90 0.00 422295.00
256.00 45290.00 106.50 0.00 226450.00
512.00 23496.00 182.20 0.00 117480.00
1024.00 11973.00 241.10 0.00 59865.00
1280.00 9615.00 269.20 0.00 48075.00
1518.00 8126.00 292.20 0.00 40635.00
2000.00 6188.00 341.90 0.00 30940.00
9600.00 1299.00 1133.30 0.00 6459.00

105
Table 4-26 Ethernet performance specifications of the GE electrical ports
Item Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back
(Frames)
64.00 1488095.00 7.00 0.00 7440475.00
128.00 844595.00 7.40 0.00 4222975.00
256.00 452899.00 8.40 0.00 2264495.00
512.00 234962.00 10.60 0.00 1174810.00
1024.00 119732.00 14.70 0.00 598660.00
1280.00 96154.00 17.00 0.00 480770.00
1518.00 81274.00 18.90 0.00 406370.00
2000.00 61881.00 22.60 0.00 309405.00
9600.00 12994.00 83.40 0.00 64970.00

Item Value
Optical port
type
Optical fiber
type
Transmission
distance (km)
0.5 10 40 80
Operating
wavelength
(nm)
770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Mean
launched
power (dBm)
-9.5 to -2.5 -9 to -3 -5 to 0 -2 to +5
Receiver
minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
-17 -20 -23 -23
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
0 -3 -3 -3
106
Item Value
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
9 9 9 9

Paramete
r
Value
Type of
optical
interface
Transmiss
ion
distance
(km)
10 40
Type of
fiber
Operating
transmit
wavelengt
h (nm)
1490 1310 1490 1310
Operating
receive
wavelengt
h (nm)
1310 1490 1310 1490
Launched
optical
power
range
(dBm)
-9 to -3 -2 to 3
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19.5 -23
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3 -3
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
9 9

107
Item Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back
(Frames)
64.00 1488095.00 9.00 0.00 7440475.00
128.00 844595.00 11.80 0.00 4222975.00
256.00 452899.00 17.30 0.00 2264495.00
512.00 234962.00 25.00 0.00 1174810.00
1024.00 119732.00 29.20 0.00 598660.00
1280.00 96154.00 31.30 0.00 480770.00
1518.00 81274.00 33.40 0.00 406370.00
2000.00 61881.00 37.40 0.00 309405.00
9600.00 12994.00 98.00 0.00 64970.00

Parameter Value
CWDM
Nominal bit
rate
1,250,000 kbit/s
Transmission
distance (km)
40 80
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
0 to 5 0 to 5
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
20
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19 -28
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-3 -9
108
Parameter Value
CWDM
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2 8.2

4.3 EG4C
The EG4C is a 4xGE processing board.
The functional version of the EG4C is TNM1.
The EG4C receives/transmits and processes 4xFE/GE signals.
Table 4-31 lists the functions and features that the EG4C supports. The EG4C needs to work
with the packet switching unit of the system control, switching, and timing board to implement
Table 4-31 Functions and features that the EG4C supports
Basic functions Receives/Transmits FE/GE service signals, and
process these signals by working with the packet
switching unit.
Backplane bus bandwidth 5 Gbit/s
109
Port specifications Provides optical/electrical ports for 4xFE/GE signals.
On the front panel of an EG4C board, the first four ports
are optical ports using small form-factor pluggable
(SFP) optical modules, and the last four ports are fixed
electrical ports. The ports with the same ID cannot be
used simultaneously.
l The following types of fixed GE electrical ports are
supported: 1000BASE-T
l The following types of FE SFP optical modules are
supported: 100BASE-BX/100BASE-FX/
100BASE-LX/100BASE-VX/100BASE-ZX
l The following types of GE SFP optical modules are
supported: 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/
l The following types of SFP modules are supported:
FE/GE two-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical
module
FE/GE single-fiber bidirectional pluggable
optical module
l A GE optical port can be a colored CWDM optical
port. A colored CWDM optical port supports a
transmission distance of 40 km or 80 km.
Port attributes Working mode l The GE electrical port supports 10M full-duplex,
100M full-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-
negotiation.
l The GE optical port supports 1000M full-duplex
and auto-negotiation.
l The FE optical port supports 100M full-duplex.
TAG attributes l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access,
or hybrid.
Traffic control
function
Supports the port-based traffic control function that
Query and
setting of optical
power
thresholds
Supported
110
Packet services Ethernet line (E-
Line) services
E-Line services based on point-to-point
transparent transmission
E-Line services based on virtual local area
networks (VLANs)
E-Line services based on 802.1Q in 802.1Q
(QinQ)
services)
Ethernet local
area network (E-
LAN) services
l ETH PWE3 services: E-LAN services carried by
PWs (virtual private LAN services [VPLSs])
Independent VLAN learning (IVL) and shared
VLAN learning (SVL) for native Ethernet
services
Ethernet data
frame format
Jumbo frame Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of
9600 bytes.
Maximum
transmission
unit (MTU)
Ranges from 960 bytes to 9600 bytes, with 1620 bytes
being the default value.
Protection
schemes
Tunnel
automatic
protection
switching
(APS)
Pseudo wire
(PW) APS
Multiple
Spanning Tree
Protocol
(MSTP)
Spanning Tree (CIST) instances. This type of MSTP
provides the same functions as the Rapid Spanning
Tree Protocol (RSTP).
111
Ethernet ring
protection
switching
(ERPS)
Supports ERPS that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.
1344.
Link
aggregation
group (LAG)
aggregation
l Load sharing modes: load sharing and non-load
sharing
Link-state pass
through (LPT)
Supports simple traffic classification by specifying
PHB service classes for service flows based on their
QoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN
priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values)
carried by packets.
Supports complex traffic classification based on C-
VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-
VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or
DSCP values carried by packets, and V-UNI ingress
policies.
l QoS policies
Passes or discards packets in a flow that matches
rules specified by a port policy or V-UNI ingress
policy.
l CAR
Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports
and V-UNI ingresses.
l Shaping
Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, PW
ingress, prioritized queue, or traffic flow.
112
Maintenance
features
Multiprotocol
Label Switching
(MPLS)/
Multiprotocol
label switching
transport profile
(MPLS-TP)
operation,
administration
and
maintenance
(OAM)
l MPLS OAM supports connectivity verification
(CV), fast failure detection (FFD), backward defect
indication (BDI), forward defect indication (FDI),
ping, and traceroute tests in compliance with ITU-
T Y.1711.
remote defect indication (RDI), alarm indication
signal (AIS) insertion, loopback (LB) tests,
linktrace (LT) tests, PW loss measurement (LM),
locked signal function (LCK), test (TST) (only
packet loss test supported), PW Client Signal Fail
(CSF) indication, and two-way delay measurement
Ethernet OAM
(ETH OAM)
Supports CCs, LB tests, LT tests, and AIS
insertion in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag.
Implements IEEE 802.1ag-based LM and DM
with reference to ITU-T Y.7131.
l Ethernet port OAM: supports OAM auto-discovery,
link performance monitoring, remote loopbacks,
and selfloop checks in compliance with IEEE
802.3ah.
Inloops at the physical (PHY)/media access control (MAC) layer of
Ethernet ports
Warm resets (having no impact on services) and cold resets
Hot-swappable board
113
l Supports mirroring in the egress direction of a UNI
port.
l Supports mirroring in the ingress direction of UNI
and NNI ports.
Synchronizatio
n
Synchronous
Ethernet
Transmits synchronous Ethernet clock signals at four
ports.
NOTE
When working in 10BASE-T mode, GE ports do not support
synchronous Ethernet clocks.
IEEE 1588v2 Transmits IEEE 1588v2 time and clock signals at four
ports.
IEEE 1588
adaptive clock
recovery (ACR)
Transmits IEEE 1588 ACR signals at four ports.
(DCN)
Provides one inband DCN channel at each GE port.
Supported

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the EG4C.
114
Figure 4-6 EG4C board function block diagram
FE/GE signal
access unit
Dual-fed and
selective-
receiving unit
Clock unit
Backplane
System control and
communication unit
FE/GE signal
Ethernet
signal
Ethernet
signal
System control bus
Control signal
System clock signal
Power
supply unit
to the board

System power supply
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse
System power supply
Service
processing unit
Logic control
unit

Table 4-32 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EG4C
1 FE/GE signal access
unit
l Receives FE/GE signals.
conversion for FE/GE signals.
115
unit
(PWE3) packets.
3 Dual-fed and
selective-receiving
unit

Table 4-33 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EG4C
1 Dual-fed and
selective-receiving
unit
switching unit.
processing unit.
unit
3 FE/GE signal access
unit
CRC code computing.
Ethernet data frames, and sends out the generated FE/
GE signals through Ethernet ports.

The service processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit using management control
signals.
116
to other units on the EG4C; it also transmits the response messages, alarms, and performance
events from other units on the EG4C to the system control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit
units on the board.
Clock Unit
clock signals to other units on the EG4C.
FE/GE signal access unit, and performs protocol processing to achieve clock/time
synchronization.
4.3.4 Front Panel
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 4-7 Front panel of the EG4C
E
G
4
C
S
T
A
T
1 2 3 4
S
R
V
L
/
A
1
L
/
A
2
L
/
A
3
L
/
A
4
OUT 1/IN 1 OUT 2/IN 2 OUT 3/IN 3 OUT 4/IN 4

Indicators
The front panel of the EG4C has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, L/A1, L/A2, L/A3, and
L/A4. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
117
Ports
Table 4-34 Ports on an EG4C board
Port Descrip
tion
Cable
GE1-
GE4
GE
service
port
(fixed
electrica
l port)
RJ45
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
For status
explanation for
the indicators of
an RJ45 port,
see Table 4-35.
The GE electrical ports
support the medium
dependent interface
(MDI), medium
dependent interface
crossover (MDI-X),
and auto-MDI/MDI-X
modes. Table 4-36 and
Table 4-37 provide the
pin assignments for an
RJ45 port in different
modes.
16.10
Network
Cable
FE/GE
service
port
(using
SFP
modules
)
LC SFP optical module
OUT IN
l OUT represents the
transmit port.
l IN represents the
receive port.
16.1 Fiber
Jumper

properly.
data.
transmitting data.

118
(+)
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
(-)
(+)
(-)

(+)
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
(-)
119
(+)
(-)

None.
4.3.6 Valid Slots
The EG4C can be inserted in slots 3-6, and slots 4 and 6 are preferred. The logical slots of the
EG4C on the NMS are the same as its physical slots.
4.3.7 Feature Code
None.
Table 4-38 lists the technical specifications of the EG4C.
Table 4-38 Technical Specifications of the EG4C
Item Performance
Service
ports
GE1-
GE4
GE electrical port See Table 4-39 and Table 4-40.
FE/GE optical port By using various SFP modules,
the equipment provides FE/GE
optical ports with various
For FE optical port specifications,
see Table 4-41, Table 4-42, and
Table 4-43.
For GE optical port
specifications, see Table 4-44,
Table 4-45, Table 4-47, and
Table 4-46.
120
Item Performance
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight 0.45 kg
Power consumption l 4xGE optical ports: 12.5 W
l 4xGE electrical ports: 11.0 W

Table 4-39 Specifications of the Ethernet electrical ports
GE electrical
port
signals
RJ45

Table 4-40 Ethernet performance specifications of the GE electrical ports
Item Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back
(Frames)
64.00 1488095.00 7.00 0.00 7440475.00
128.00 844595.00 7.40 0.00 4222975.00
256.00 452899.00 8.40 0.00 2264495.00
512.00 234962.00 10.60 0.00 1174810.00
1024.00 119732.00 14.70 0.00 598660.00
1280.00 96154.00 17.00 0.00 480770.00
1518.00 81274.00 18.90 0.00 406370.00
2000.00 61881.00 22.60 0.00 309405.00
9600.00 12994.00 83.40 0.00 64970.00

Item Value
Optical port
type
121
Item Value
Optical fiber
type
Transmissio
n distance
(km)
2 15 40 80
Operating
wavelength
(nm)
1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
Mean
launched
power (dBm)
-19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0
Receiver
minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
-30 -28 -34 -34
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-14 -8 -10 -10
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
10 8.2 10 10

Parameter Value
(km)
15 40
Operating transmit
wavelength (nm)
1550 1310 1550 1310
Operating receive
wavelength (nm)
1310 1550 1310 1550
range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -5 to 0
(dBm)
-32 -32
122
Parameter Value
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8 -10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.5 10

Item Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back
(Frames)
64.00 148810.00 44.90 0.00 744050.00
128.00 84459.00 65.90 0.00 422295.00
256.00 45290.00 106.50 0.00 226450.00
512.00 23496.00 182.20 0.00 117480.00
1024.00 11973.00 241.10 0.00 59865.00
1280.00 9615.00 269.20 0.00 48075.00
1518.00 8126.00 292.20 0.00 40635.00
2000.00 6188.00 341.90 0.00 30940.00
9600.00 1299.00 1133.30 0.00 6459.00

Item Value
Optical port
type
Optical fiber
type
Transmission
distance (km)
0.5 10 40 80
Operating
wavelength
(nm)
770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
123
Item Value
Mean
launched
power (dBm)
-9.5 to -2.5 -9 to -3 -5 to 0 -2 to +5
Receiver
minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
-17 -20 -23 -23
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
0 -3 -3 -3
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
9 9 9 9

Paramete
r
Value
Type of
optical
interface
Transmiss
ion
distance
(km)
10 40
Type of
fiber
Operating
transmit
wavelengt
h (nm)
1490 1310 1490 1310
Operating
receive
wavelengt
h (nm)
1310 1490 1310 1490
Launched
optical
power
range
(dBm)
-9 to -3 -2 to 3
124
Paramete
r
Value
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19.5 -23
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3 -3
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
9 9

Item Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back
(Frames)
64.00 1488095.00 18.70 0.00 14880950.00
128.00 844595.00 20.10 0.00 8445950.00
256.00 452899.00 24.50 0.00 4528990.00
512.00 234962.00 31.00 0.00 2349620.00
1024.00 119732.00 39.90 0.00 1197320.00
1280.00 96154.00 44.20 0.00 961540.00
1518.00 81274.00 48.30 0.00 812740.00
2000.00 61881.00 56.30 0.00 618810.00
9600.00 12994.00 183.90 0.00 129940.00

Parameter Value
CWDM
Nominal bit
rate
1,250,000 kbit/s
125
Parameter Value
CWDM
Transmission
distance (km)
40 80
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
0 to 5 0 to 5
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
20
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19 -28
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-3 -9
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2 8.2

4.4 EX1
The EX1 is a 1x10GE Ethernet processing board.
The functional version of the EX1 is TNM1.
The EX1 receives/transmits and processes 1x10GE signals.
Table 4-48 lists the functions and features that the EX1 supports. The EX1 needs to work with
the packet switching unit of the system control, switching, and timing board to implement
Table 4-48 Functions and features that the EX1 supports
Basic functions Receives/Transmits 10GE service signals, and process
these signals by working with the packet switching
unit.
126
Backplane bus bandwidth 10 Gbit/s
Port specifications l One 10GE XFP optical port: 10GBASE-SR (LAN),
10GBASE-SW (WAN), 10GBASE-LR (LAN),
10GBASE-LW (WAN), 10GBASE-ER (LAN),
10GBASE-EW (WAN), 10GBASE-ZR (LAN), or
10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
l A 10GE optical port can be a colored CWDM
optical port or a colored DWDM optical port. A
colored CWDM optical port supports a
transmission distance of 70 km. A colored DWDM
optical port supports a transmission distance of 40
km or 80 km.
l The following types of XFP modules are supported:
10GE two-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical
module
10GE single-fiber bidirectional pluggable
optical module
Port attributes Working mode Supports 10G full-duplex and supports the setting of
the LAN mode or WAN mode.
TAG attributes l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access,
or hybrid.
Traffic control
at ports
Supports the port-based traffic control function that
Query and
setting of optical
power
thresholds
Supported
Packet services E-Line services l Native ETH services:
E-Line services based on point-to-point
transparent transmission
E-Line services based on virtual local area
networks (VLANs)
E-Line services based on 802.1Q in 802.1Q
(QinQ)
services)
127
E-LAN services l Native ETH services:
l ETH PWE3 services: E-LAN services carried by
PWs (virtual private LAN services [VPLSs])
Independent VLAN learning (IVL) and shared
VLAN learning (SVL) for native Ethernet
services
Ethernet data
frame format
Jumbo frame Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of
9600 bytes.
Maximum
transmission
unit (MTU)
Ranges from 960 bytes to 9600 bytes, with 1620 bytes
being the default value.
Protection
schemes
Tunnel
automatic
protection
switching
(APS)
Pseudo wire
(PW) APS
MPLS-TP ring
protection
switching
(MRPS)
Supports MRPS.
l Protection group type: two-fiber bidirectional
l Switching type: wrapping switching
Multiple
Spanning Tree
Protocol
(MSTP)
Spanning Tree (CIST) instances. This type of MSTP
provides the same functions as the Rapid Spanning
Tree Protocol (RSTP).
Ethernet ring
protection
switching
(ERPS)
Supports ERPS that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.
1344.
128
Link
aggregation
group (LAG)
aggregation
l Load sharing modes: load sharing and non-load
sharing
Link-state pass
through (LPT)
Supports simple traffic classification by specifying
PHB service classes for service flows based on their
QoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN
priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values)
carried by packets.
Supports complex traffic classification based on C-
VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-
VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or
DSCP values carried by packets, and V-UNI ingress
policies.
l QoS policies
Passes or discards packets in a flow that matches
rules specified by a port policy or V-UNI ingress
policy.
l CAR
Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports
and V-UNI ingresses.
l Shaping
Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, PW
ingress, prioritized queue, or traffic flow.
129
Maintenance
features
Multiprotocol
Label Switching
(MPLS)/
Multiprotocol
label switching
transport profile
(MPLS-TP)
operation,
administration
and
maintenance
(OAM)
l MPLS OAM supports connectivity verification
(CV), fast failure detection (FFD), backward defect
indication (BDI), forward defect indication (FDI),
ping, and traceroute tests in compliance with ITU-
T Y.1711.
remote defect indication (RDI), alarm indication
signal (AIS) insertion, loopback (LB) tests,
linktrace (LT) tests, PW loss measurement (LM),
locked signal function (LCK), test (TST) (only
packet loss test supported), PW Client Signal Fail
(CSF) indication, and two-way delay measurement
ETH OAM l Ethernet service OAM:
Supports CCs, LB tests, LT tests, and AIS
insertion in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag.
Implements IEEE 802.1ag-based LM and DM
with reference to ITU-T Y.7131.
l Ethernet port OAM: supports OAM auto-discovery,
link performance monitoring, remote loopbacks,
and selfloop checks in compliance with IEEE
802.3ah.
Inloops at the physical PHY/MAC layer of Ethernet ports
Warm resets (having no impact on services) and cold resets
XFP module information query
Hot-swappable board
l Supports mirroring in the egress direction of a UNI
port.
l Supports mirroring in the ingress direction of UNI
and NNI ports.
130
Synchronizatio
n
Synchronous
Ethernet
Transmits synchronous Ethernet clock signals at one
port.
IEEE 1588v2 Transmits IEEE 1588v2 time and clock signals at one
port.
IEEE 1588
adaptive clock
recovery (ACR)
Transmits IEEE 1588 ACR signals at one port.
NOTE
Ports working in 10GE WAN mode do not support IEEE
1588v2 or IEEE 1588 ACR.
(DCN)
Provides one inband DCN channel.
Supported

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the EX1.
Figure 4-8 EX1 board function block diagram
10GE signal
access unit
Dual-fed and
selective-
receiving unit
Clock unit
Backplane
System control and
communication unit
(active)
10GE signal
Ethernet
signal
Ethernet
signal
System control bus
Control signal
System clock signal
Power
supply unit
to the board

System power supply
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse
System power supply
(backup)
Ethernet
signal
Service
processing unit
Logic control
unit

131
Table 4-49 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EX1
1 10GE signal access
unit
l Receives 10GE signals.
conversion for 10GE signals.
unit
(PWE3) packets.
3 Dual-fed and
selective-receiving
unit

Table 4-50 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EX1
1 Dual-fed and
selective-receiving
unit
switching unit.
processing unit.
unit
132
3 10GE signal access
unit
CRC code computing.
Ethernet data frames, and sends out the generated
10GE signals through Ethernet ports.

to other units on the EX1; it also transmits the response messages, alarms, and performance
events from other units on the EX1 to the system control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit
units on the board.
Clock Unit
clock signals to other units on the EX1.
l The clock unit processes IEEE 1588v2 and IEEE 1588 ACR protocol packets.
4.4.4 Front Panel
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 4-9 Front panel of the EX1
E
X
1
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
L
/
A
OUT
IN

Indicators
The front panel of the EX1 has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, and L/A. For status
explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
133
Ports
Table 4-51 Ports on an EX1 board
Port Descripti
on
Connector Type Pin
Assignment
Required
Cable
IN Receives
10GE
signals.
XFP optical module
OUT IN
l OUT
represents the
transmit port.
l IN represents
the receive
port.
16.1 Fiber
Jumper
OUT Transmits
10GE
signals.

None.
4.4.6 Valid Slots
The EX1 can be inserted in slot 1 (preferred) or slot 2. Its logical slot on the network management
system (NMS) is the same as its physical slot.
NOTE
The backplane bus bandwidth of the EX1 board is 10 Gbit/s so the EX1 board cannot work with the PCXGA
board. That is, when the system control board is the PCXGA board, slots 1 and 2 cannot house EX1 boards.
4.4.7 Feature Code
None.
Table 4-52 lists the technical specifications of the EX1.
Table 4-52 Technical specifications of the EX1
Item Performance
Service ports For 10GE optical port specifications, see Table 4-53, Table 4-56,
Table 4-54, Table 4-55, and Table 4-57.
Dimensions (H x W x
D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
134
Item Performance
Weight 0.50 kg
Power consumption 13.1 W

Table 4-53 Specifications of the 10GE two-fiber bidirectional optical ports
Item Value
Optical port
type
10GBASE-SR
(LAN)
/10GBASE-SW
(WAN)
10GBASE-LR
(LAN)
/10GBASE-LW
(WAN)
10GBASE-ER
(LAN)
/10GBASE-EW
(WAN)
10GBASE-ZR
(LAN)
/10GBASE-ZW
(WAN)
Optical fiber
type
Transmission
distance (km)
0.3 10 40 80
Operating
wavelength
(nm)
840 to 860 1260 to 1355 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
Mean
launched
power (dBm)
-1.3 to -7.3 -8.2 to 0.5 -4.7 to +4 0 to 4
Receiver
minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
-7.5 -12.6 -14.1 -21
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-1 0.5 -1 -7
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
3 3.5 3 3

Table 4-54 Specifications of the 10GE single-fiber bidirectional optical ports
Item Value
Optical port
type
10GBASE-LR (LAN)
/10GBASE-LW (WAN)
10GBASE-ER (LAN)
/10GBASE-EW (WAN)
Optical fiber
type
135
Item Value
Transmission
distance (km)
10 40
Operating
transmit
wavelength
(nm)
1330 1270 1330 1270
Operating
receive
wavelength
(nm)
1270 1330 1270 1330
Mean
launched
power (dBm)
-5 to 0 1 to 5
Receiver
minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
-14 -15
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
0.5 0.5
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
3.5 3.5

Table 4-55 Ethernet performance specifications of the 10GE optical ports
Item Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Ratio (%)
Delay jitter
(us)
64.00 14880952.00 13.00 0.00 0.57
128.00 8445945.00 13.70 0.00 0.51
256.00 4528985.00 14.90 0.00 0.58
512.00 2349624.00 16.00 0.00 0.57
1024.00 1197318.00 16.40 0.00 0.57
1280.00 961538.00 16.60 0.00 0.59
1518.00 812743.00 16.80 0.00 0.60
136
Item Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Ratio (%)
Delay jitter
(us)
2000.00 618811.00 17.20 0.00 0.60
9600.00 129937.00 23.30 0.00 0.50

Table 4-56 Parameters specified for colored 10GE optical ports (CWDM)
Parameter Value
CWDM
Transmission distance (km) 70
range (dBm)
0 to 4
Operating wavelength range
(nm)
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) l 1451 nm to 1551 nm: -23
l 1571 nm: -22
l 1591 nm to 1611 nm: -21
(dB)
8.2

Table 4-57 Parameters specified for colored 10GE optical ports (DWDM)
Parameter Value
DWDM
Transmission
distance (km)
40 80
137
Parameter Value
DWDM
Launched optical
power range
(dBm)
-1 to +2 -1 to +3
Central frequency
(THz)
192.1 to 196.0 192.1 to 196.0
Central frequency
deviation (GHz)
10 10
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
-17 -24
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-1 -9
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
9.5 8.2

4.5 MD1
The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service processing board.
The functional version of the MD1 is TNM1.
The MD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
Table 4-58 lists the functions and features that the MD1 supports.
Table 4-58 Functions and features that the MD1 supports
Function and Feature Description
Basic functions Receives and transmits E1 signals, and supports flexible
configuration of E1 service categories.
E1 service categories Supports the following E1 service categories:
l CES E1
l ATM/IMA E1
Port specifications Provides thirty-two 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 ports.
138
ATM/IMA Maximum
number of
ATM
services
l Local: 32
l Remote: 64
Maximum
number of
ATM
connections
l Local: 128
l Remote: 256
ATM traffic
managemen
t
Supported
ATM
encapsulati
on mode
Supports the following ATM encapsulation modes:
l N-to-one VPC
l N-to-one VCC
l One-to-one VPC
l One-to-one VCC
Maximum
number of
concatenate
d ATM cells
31
ATM OAM Supports F4 OAM (VP level) and F5 OAM (VC level), including
the following functions:
l Alarm indication signal (AIS)/Remote defect indication
(RDI)
l Continuity check test
l Loopback test
Maximum
number of
IMA groups
32
Maximum
number of
members in
an IMA
group
16
CES Maximum
number of
services
32
Encapsulati
on mode
Supports the following encapsulation modes:
l CESoPSN
l SAToP
139
Service
category
Point-to-point services
Compressio
n of vacant
slots
Supported (applicable to CESoPSN only)
Jitter
buffering
time (us)
375-16000
Packet
loading
time (us)
125-5000
Synchroni
zation
CES ACR Supported
NOTE
Supports CES ACR for a maximum of four channels. The clock
information that is recovered from the services transported at ports 116
can be sent out only from ports 116; the clock information that is
recovered from the services transported at ports 1732 can be sent out
only from ports 1732.
Retiming Supports tributary retiming and system retiming.
Maintenan
ce features
Loopback Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.
Cold reset
and warm
reset
Supported (with warm resets having no impact on services)
PRBS tests
at E1 ports
Supported
Board
manufacturi
ng
information
query
Supported
Board
power
consumptio
n
information
query
Supported

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the MD1.
140
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 4-10 Functional block diagram of the MD1
Backplane
Logic
control unit
E1
E1
System control and
communication unit
Control bus
Clock
unit
Clock signal provided to the other units of the board System clock signal
S
i
g
n
a
l

i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e

u
n
i
t
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

u
n
i
t
L
o
g
i
c

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

u
n
i
t
Service
bus
GE bus
Power
supply unit
to the board

System power supply
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse
System power supply

Table 4-59 Signal processing in the receive direction of the MD1
1 Signal interface unit l Receives external E1 signals.
l Matches the resistance.
l Equalizes signals.
l Converts the level.
l Restores clock signals.
l Buffers the received data.
l Performs HDB3 decoding.
unit
l Frames E1 signals.
l Performs CES emulation or processes ATM/IMA
services.
l Encapsulates PWE3 services and converts the PWE3
services into Ethernet services.
141
4 Logic processing
unit
l Shifts transmission of service signals from the internal
service bus to the GE bus in the backplane.
l Sends service signals to the packet switching unit.

Table 4-60 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the MD1
1 Logic processing
unit
l Receives service signals from the packet switching
unit.
l Shifts transmission of service signals from the GE bus
in the backplane to the internal service bus.
unit
l Decapsulates service signals.
l Re-forms CES packets or processes ATM/IMA
services.
l Converts signals into E1 signals and sends the E1
signals to the signal interface unit.
3 Signal interface unit l Performs HDB3 coding.
l Performs clock re-timing.
l Shapes pulses.
l Drives the line.
l Sends E1 signals to a port.

The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit.
l The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over
the control bus.
l These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU
unit over the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit
142
units on the board.
Clock Unit
4.5.4 Front Panel
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 4-11 Front panel of the MD1
M
D
1
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
32
17
16
1

Indicators
The front panel of the MD1 has the following indicators: STAT and SRV. For status explanation
for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
Table 4-61 Ports on an MD1 board
Port Descript
ion
Connector Type Pin Assignment Required Cable
1 to
16
The first
to
sixteenth
E1 ports
Anea 96
POS.96
POS.1
See Table 4-62. 16.7 16xE1/T1
Cable
17 to
32
The
seventeen
th to
thirty-
second
E1 ports

143
Table 4-62 Pin assignments for an Anea 96 port
Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 The first received E1
differential signal (+)
25 The first transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
differential signal (-)
signal (-)
3 The second received E1
27 The second transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
signal (-)
5 The third received E1
29 The third transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
signal (-)
7 The fourth received E1
31 The fourth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
signal (-)
9 The fifth received E1
33 The fifth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
signal (-)
11 The sixth received E1
35 The sixth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
signal (-)
13 The seventh received E1
37 The seventh transmitted E1
15 The eighth received E1
39 The eighth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
signal (-)
17 The ninth received E1
41 The ninth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
signal (-)
144
19 The tenth received E1
43 The tenth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
signal (-)
21 The eleventh received E1
45 The eleventh transmitted E1
23 The twelfth received E1
47 The twelfth transmitted E1
49 The thirteenth received E1
73 The thirteenth transmitted E1
51 The fourteenth received E1
75 The fourteenth transmitted E1
53 The fifteenth received E1
77 The fifteenth transmitted E1
55 The sixteenth received E1
79 The sixteenth transmitted E1

None.
4.5.6 Valid Slots
The MD1 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The slot allocation priority is as follows: slots 4 and 6 >
slots 1 and 2 > slots 3 and 5. The logical slots of the MD1 on the NMS are the same as its physical
slots.
145
4.5.7 Feature Code
The feature code of the MD1 indicates the E1 port impedance.
Table 4-63 Feature codes of the MD1
Feature Code Port Impedance (Ohm)
A 75
B 120

Table 4-64 lists the technical specifications of the MD1.
Table 4-64 Technical specifications of the MD1
Item Performance
E1 ports (1-16
and 17-32)
See Table 4-65.
Dimensions (H
x W x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight 0.50 kg
Power
consumption
12.2 W

Table 4-65 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's CES/ATM/IMA service electrical ports
Item Value
Standard compliance ITU-T G.703/G.823
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 2048
Code pattern HDB3
Impedance (ohm) 75 120
Pair in each direction One coaxial pair One symmetrical pair
Port type Anea 96

146
4.6 CQ1
CQ1 boards are 4-port channelized STM-1 processing boards.
The functional version of CQ1 boards is TNM1.
CQ1 boards receive and transmit four channels of channelized STM-1 optical/electrical signals.
Table 4-66 lists the functions and features supported by CQ1 boards.
Table 4-66 Functions and features that CQ1 boards support
Basic functions Receives/Transmits four channels of channelized STM-1
optical/electrical signals.
Supported packet service
types
l Circuit emulation service (CES) E1
l ML-PPP E1
Port
specificati
ons
Optical ports l Provides four STM-1 SFP optical ports, which can be
S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2 optical ports.
l Supports single-fiber bidirectional optical modules.
Electrical
ports
l Use SFP electrical modules.
l Comply with ITU-T G.703.
CES Maximum
number of
services
252
Encapsulation
mode
l CESoPSN (CESoPSN stands for circuit emulation services
over packet switch networks)
l SAToP (SAToP stands for Structure-Agnostic Time
Division Multiplexing over Packet)
Idle timeslot
compression
Supported only in CESoPSN mode
Jitter
buffering time
(us)
375 to 16,000
Packet
loading time
(us)
125 to 5,000
147
CES ACR
(ACR stands
for adaptive
clock
recovery)
Supported, but the NE can only function as a master node
Transparent
transmission
of SDH
overheads in
packet
networks
D1 to D12, E1, and E2 bytes
ML-PPP Type of links
carrying ML-
PPP links
VC-12s in channelized STM-1s (service type: PWE3 over
tunnel)
Maximum
number of
supported
PPP links
252
Maximum
number of
supported
ML-PPP
groups
32
Maximum
number of
links in one
ML-PPP
group
16
Linear multiplex section
protection (LMSP) on the
packet plane
1:1 LMSP
NOTE
A CQ1 board and a TDM service board, such as SL1D/SL1Q, cannot
be configured into the same 1:1 LMSP protection group.
Synchroni
zation
Clock source l Each line port provides one channel of SDH line clock
signals.
l Each board supports two channels of E1 clock signals over
its STM-1 ports.
SDH line
clock
Supported
DCN Outband DCN Each SDH line port can provide one data communications
channel (DCC) that is composed of three DCC bytes or nine
DCC bytes.
Inband DCN Transmits DCN information over ML-PPP links.
148
Maintenan
ce features
Loopback l Supports inloops at STM-1 ports.
l Supports outloops at STM-1 ports.
l Supports inloops over E1 channels.
l Supports outloops over E1 channels.
Warm and
cold resetting
Supported
Switching a
laser on or off
Supported
Pseudo
random binary
sequence
(PRBS)
testing
Not supported
Manufacturer
information
querying
Supported
Power
consumption
querying
Supported
SFP module
information
detecting and
querying
Supported

This section describes how the function units of a CQ1 board process channelized STM-1 optical
signals.
149
Figure 4-12 CQ1 board function block diagram
System control and
communication unit
System clock signal
Backplane
+3.3 V power
supplied to the board
Power supply
unit
System power
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse
System power
-48 V/-60 V
Logic
control unit
Signal
access unit
Control bus
Packet
processing
unit
Logic
processing
unit
Clock unit
Clock signal provided to
GE
bus
SDH
processing
unit
GE
signal
E1
signal
STM-1
signal
Channelized
STM-1 signal
Line clock signal
Line clock signal

Table 4-67 Signal processing in the receive direction of a CQ1 board
1 Signal interface unit l Receives channelized STM-1 signals.
l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals.
l Checks for R_LOS alarms.
l Converts STM-1 optical signals into STM-1 electrical
signals.
150
2 SDH processing unit l Restores clock signals.
l Synchronizes frames and checks for R_LOS and
R_LOF alarms.
l Descrambles signals.
l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates alarms and
performance events, if any.
l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and
generates alarms and performance events, if any.
l Checks for changes in Synchronization Status
Messages (SSMs) in the S1 byte and reports the SSM
status to the system control and communication unit.
l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
(including F1 and serial bytes), DCC bytes, and K
bytes, and transmits the bytes to the logic processing
unit.
l Adjusts AU pointers and generates performance
events, if any.
l Checks higher order path overheads and generates
alarms and performance events, if any.
l Decapsulates E1 signals from the STM-1 signals.
3 Packet processing
unit
l Frames E1 signals.
l Performs CES emulation.
l Performs Multilink Point-to-Point Protocol (MP-PPP)
processing.
l Encapsulates PWE3 services and converts them into
Ethernet services.
4 Logic processing
unit
l Grooms services from service buses to the GE bus on
the backplane.
l Sends service signals to the packet switching unit.

Table 4-68 Signal processing in the transmit direction of a CQ1 board
1 Logic processing
unit
l Receives service signals from the packet switching
unit.
l Grooms services from the GE bus on the backplane to
service buses.
151
2 Packet processing
unit
l Decapsulates service signals.
l Restructures CES packets.
l Converts signals into E1 signals and sends the E1
signals to the SDH processing unit.
3 SDH processing unit l Multiplexes E1 signals into STM-1 signals.
l Sets higher order path overheads.
l Sets AU pointers.
l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes.
l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes.
l Scrambles signals.
4 Signal interface unit Converts electrical signals into optical signals.

The CQ1 board is directly controlled by a CPU on the system control and communication unit.
The CPU issues configuration and query commands to other units of the board over the control
bus. These units send command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over
the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU.
Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit receives two -48 V/-60 V power supplies from the backplane. It then
converts the -48 V power supplies into +3.3 V power and supplies the +3.3 V power to other
units on the board.
Clock Unit
The clock unit performs the following operations:
l Extracts line clock signals or E1 clock signals and transmits them to the system control and
communication unit.
l Receives system clock signals from the control bus on the backplane and supplies clock
signals to other units on the board.
4.6.4 Front Panel
A CQ1 board has indicators and STM-1 ports on its front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 4-13 Front panel of a CQ1 board providing optical ports
C
Q
1
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
L
O
S
1
L
O
S
2
L
O
S
3
L
O
S
4
OUT4 IN4 OUT3 IN3 OUT2 IN2 OUT1 IN1
152

Figure 4-14 Front panel of a CQ1 board providing electrical ports
C
Q
1
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
L
O
S
1
L
O
S
2
L
O
S
3
L
O
S
4
OUT4 IN4 OUT3 IN3 OUT2 IN2 OUT1 IN1

Indicators
The front panel of the CQ1 has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, LOS1, LOS2, LOS3, and
LOS4. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
Table 4-69 Ports on a CQ1 board
Port Description Connector Type Required Cable
OUT1 to OUT4 Transmit ports of the
first to fourth STM-1
ports
l LC (with an SFP
optical module)
OUT IN
l SAA straight
female (with an
SFP electrical
module)
OUT
IN
l 16.1 Fiber
Jumper for SFP
optical modules
l 16.6 STM-1
Cable for SFP
electrical
modules
IN1 to IN4 Receive ports of the
first to fourth STM-1
ports

Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the CQ1.
None.
4.6.6 Valid Slots
A CQ1 board can be inserted in any of slots 1 to 6. The priorities of the slots are as follows: slots
4 and 6 > slots 1 and 2 > slots 3 and 5. Its logical slot on the network management system (NMS)
is the same as its physical slot.
153
4.6.7 Feature Code
indicates the type of optical port. CQ1 boards have feature codes.
Table 4-70 Feature codes of the CQ1
01 S-1.1, eSFP optical module
02 L-1.1, eSFP optical module
04 S-1.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (For optical ports 1 and
2, the transmit wavelength is 1310 nm and the receive wavelength is 1550
nm; for optical ports 3 and 4, the transmit wavelength is 1550 nm and the
receive wavelength is 1310 nm.)

This section describes board specifications, including the STM-1 optical/electrical port
performance, mechanical behaviors, and power consumption.
Table 4-71 lists the technical specifications of the CQ1.
Table 4-71 Technical specifications of the CQ1
Item Performance
Service ports Electrical
port
See Table 4-72.
Optical port See Table 4-73 and Table 4-74.
Dimensions (H x W x D) 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight 0.50 kg

Item Value
Code pattern CMI
154
Item Value
the input port
port

Item Value
(km)
15 40 80
range (nm)
1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0
(dBm)
-28 -34 -34
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8 -10 -10
(dB)
8.2 10 10
NOTE

155
optical ports
Parameter Value
(km)
15 40
Operating transmit
wavelength (nm)
1550 1310 1550 1310
Operating receive
wavelength (nm)
1310 1550 1310 1550
range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -5 to 0
(dBm)
-32 -32
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8 -10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.5 10
156
5 SDH Boards
About This Chapter
The OpitX OSN 550 supports the following SDH boards: SL1S, SL1D, SL1Q, SL4S, SL4D,
and SL16S.
NOTE
SL1S, SL4S, and SL16S are integrated on the PCX or CXL board.
5.1 SL1D
The SL1D is a 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical interface board.
5.2 SL1Q
The SL1Q is a 4xSTM-1 optical/electrical interface board.
5.3 SL4D
The SL4D is a 2xSTM-4 optical interface board.
Hardware Description 5 SDH Boards
157
5.1 SL1D
The SL1D is a 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical interface board.
The functional version of the SL1D is TNH2.
The SL1D receives/transmits 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals, performs O/E conversion for
STM-1 optical signals, extracts and inserts overhead bytes, and reports alarms generated on the
line.
Table 5-1 lists the functions and features that the SL1D supports.
Table 5-1 Functions and features that the SL1D supports
Function and
Feature
Board
Basic functions Receives/Transmits 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals.
Optical port
specifications
l Provides S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 optical ports. STM-1 optical ports
support SFP electrical modules.
l The characteristics of all optical ports comply with ITU-T G.957.
Optical module
specifications
l Single-fiber, bidirectional, pluggable optical modules can be used.
l Pluggable optical modules support hot swapping.
l Appropriate SFP optical modules can be used, their information can
be queried, and their running status can be monitored. This facilitates
your maintenance.
l Optical ports allow setting the on/off state of a laser and support the
automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.
DCN Supports outband DCN.
Service processing Processes VC-12, VC-3, and VC-4 services.
Overhead
processing
l Processes the section overheads of STM-1 signals.
l Transparently transmits or terminates path overheads.
Alarms and
performance
events
Provides various alarms and performance events, facilitating equipment
management and maintenance.
158
Function and
Feature
Board
Protection
schemes
l Supports two-fiber unidirectional ring multiplex section protection
(MSP).
l Supports linear MSP.
l Supports sub-network connection protection (SNCP).
Line clock source Supports two channels of SDH line clock signals.
Maintenance
features
l Inloops and outloops at optical ports
l Inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths for quick fault locating
l Setting of overhead bytes to be sent/received
l Enabling/Disabling SSMs on line optical ports
l Pass-through tests of line K bytes
l Setting of bit error threshold-crossing values and degrade thresholds
l Warm resets and cold resets (with warm resets having no impact on
services)
l Hot board swapping
l ALS

The SL1D consists of an O/E conversion unit, an overhead processing unit, a logic control unit,
and a clock unit.
159
Figure 5-1 Functional block diagram of the SL1D
Backpl ane
STM-1
O
v
e
r
h
e
a
d
p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g
u
n
i
t
Overhead bus
System control and
communi cati on uni t
Cross-connect uni t
Cl ock uni t System cl ock si gnal
Cl ock si gnal provi ded to the
other uni ts on the board
Power suppl i ed to the
Servi ce bus
Control bus
Logi c
control
uni t
STM-1
O
/
E

c
o
n
v
e
r
s
i
o
n
u
n
i
t
+3.3 V
System control and

Table 5-2 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL1D
1 O/E conversion unit l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals.
l Detects R_LOS alarms.
signals.
160
2 Overhead processing
unit
l Aligns frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF alarms.
l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms
and performance events.
generates specific alarms and performance events.
l Detects changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and reports
the SSM status to the system control and
communication unit.
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K
bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal and transmits
the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the system control and
communication unit.
l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific
performance events.
specific alarms and performance events.
l Transmits pointer indication signals and VC-4 signals
to the cross-connect unit.

Table 5-3 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL1D
unit
l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.
l Sets AU pointers.
2 O/E conversion unit l Converts electrical signals into optical signals.

The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the
161
control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the
CPU unit over the control bus.
control and communication unit and enables FPGA loading.
Clock Unit
5.1.4 Front Panel
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 5-2 shows the front panel of the SL1D.
Figure 5-2 Front panel of the SL1D
S
L
1
D
S
L
1
D
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
L
O
S
1
L
O
S
2
TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT

Indicators
The front panel of the SL1D has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, LOS1, and LOS2. For
Ports
Table 5-4 Ports on an SL1D board
Port Descripti
on
Cable
TX1/
RX1
Receive/
Transmit
port of the
first STM-1
optical/
electrical
port
Optical port: LC SFP optical
module
TX RX
Electrical port: SFP electrical
module
TX
RX
l TX represents
the transmit
port.
l RX represents
the receive port.
SFP optical
port: 16.1
Fiber
Jumper
SFP
electrical
port: 16.6
STM-1
Cable
162
Port Descripti
on
Cable
TX2/
RX2
Receive/
Transmit
port of the
second
STM-1
optical/
electrical
port

Labels
None.
5.1.6 Valid Slots
The SL1D can be inserted in slots 1-6 in the chassis. The logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS
are the same as its physical slots.
5.1.7 Feature Code
indicates the type of optical port. SL1D boards have feature codes.
Table 5-5 Feature codes of the SL1D
04 S-1.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (For optical port 1, the
transmit wavelength is 1550 nm and the receive wavelength is 1310 nm;
for optical port 2, the transmit wavelength is 1310 nm and the receive
wavelength is 1550 nm.)
163
05 L-1.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (For optical port 1, the

Table 5-6 lists the technical specifications of the SL1D.
Table 5-6 Technical specifications of the SL1D
Item Performance
Service
ports
TX1/
RX1
Receive/Transmit port of the first
STM-1 optical/electrical port
For the performance of STM-1
optical ports, see Table 5-8 and
Table 5-9.
electrical ports, see Table 5-7.
TX2/
RX2
Receive/Transmit port of the
second STM-1 optical/electrical
port
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight 0.30 kg

Item Value
Code pattern CMI
the input port
port

164
Item Value
(km)
15 40 80
range (nm)
1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0
(dBm)
-28 -34 -34
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8 -10 -10
(dB)
8.2 10 10
NOTE

Table 5-9 Specifications for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the STM-1 optical
ports
Parameter Value
(km)
15 40
Operating transmit
wavelength (nm)
1550 1310 1550 1310
165
Parameter Value
Operating receive
wavelength (nm)
1310 1550 1310 1550
range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -5 to 0
(dBm)
-32 -32
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8 -10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.5 10

5.2 SL1Q
The SL1Q is a 4xSTM-1 optical/electrical interface board.
The functional version of SL1Q boards is TNH2.
The SL1Q receives/transmits 4xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals, performs O/E conversion for
STM-1 optical signals, extracts and inserts overhead bytes, and reports alarms generated on the
line.
Table 5-10 lists the functions and features that the SL1Q supports.
Table 5-10 Functions and features that the SL1Q supports
Function and
Feature
Board
Basic functions Receives/Transmits 4xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals.
Optical port
specifications
l Provides S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 optical ports. STM-1 optical ports
support SFP electrical modules.
l The characteristics of all optical ports comply with ITU-T G.957.
166
Function and
Feature
Board
Optical module
specifications
l Single-fiber, bidirectional, pluggable optical modules can be used.
l Appropriate SFP optical modules can be used and the running status
can be monitored. This facilitates your maintenance.
l Optical ports allow setting the on/off state of a laser and support the
automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.
Service processing Processes VC-12, VC-3, and VC-4 services.
Overhead
processing
l Processes the section overheads of STM-1 signals.
l Processes higher order path overheads.
l Sets K-byte reporting, transmission, and pass-through.
l Provides transparent DCCs and orderwire byte channels.
Pointer processing Processes AU pointers.
Alarms and
performance
events
Protection
schemes
l Supports two-fiber unidirectional ring MSP.
l Supports SNCP.
Line clock source Supports four channels of SDH line clock signals.
Maintenance
features
l Inloops and outloops at optical ports
l Inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths for quick fault locating
l Setting of bit error threshold-crossing values and degrade thresholds
services)
l ALS

167
The SL1Q consists of an O/E conversion unit, an overhead processing unit, a logic control unit,
and a clock unit.
Figure 5-3 SL1Q board function block diagram
Backpl ane
STM-1
O
v
e
r
h
e
a
d
p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g
u
n
i
t
Overhead bus
System control and
Cross-connect uni t
Cl ock uni t System cl ock si gnal
Cl ock si gnal provi ded to the
Power suppl i ed to the
Servi ce bus
Control bus
Logi c
control
uni t
STM-1
O
/
E

c
o
n
v
e
r
s
i
o
n
u
n
i
t
+3.3 V
System control and

Table 5-11 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL1Q
signals.
168
unit
communication unit.
communication unit.
performance events.

Table 5-12 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL1Q
unit
l Sets AU pointers.

169
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the system control and
communication unit.
Clock Unit
5.2.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, ports, and a laser safety class label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 5-4 Front panel of the SL1Q
S
L
1
Q
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
L
O
S
1
L
O
S
2
TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
L
O
S
3
L
O
S
4
TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4

Indicators
The front panel of the SL1Q has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, LOS1, LOS2, LOS3,
and LOS4. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
Table 5-13 Ports on an SL1Q board
Port Description Connector Type Pin
Assignm
ent
Required
Cable
TX1/
RX1
Receive/
Transmit port of
the first STM-1
optical/electrical
port
STM-1 optical port: LC SFP
optical module
TX RX
STM-1 electrical port: SFP
electrical module
TX
RX
l TX
represe
nts the
transmi
t port.
l RX
represe
nts the
receive
port.
SFP optical
port: 16.1 Fiber
Jumper
SFP electrical
port: 16.6
STM-1 Cable
TX2/
RX2
Receive/
Transmit port of
the second
STM-1 optical/
electrical port
170
Port Description Connector Type Pin
Assignm
ent
Required
Cable
TX3/
RX3
Receive/
Transmit port of
the third STM-1
optical/electrical
port
TX4/
RX4
Receive/
Transmit port of
the fourth STM-1
optical/electrical
port

Labels
None.
5.2.6 Valid Slots
The SL1Q can be inserted in slots 1-6 in the chassis.
5.2.7 Feature Code
indicates the type of optical port. SL1Q boards have feature codes.
Table 5-14 Feature codes of the SL1Q
04 S-1.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (For optical ports 1 and
3, the transmit wavelength is 1550 nm and the receive wavelength is
1310 nm; for optical ports 2 and 4, the transmit wavelength is 1310 nm
171
05 L-1.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (For optical ports 1 and
3, the transmit wavelength is 1550 nm and the receive wavelength is
1310 nm; for optical ports 2 and 4, the transmit wavelength is 1310 nm

This section describes the board specifications, including the optical port performance,
dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Table 5-15 lists the technical specifications of the SL1Q.
Table 5-15 Technical specifications of the SL1Q
Item Performance
Service
ports
TX1/
RX1
Table 5-18.
electrical ports, see Table 5-16.
TX2/
RX2
second STM-1 optical/electrical
port
TX3/
RX3
Receive/Transmit port of the third
TX4/
RX4
fourth STM-1 optical/electrical
port
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight 0.30 kg

Item Value
Code pattern CMI
172
Item Value
the input port
port

Item Value
(km)
15 40 80
range (nm)
1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0
(dBm)
-28 -34 -34
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8 -10 -10
(dB)
8.2 10 10
NOTE

173
optical ports
Parameter Value
(km)
15 40
Operating transmit
wavelength (nm)
1550 1310 1550 1310
Operating receive
wavelength (nm)
1310 1550 1310 1550
range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -5 to 0
(dBm)
-32 -32
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8 -10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.5 10

5.3 SL4D
The SL4D is a 2xSTM-4 optical interface board.
The functional version of the SL4D is TNH2.
The SL4D receives/transmits 2xSTM-4 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for STM-4
optical signals, extracts and inserts overhead bytes, and reports alarms generated on the line.
Table 5-19 lists the functions and features that the SL4D supports.
174
Table 5-19 Functions and features that the SL4D supports
Basic functions Receives/Transmits 2xSTM-4 optical signals.
Optical port specifications l Provides S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2 optical ports.
l The characteristics of all optical ports comply with
ITU-T G.957.
Optical module specifications l Optical module information can be detected and
queried.
l Single-fiber, bidirectional, pluggable optical
modules can be used.
l Appropriate SFP optical modules can be used, their
information can be queried, and their running status
can be monitored. This facilitates your
maintenance.
l Allows setting the on/off state of a laser and
supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS)
function.
Service processing Processes VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and VC-4-4c
concatenated services.
Overhead processing l Processes the section overheads of STM-4 signals.
l Processes higher order path overheads.
l Sets K-byte reporting, transmission, and pass-
through.
l Provides transparent DCCs and orderwire byte
channels.
Pointer processing Processes AU pointers.
Alarms and performance events Provides various alarms and performance events,
facilitating equipment management and maintenance.
Protection schemes l Supports two-fiber unidirectional/bidirectional
ring MSP.
l Supports SNCP.
Line clock source Supports two channels of SDH line clock signals.
175
Maintenance features l Inloops and outloops at optical ports
l Inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths for quick fault
locating
l Setting of bit error threshold-crossing values and
degrade thresholds
l Warm resets and cold resets (with warm resets
having no impact on services)
l ALS

The SL4D consists of an O/E conversion unit, an overhead processing unit, a logic control unit,
and a clock unit.
Figure 5-5 Functional block diagram of the SL4D
Backplane
STM-4
O
v
e
r
h
e
a
d
p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g
u
n
i
t
Overhead bus
System control and
communication unit
Cross-connect unit
Clock unit System clock signal
units on the board
Service bus
Control bus
Logic
control
unit
STM-4
O
/
E

c
o
n
v
e
r
s
i
o
n
u
n
i
t
+3.3 V
System control and
communication unit

176
Table 5-20 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL4D
l Converts STM-4 optical signals into electrical signals.
unit
communication unit.
communication unit.
performance events.

177
Table 5-21 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL4D
unit
l Sets AU pointers.

control and communication unit and enables FPGA loading.
Clock Unit
5.3.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, ports, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 5-6 shows the front panel of the SL4D.
Figure 5-6 Front panel of the SL4D
S
L
4
D
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
L
O
S
1
L
O
S
2
TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT

178
Indicators
The front panel of the SL4D has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, LOS1, and LOS2. For
Ports
Table 5-22 Ports on an SL4D board
Port Descripti
on
Cable
TX1/
RX1
Receive/
Transmit
port of the
first STM-4
optical port
TX RX
l TX represents
the transmit
port.
l RX represents
the receive
port.
16.1 Fiber
Jumper
TX2/
RX2
Receive/
Transmit
port of the
second
STM-4
optical port

Labels
None.
5.3.6 Valid Slots
The SL4D can be inserted in slots 1-6 in the chassis. The logical slots of the SL4D on the NMS
are the same as its physical slots.
5.3.7 Feature Code
indicates the type of optical port. SL4D boards have feature codes.
179
Table 5-23 Feature codes of the SL4D
04 S-4.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (For optical port 1, the

Table 5-24 lists the technical specifications of the SL4D.
Table 5-24 Technical specifications of the SL4D
Item Performance
Service
ports
TX1/
RX1
STM-4 optical port
Table 5-26.
TX2/
RX2
second STM-4 optical port
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight 0.30 kg

Item Value
Transmission
distance (km)
15 40 80
180
Item Value
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1274 to 1356 1280 to 1335 1480 to 1580
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -3 to +2 -3 to +2
(dBm)
-28 -28 -28
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8 -8 -8
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2 10 10
NOTE

optical ports
Paramete
r
Value
Nominal
bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Line code
pattern
NRZ
Type of
optical
interface
S-4.1 L-4.1
Transmiss
ion
distance
(km)
15 40
Type of
fiber
181
Paramete
r
Value
Operating
transmit
wavelengt
h (nm)
1490 1310 1490 1310
Operating
receive
wavelengt
h (nm)
1310 1490 1310 1490
Launched
optical
power
range
(dBm)
-9 to -3 -2 to 3
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19.5 -23
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3 -3
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
9 9
182
6 PDH Boards
About This Chapter
The OpitX OSN 550 supports PDH boards SP3D and PL3T.
6.1 SP3D
The SP3D is a 42xE1/T1 electrical interface board.
6.2 PL3T
The PL3T is a 3xE3/T3 electrical interface board.
Hardware Description 6 PDH Boards
183
6.1 SP3D
The SP3D is a 42xE1/T1 electrical interface board.
The functional version of the SP3D is TNH2.
The SP3D processes E1/T1 signals and overheads, and supports alarms, performance events,
and maintenance features.
Table 6-1 lists the functions and features that the SP3D supports.
Table 6-1 Functions and features that the SP3D supports
Function and
Feature
Board
Service processing Receives/Transmits and processes 42xE1/T1 signals.
Overhead
processing
Processes path overheads at the VC-12 level such as J2 and V5.
Alarms and
performance
events
Tributary clock
sources
l Extracts clock signals from the first and seventeenth channels.
l Supports the tributary retiming function.
l Transmits E1 clock signals transparently.
Maintenance
features
l Inloops and outloops at electrical ports
services)
l PRBS tests
TPS protection Not supported

The SP3D consists of an interface unit, a CODEC unit, a mapping/demapping unit, a logic control
unit, and a power supply unit.
184
Figure 6-1 Functional block diagram of the SP3D
Backplane
Logic
control unit
Cross-connect unit
E1/T1
Interface
unit
Mapping/De
mapping unit
System control and
communication unit
Service bus
CODEC
unit
Clock unit
E1/T1
E1/T1
signal
Control
bus
System clock signal
Power
supply unit
to the board

System power supply
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse
System power supply

Table 6-2 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SP3D
1 Interface unit Couples external E1/T1 signals by using a transformer
and then transmits the signals to the board.
2 CODEC unit l Equalizes the received signals.
l Detects T_ALOS alarms.
185
3 Mapping/
Demapping unit
l Asynchronously maps signals into C-12s.
l Adds path overhead bytes to C-12s to form VC-12s.
l Processes pointers to form TU-12s.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TU-12s to form
one TUG-2.
l Performs byte interleaving for seven TUG-2s to form
one TUG-3.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TUG-3s to form
one C-4.
l Adds higher order path overhead bytes to one C-4 to
form one VC-4.
4 Logic processing
unit
l Processes clock signals.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the active and standby cross-connect units.

Table 6-3 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SP3D
1 Logic processing
unit
2 Mapping/
Demapping unit
l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.
l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3.
l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2.
l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects
l Extracts E1/T1 signals.
3 CODEC unit Performs HDB3 coding.
4 Interface unit Couples E1/T1 signals by using a transformer and then
transmits the signals to an external cable.

186
control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit
units on the board.
Clock Unit
6.1.4 Front Panel
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 6-2 shows the front panel of the SP3D.
Figure 6-2 Front panel of the SP3D
S
P
3
D
S
P
3
D
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
1
21
22
42

Indicators
The front panel of the SP3D has the following indicators: STAT and SRV. For status explanation
Ports
Table 6-4 Ports on an SP3D board
Port Descripti
on
Cable
1-21 Receives/
Transmits
the first to
twenty-
first E1/T1
signals.
Anea 96
POS.96
POS.1
See Table 6-5. 16.8 21xE1/
T1 Cable
187
Port Descripti
on
Cable
22-42 Receives/
Transmits
the twenty-
second to
forty-
second E1/
T1 signals.

Table 6-5 Pin assignments for an Anea 96 port
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (-)
188
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (-)
189
57 The seventeenth received E1
81 The seventeenth transmitted E1
58 The seventeenth received E1
82 The seventeenth transmitted E1
59 The eighteenth received E1
83 The eighteenth transmitted E1
60 The eighteenth received E1
84 The eighteenth transmitted E1
61 The nineteenth received E1
85 The nineteenth transmitted E1
62 The nineteenth received E1
86 The nineteenth transmitted E1
63 The twentieth received E1
87 The twentieth transmitted E1
64 The twentieth received E1
88 The twentieth transmitted E1
65 The twenty-first received E1
89 The twenty-first transmitted E1
66 The twenty-first received E1
90 The twenty-first transmitted E1

None.
6.1.6 Valid Slots
The SP3D can be inserted in slots 1-6 in the chassis. The slot allocation priority is as follows:
slots 4 and 6 > slots 1 and 2 > slots 3 and 5. The logical slots of the SP3D on the NMS are the
6.1.7 Feature Code
The feature code of the SP3D indicates the E1/T1 port impedance.
190
Table 6-6 Feature codes of the SP3D
Feature Code Port Impedance (Ohm)
A 120
B 75

Table 6-7 lists the technical specifications of the SP3D.
Table 6-7 Technical specifications of the SP3D
Item Performance
Service
ports
1-21 Receives/Transmits the first to
twenty-first E1/T1 signals.
See Table 6-8.
22-42 Receives/Transmits the twenty-
second to forty-second E1/T1
signals.
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight 0.85 kg

Table 6-8 Specifications of E1/T1 electrical ports
Electrical Port Type 1544 kbit/s 2048 kbit/s
Code pattern B8ZS code, AMI code HDB3 code
Waveform at the output port Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Signal bit rate at the output port
port
Permitted frequency deviation
at the input port
Complies with ITU-T G.823.
Input jitter tolerance Complies with ITU-T G.
824.
191
Electrical Port Type 1544 kbit/s 2048 kbit/s
Anti-interference capability at
the input port
- Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Reflection attenuation at the
input and output ports
- Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Output jitter Complies with ITU-T G.823 and G.824.
Mapping jitter Complies with ITU-T G.783.
Combined jitter
Jitter transfer function - Complies with ITU-T G.742.
Port type Anea 96

6.2 PL3T
The PL3T is a 3xE3/T3 electrical interface board.
The functional version of PL3T boards is TNH2.
The PL3T processes E3/T3 signals and overheads, and supports alarms, performance events,
and maintenance features.
Table 6-9 lists the functions and features that the PL3T supports.
Table 6-9 Functions and features that the PL3T supports
Function and
Feature
Board
Service processing Receives/Transmits and processes 3xE3/T3 signals.
Overhead
processing
Sets and queries all path overheads at the VC-3 level.
Alarms and
performance
events
Tributary clock
sources
Extracts clock signals from the first and second channels.
192
Function and
Feature
Board
Maintenance
features
l Inloops and outloops at electrical ports
services)
l Board temperature detection
l PRBS tests

The PL3T consists of an interface unit, a CODEC unit, a mapping/demapping unit, and a logic
control unit.
This section describes how the PL3T processes one E3/T3 signal, and it serves as an example
to describe the working principle and signal flow of the PL3T. Figure 6-3 shows the functional
block diagram of the PL3T.
Figure 6-3 Functional block diagram of the PL3T
Backplane
Logic
control unit
Cross-connect unit
E3/T3
Interface
unit
Mapping/De
mapping unit
System control and
communication unit
Service bus
CODEC
unit
Clock unit
E3/T3
signal
Control
bus
System clock signal
+3.3 V
E3/T3
units on the board

193
Table 6-10 Signal processing in the receive direction of the PL3T
1 Interface unit Couples external E3/T3 signals by using a transformer
and then transmits the signals to the board.
2 CODEC unit l Equalizes the received signals.
l Detects T_ALOS alarms.
3 Mapping/
Demapping unit
l Asynchronously maps the signal into C-3.
l Processes path overheads and forms the signal to be
VC-3.
l Processes pointers and forms the signal to be TU-3.
l One TU-3 is multiplexed into one TUG-3.
l Three TU-3s are performed with byte interleaving and
are multiplexed into one C-4.
l C-4 is added with higher order path overheads and the
VC-4 is formed.
4 Logic control unit l Processes clock signals.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the active and standby cross-connect units.

Table 6-11 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the PL3T
1 Logic control unit l Processes clock signals.
2 Mapping/
Demapping unit
l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.
l Demultiplexes one TU-3 from one TUG-3.
l Demultiplexes one VC-3 from one TU-3.
l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects
l Extracts E3/T3 signals.
3 CODEC unit Performs HDB3 coding.
194
4 Interface unit Couples E3/T3 signals by using a transformer and then
transmits the signals to an external cable.

The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the system control and
communication unit.
Clock Unit
6.2.4 Front Panel
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 6-4 shows the front panel of the PL3T.
Figure 6-4 Front panel of the PL3T
P
L
3
T
P
L
3
T
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3

Indicators
The front panel of the PL3T has the STAT and SRV indicators. For status explanation for the
indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
The front panel of the PL3T has three electrical ports. Table 6-12 lists the types of the ports on
the PL3T and their respective usage.
195
Table 6-12 Ports on the PL3T
Port Description Connector Type Pin Assignment Required Cable
TX1-
TX3
Transmits the first
to third E3/T3
signals.
SMB l Inner core:
transmitting
data (+)
l Outer core:
transmitting
data (-)
16.9 E3/T3 Cable
RX1-
RX3
Receives the first
to third E3/T3
signals.
l Inner core:
transmitting
data (+)
l Outer core:
transmitting
data (-)

None.
6.2.6 Valid Slots
The PL3T can be inserted in slots 1-6 in the chassis. The slot allocation priority is as follows:
slots 4 and 6 > slots 1 and 2 > slots 3 and 5. The logical slots of the PL3T on the NMS are the
6.2.7 Feature Code
PL3T boards do not have feature codes.
This section describes the board specifications, including the electrical port performance,
dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Table 6-13 lists the technical specifications of the PL3T.
Table 6-13 Technical specifications of the PL3T
Item Performance
Service
ports
TX1-
TX3
Transmits the first to third E3/T3
signals.
See Table 6-14.
RX1-
RX3
Receives the first to third E3/T3
signals.
196
Item Performance
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight 0.30 kg

Table 6-14 Specifications of E3/T3 electrical ports
Item Value
Bit rate 34368 kbit/s 44736 kbit/s
Code pattern HDB3 B3ZS
Connector SMB SMB
Port impedance (ohm) 75 75
the input port
port
Input jitter tolerance Complies with
ITU-T G.823.
197
7 EoS Boards
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN 550 supports EoS boards EFS8, EGS4, and EGT1.
7.1 EFS8
The EFS8 is an 8xFE switching and processing board.
7.2 EGS4
The EGS4 is a 4xGE switching and processing board.
7.3 EGT1
The EGT1 is a 1xGE transparent transmission board.
Hardware Description 7 EoS Boards
198
7.1 EFS8
The EFS8 is an 8xFE switching and processing board.
The functional version of the EFS8 is TNH2.
The EFS8 supports the Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services, link capacity adjustment scheme
(LCAS), and test frames.
Table 7-1 lists the functions and features that the EFS8 supports.
Table 7-1 Functions and features supported by EFS8 boards
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Basic
functi
ons
Processes 8xFE signals.
Port
types
Supports 10/100BASE-T(X) that complies with IEEE 802.3u.
Functi
ons
when
being
used
with
an
interfa
ce
board
Provides ports on the front panel.
Port
charac
teristic
s
Working
modes
Auto-negotiation, 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M half-
duplex, and 100M full-duplex
Traffic
control at
ports
Auto-negotiation mode Supported
Non-autonegotiation mode Supported
199
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Query/
Setting of
port
status
Supported
Query of
port
types
Supported
Servic
e
catego
ries
EPL
service
Supports PORT-based transparent transmission.
EVPL
service
l Supports PORT-shared EVPL services.
l Supports VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services.
The services are isolated by VLAN tags.
The services are isolated by QinQ tags.
EPLAN
service
l Supports switching on the client and SDH sides.
l Supports the blacklist that can contain 512 records and also the static
MAC address table that can contain 512 records. The blacklist
function supports verification of destination MAC addresses only.
l Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity
of the MAC address table is 16K. The aging time of the MAC address
can be set and queried.
l Supports the configuration of static MAC routes.
l Supports the query of dynamic MAC addresses.
l Supports a maximum of 1 VB. The maximum number of logical
ports for each VB is 16.
l Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d
MAC bridge.
EVPLA
N service
l Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN.
l Supports the setting of a maximum of 4095 VLAN filtering tables.
l Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q
virtual bridge and IEEE 802.1ad provider bridge.
Servic
e
specifi
cation
s
Formats
of
Ethernet
data
frames
IEEE 802.3 Supported
Ethernet II Supported
IEEE 802.1 q/p Supported
200
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Frame
length
range
l Supports the setting of the frame length to a value ranging from 1518
bytes to 9600 bytes.
l Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes.
Bound
bandwidt
h
4xVC-4, or 12xVC-3, or 63xVC-12
Concaten
ation
granulari
ties
VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-Xv (X 63), and VC-3-Xv (X 12)
Encapsul
ation
formats
HDLC Supported
LAPS Supported
GFP-F Supported
MPLS
technolo
gy
Not supported
VLAN
technolo
gy
Supports a total number of 4094 VLANs, which comply with IEEE
802.1q/p.
Maximu
m uplink
bandwidt
h
622 Mbit/s
VCTRU
NK
specificat
ions
8
Configuration principles are as follows:
VC-4 numbered 4 of the board support the binding of VC-3 and VC-12
paths. The other VC-4s support the binding of VC-3 paths only.
Protec
tion
schem
es
TPS Not supported
BPS Not supported
PPS Not supported
DLAG Not supported
201
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
LAG Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation.
Supports the load sharing mode and load non-sharing mode.
Complies with IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.
LCAS Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the
bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042.
LPT Supports P2P LPT and P2MP LPT in compliance with ITU-T G.7042.
STP/
RSTP
Supports the RSTP, which complies with IEEE 802.1w.
MSTP Not supported
Synch
roniza
tion
Synchron
ous
Ethernet
Not supported
IEEE
1588v2
Not supported
Maint
enanc
e
featur
es
ETH
OAM
l Supports CC, LB tests, and LT tests in compliance with IEEE
802.1ag and OAM ping in compliance with Huawei proprietary
protocol.
l Supports OAM auto-discovery, remote loopbacks, fault detection,
and link performance detection in compliance with IEEE 802.3ah,
and selfloop detection in compliance with Huawei proprietary
protocol.
Test
Frame
Supports test frames in GFP and Ethernet bearer modes.
Response
to ping
Not supported
Port
mirroring
Supports egress and ingress port mirroring.
Loopbac
k
capabilit
y
PHY layer at Ethernet ports Supports inloops.
MAC layer at Ethernet ports Supports inloops.
VC-4 level Not supported
VC-3 level Supports inloops.
RMON Supports RMON of the Ethernet performance of Ethernet ports.
202
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Warm
resets
Supported
Cold
resets
Supported
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events
Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the
management and maintenance of the equipment.
QoS Traffic
classifica
tion
Supports traffic classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN, PORT
+SVLAN, and PORT+SVLAN+CVLAN.
Class of
service
(CoS)
Supports CoS types including simple, VLAN priority, DSCP, and IP
TOS.
Committ
ed access
rate
(CAR)
Supports the CAR, with the granularity of 64 kbit/s.
Shaping Supports queue shaping on ports.
Queue
schedulin
g policy
Supports SP+WRR (SP is short for strict priority and WRR is short for
weighted round robin.)
Congesti
on
avoidanc
e
Supports random early detection (RED).
IGMP
snoopi
ng
Protocol
enabling
Supports protocol enabling in compliance with IGMPv1 and IGMPv2.
Port
aging
time
Supported
Fast
leave
Supported
203
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Discardi
ng of
unknown
broadcast
packets
Supported
Static
broadcast
entry
Not supported
Traffi
c
contro
l
Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.
Traffi
c
monit
oring
N4EGS4 boards support port-based and VCTRUNK-based traffic monitoring.

The EFS8 consists of an Ethernet access unit, an encapsulation/mapping unit, a logic control
unit, a power supply unit, and a clock unit.
This section describes how the EFS8 processes one FE signal, and it serves as an example to
describe the working principle and signal flow of the EFS8. Figure 7-1 shows the function block
diagram of the EFS8.
204
Figure 7-1 Function block diagram of the EFS8
Backplane
FE
E
t
h
e
r
n
e
t

a
c
c
e
s
s

u
n
i
t
E
n
c
a
p
s
u
l
a
t
i
o
n
/
M
a
p
p
i
n
g

u
n
i
t
System control and
communication unit
Service bus
Control bus
Logic
control unit
FE
Cross-connect unit
Power
supply unit
to the board

System power supply
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse
System power supply

Table 7-2 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EFS8
1 Ethernet access unit l Receives/Transmits FE signals.
conversion for FE signals.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping,
CRC checks, and Ethernet performance measurement
for frame signals.
2 Encapsulation/
Mapping unit
l Encapsulates and maps signals.
l Transmits encapsulated data to the cross-connect unit
over the service bus.

Table 7-3 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EFS8
1 Encapsulation/
Mapping unit
l Receives signals from the cross-connect unit.
l Demaps and decapsulates signals.
205
2 Ethernet access unit l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC
code computing, and Ethernet performance
measurement.
l Sends out the generated FE signals through Ethernet
ports.

The logic control unit controls the Ethernet access unit and the encapsulation/mapping unit over
the control bus on the board.
Power Supply Unit
units on the board.
Clock Unit
7.1.4 Front Panel
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 7-2 shows the front panel of the EFS8.
Figure 7-2 Front panel of the EFS8
E
F
S
8
E
F
S
8
S
T
A
T
P
R
O
G
S
R
V
1 4 5 8

206
Indicators
The front panel of the EFS8 has the following indicators: STAT, PROG, and SRV. For status
Ports
Table 7-4 Description of the ports
Port Descriptio
n
Cable
1-4 Receives
and
transmits
the first to
fourth FE
signals.
RJ45
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
For status explanation for
the indicators of an RJ45
port, see Table 7-5.
The ports support
MDI and MDI-X
modes. For details
about the pin
assignments for the
ports, see Table 7-6
and Table 7-7.
16.10 Network
Cable
5-8 Receives
and
transmits
the fifth to
eighth FE
signals.

properly.
data.
transmitting data.

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T
(+)
207
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
(-)
(+)
(-)

(+)
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
(-)
(+)
(-)

208
The EFS8 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
7.1.6 Valid Slots
The EFS8 can be inserted in one of the slots 1-6 in the chassis.
7.1.7 Feature Code
EFS8 boards do not have feature codes.
This section describes the board specifications, including the parameters specified for electrical
Table 7-8 lists the technical specifications of the EFS8.
Table 7-8 Technical specifications of the EFS8
Item Performance
Service ports FE electrical port See Table 7-9.
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight 0.65 kg

Table 7-9 Specifications of the EFS8 Ethernet electrical ports
FE electrical
port
10BASE-T Manchester coding
signals
RJ45
100BASE-TX MLT-3 encoding
signal

7.2 EGS4
The EGS4 is a 4xGE switching and processing board.
209
The functional version of the EGS4 is TNM1.
EGS4 boards support the Layer 2 switching, link aggregation, and multicast functions.
Table 7-10 lists the functions and features supported by EGS4 boards.
Table 7-10 Functions and features supported by EGS4 boards
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Basic
functi
ons
Receives/Transmits and processes 4xFE or 4xGE services.
Port
types
l FE SFP optical module type: 100BASE-BX/100BASE-FX/100BASE-LX/
l GE SFP optical module type: 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/1000BASE-VX/
1000BASE-ZX
l GE SFP electrical module type: 1000BASE-T, supporting auto-negotiation
l SFP module types:
FE/GE two-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module
FE/GE single-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module
l A GE optical port can be a colored CWDM optical port. A colored CWDM
optical port supports a transmission distance of 40 km or 80 km.
Functi
ons
when
being
used
with
an
interfa
ce
board
Port
charac
teristic
s
Working
modes
GE electrical port: auto-negotiation, 1000M full-duplex, 100M full-
duplex, and 10M full-duplex
GE optical port: auto-negotiation and 1000M full-duplex
FE optical port: 100M full-duplex
210
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Traffic
control at
ports
Auto-negotiation mode Supported only by GE ports
Query/
Setting of
port
status
Supported
Query of
port
types
Supported
Servic
e
catego
ries
EPL
service
EVPL
service
l Supports PORT-shared EVPL services.
l Supports VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services.
The services are isolated by VLAN tags.
The services are isolated by QinQ tags.
EPLAN
service
l Supports switching on the client and SDH sides.
l Supports the blacklist that can contain 512 records and also the static
MAC address table that can contain 512 records. The blacklist
function supports verification of destination MAC addresses only.
l Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity
of the MAC address table is 16K. The aging time of the MAC address
can be set and queried.
l Supports the configuration of static MAC routes.
l Supports the query of dynamic MAC addresses.
l Supports a maximum of 16 VBs. The maximum number of logical
ports for each VB is 68.
l Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d
MAC bridge.
EVPLA
N service
l Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN.
l Supports the setting of a maximum of 4095 VLAN filtering tables.
l Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q
virtual bridge and IEEE 802.1ad provider bridge.
Servic
e
specifi
Formats
of
Ethernet
211
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
cation
s
data
frames
IEEE 802.1 q/p Supported
Frame
length
range
l Supports the setting of the frame length to a value ranging from 1518
Bound
bandwidt
h
16xVC-4, or 48xVC-3, or 252xVC-12
Concaten
ation
granulari
ties
VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-Xv (X 63), VC-3-Xv (X 24), and
VC-4-Xv (X 8).
Encapsul
ation
formats
HDLC Supported
LAPS Supported
GFP-F Supported
MPLS
technolo
gy
Not supported
VLAN
technolo
gy
Supports a total number of 4094 VLANs, which comply with IEEE
802.1q/p.
Maximu
m uplink
bandwidt
h
2.5 Gbit/s. For the backplane bandwidth provided by each slot, see
Figure 7-5.
VCTRU
NK
specificat
ions
64
VC-4s numbered 1-4 and 9-12 of the board support the binding of VC-3
and VC-12 paths. The other VC-4s support the binding of VC-3 paths
only.
Supports a maximum of 16 VC-4s and the number varies according to
the access capability of a slot. If the slot access capability is 1.25 Gbit/
s, the first to the eighth VC-4s are supported. If the slot access capability
is 2.5 Gbit/s, the first to the sixteenth VC-4s are supported.
212
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Protec
tion
schem
es
TPS Not supported
BPS Not supported
PPS Not supported
Distribut
ed link
aggregati
on group
(DLAG)
Supports static DLAGs.
Supports non-load sharing DLAGs.
LAG Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation.
Supports the load sharing mode and non-load sharing mode.
LPT Supports P2P LPT and P2MP LPT in compliance with ITU-T G.7042.
STP/
RSTP
Supports the RSTP, which complies with IEEE 802.1w.
MSTP Not supported
Synch
roniza
tion
Synchron
ous
Ethernet
Supported
NOTE
SFP electrical modules do not support synchronous Ethernet clocks.
IEEE
1588v2
Not supported
Maint
enanc
e
featur
es
ETH
OAM
l Supports CC, LB tests, and LT tests in compliance with IEEE
802.1ag and OAM ping in compliance with Huawei proprietary
protocol.
l Supports OAM auto-discovery, remote loopbacks, fault detection,
and link performance detection in compliance with IEEE 802.3ah,
and selfloop detection in compliance with Huawei proprietary
protocol.
Test
Frame
Supports test frames in GFP bearer mode.
Response
to ping
Not supported
213
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Port
mirroring
Supports ingress mirroring.
Loopbac
k
capabilit
y
RMON Supports RMON of the Ethernet performance of Ethernet ports and
VCTRUNKs.
Warm
resets
Supported
Cold
resets
Supported
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events
QoS Traffic
classifica
tion
Supports traffic classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN, PORT
+SVLAN, and ORT+VLAN+PRI.
Class of
service
(CoS)
Supports CoS types including simple, VLAN priority, DSCP, and IP
TOS.
Committ
ed access
rate
(CAR)
Supports the CAR, with the granularity of 64 kbit/s.
Shaping Supports queue shaping on ports.
Queue
schedulin
g policy
Supports strict priority (SP) and weighted fair queuing (WFQ).
214
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Congesti
on
avoidanc
e
Supports random early detection (RED).
IGMP
snoopi
ng
Protocol
enabling
Supports protocol enabling in compliance with IGMPv1 and IGMPv2.
Port
aging
time
Supported
Fast
leave
Supported
Discardi
ng of
unknown
broadcast
packets
Supported
Static
broadcast
entry
Not supported
Traffi
c
contro
l
Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.
Traffi
c
monit
oring
N4EGS4 boards support port-based and VCTRUNK-based traffic monitoring.

The EGS4 consists of an Ethernet access unit, an encapsulation/mapping unit, a logic control
This section describes how the EGS4 processes one GE signal, and it serves as an example to
describe the working principle and signal flow of the EGS4. Figure 7-3 shows the function block
diagram of the EGS4.
215
Figure 7-3 Function block diagram of the EGS4
Backplane
GE
E
t
h
e
r
n
e
t

a
c
c
e
s
s

u
n
i
t
E
n
c
a
p
s
u
l
a
t
i
o
n
/
M
a
p
p
i
n
g

u
n
i
t
System control and
communication unit
Service bus
Control bus
Logic
control unit
GE
Cross-connect unit
Power
supply unit
to the board

System power supply
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse
System power supply

Table 7-11 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EGS4
1 Ethernet access unit l Receives/Transmits FE/GE signals.
conversion for FE/GE signals.
for frame signals.
2 Encapsulation/
Mapping unit

Table 7-12 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EGS4
1 Encapsulation/
Mapping unit
216
measurement.
l Sends out the generated FE/GE signals through
Ethernet ports.

Power Supply Unit
units on the board.
Clock Unit
7.2.4 Front Panel
There are indicators and an optical port on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 7-4 Front panel of the EGS4 (with FE/GE optical ports)
E
G
S
4
P
R
O
G
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
L
/
A
1
L
/
A
2
L
/
A
3
L
/
A
4
OUT1/IN1 OUT2/IN2 OUT3/IN3 OUT4/IN4

217
Indicators
The front panel of the EGS4 has the following indicators: STAT, PROG, SRV, L/A1, L/A2, L/
A3, and L/A4. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
Table 7-13 Description of the port
Por
t
Descriptio
n
Connector Type Pin
Assignment
Require
d Cable
IN1
/
OU
T1,
IN2
/
OU
T2,
IN3
/
OT
U3,
and
IN4
/
OU
T4
Receives
and
transmits
FE/GE
signals.
FE/GE
optical port
OUT IN
l OUT
represents
the transmit
port.
l IN
represents
the receive
port.
16.1
Fiber
Jumper
GE electrical
port
SFP electrical module
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
For status explanation
for the indicators, see
Table 7-14.
The electrical
port supports
medium
dependent
interface (MDI),
MDI crossover
(MDI-X), and
auto-MDI/MDI-
X modes. For
pin assignments,
see Table 7-15
and Table 7-16.
16.10
Network
Cable

properly.
data.
transmitting data.

218
(+)
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
(-)
(+)
(-)

(+)
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
(-)
219
(+)
(-)

Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EGS4.
The EGS4 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
7.2.6 Valid Slots
The EGS4 can be inserted in one of the slots 1-6 in the chassis.
NOTE
When the APIU (providing AC power) is used for power supply, a maximum of two EGS4 boards can be
used in a chassis. When the UPM system is used for power supply, a maximum of four EGS4 boards can
be used in a chassis.
Different slots provide different backplane bandwidths. The EGS4 board supports the following
three slot applications. Figure 7-5 shows the backplane bandwidth for each application.
l Application 1: If an EGS4 board is inserted in any of slots 1 to 6, the maximum upstream
bandwidth of the EGS4 board is 1.25 Gbit/s.
l Application 2: If EGS4 boards are inserted in slots 3 and 4, and the maximum upstream
bandwidth of the EGS4 boards is 2.5 Gbit/s, slots 1 and 2 cannot house any TDM service
boards.
l Application 3: If EGS4 boards are inserted in slots 1 and 2, and the maximum upstream
bandwidth of the EGS4 boards is 2.5 Gbit/s, slots 3 and 4 cannot house any TDM service
boards.
NOTE
Maximum upstream bandwidth of the EGS4 board is 2.5 Gbit/s. The maximum access capacity of slots 1,
2, 3, and 4 is 2.5 Gbit/s and the maximum access capacity of slots 5 and 6 is 1.25 Gbit/s.
220
Figure 7-5 EGS4 board slot applications
SLO
T
9
SLOT 7
(CST/CSH)
SLOT 1
(EXT
)
SLOT 5
(EXT)
SLOT 3
(EXT)
SLOT 2
(EXT
)
SLOT 4
(EXT)
SLOT 6
(EXT)
SLOT 8 (CST/CSH)
10
(PIU
)
SLO
T
11
(FAN
)
Slot
92
(PIU) Slot 1 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Slot 5 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Slot 3 (1.25 Gbit/s) Slot 4 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Slot 8
Slot
91
(PIU)
Slot
93
(FAN)
Slot 7
SLO
T
9
SLOT 7
(CST/CSH)
SLOT 1
(EXT
)
SLOT 5
(EXT)
SLOT 3
(EXT)
SLOT 2
(EXT
)
SLOT 4
(EXT)
SLOT 6
(EXT)
SLOT 8 (CST/CSH)
10
(PIU
)
SLO
T
11
(FAN
)
Slot
92
(PIU) Slot 1 (no TDM service board) Slot 2 (no TDM service board)
Slot 8
Slot
91
(PIU)
Slot
93
(FAN)
Slot 7
SLO
T
9
SLOT 7
(CST/CSH)
SLOT 1
(EXT
)
SLOT 5
(EXT)
SLOT 3
(EXT)
SLOT 2
(EXT
)
SLOT 4
(EXT)
SLOT 6
(EXT)
SLOT 8 (CST/CSH)
10
(PIU
)
SLO
T
11
(FAN
)
Slot
92
(PIU)
Slot 3 (no TDM service board) Slot 4 (no TDM service board)
Slot 8
Slot
91
(PIU)
Slot
93
(FAN)
Slot 7
Application 1:
Application 3:
Application 2:
Slot 3 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 4 (2.5 Gbit/s)

7.2.7 Feature Code
indicates the type of board port. EGS4 boards have feature codes.
Table 7-17 Feature codes of the EGS4
Board Feature Code Port Type
TNM1EGS40
1
01 100BASE-FX, eSFP optical module
TNM1EGS40
2
02 100BASE-LX, eSFP optical module
TNM1EGS40
3
03 1000BASE-SX, eSFP optical module
TNM1EGS40
4
04 1000BASE-LX, eSFP optical module
TNM1EGS40
5
05 1000BASE-VX, eSFP optical module
TNM1EGS40
6
06 1000BASE-ZX, eSFP optical module
221
Board Feature Code Port Type
TNM1EGS40
7
07 1000BASE-T, SFP electrical module

Table 7-18 lists the technical specifications of the EGS4.
Table 7-18 Technical specifications of the EGS4
Item Performance
Service
ports
GE1,
GE2,
GE3,
GE4
FE optical port See Table 7-20 and Table 7-21.
GE electrical port See Table 7-19.
GE optical port By using different SFP modules,
the equipment provides GE
optical ports with different
For port specifications, see Table
7-22, Table 7-23, Table 7-25, and
Table 7-24.
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight 0.65 kg

Table 7-19 Specifications of the Ethernet electrical ports
GE electrical
port
signals
RJ45

222
Item Value
Optical port
type
Optical fiber
type
Transmissio
n distance
(km)
2 15 40 80
Operating
wavelength
(nm)
1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
Mean
launched
power (dBm)
-19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0
Receiver
minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
-30 -28 -34 -34
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-14 -8 -10 -10
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
10 8.2 10 10

Parameter Value
(km)
15 40
Operating transmit
wavelength (nm)
1550 1310 1550 1310
Operating receive
wavelength (nm)
1310 1550 1310 1550
range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -5 to 0
223
Parameter Value
(dBm)
-32 -32
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8 -10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.5 10

Item Value
Optical port
type
Optical fiber
type
Transmission
distance (km)
0.5 10 40 80
Operating
wavelength
(nm)
770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Mean
launched
power (dBm)
-9.5 to -2.5 -9 to -3 -5 to 0 -2 to +5
Receiver
minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
-17 -20 -23 -23
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
0 -3 -3 -3
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
9 9 9 9

224
Paramete
r
Value
Type of
optical
interface
Transmiss
ion
distance
(km)
10 40
Type of
fiber
Operating
transmit
wavelengt
h (nm)
1490 1310 1490 1310
Operating
receive
wavelengt
h (nm)
1310 1490 1310 1490
Launched
optical
power
range
(dBm)
-9 to -3 -2 to 3
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19.5 -23
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3 -3
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
9 9

225
Table 7-24 Ethernet performance specifications of the GE optical ports (8xVC-4 bandwidth for
each port)
Item Performance
Frame
Length
(Bytes)
Throughput
(pks/sec)
Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back
(Frames)
64.00 2976190.00 88.00 0.00 5952380.00
128.00 1689190.00 89.70 0.00 3378380.00
256.00 905798.00 91.20 0.00 1785716.00
512.00 469924.00 94.30 0.00 932836.00
1024.00 239464.00 99.10 0.00 473484.00
1280.00 192308.00 101.70 0.00 381096.00
1518.00 162548.00 103.90 0.00 321752.00
9600.00 25988.00 184.70 0.00 51460.00

Parameter Value
CWDM
Nominal bit
rate
1,250,000 kbit/s
Transmission
distance (km)
40 80
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
0 to 5 0 to 5
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
20
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19 -28
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-3 -9
226
Parameter Value
CWDM
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2 8.2

7.3 EGT1
The EGT1 is a 1xGE transparent transmission board.
The functional version of the EGT1 is TNH2.
The EGT1 supports the transparent transmission of Ethernet services, link capacity adjustment
scheme (LCAS), and test frames.
Table 7-26 lists the functions and features that the EGT1 supports.
Table 7-26 Functions and features supported by EGT1 boards
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Basic
functi
ons
Transparently transmits 1xGE signals.
Port
types
l GE SFP optical module type: 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/1000BASE-VX/
1000BASE-ZX
l GE SFP electrical module type: 1000BASE-T, supporting auto-negotiation
l SFP module types:
GE two-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module
GE single-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module
227
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Functi
ons
when
being
used
with
an
interfa
ce
board
Port
charac
teristic
s
Working
modes
GE optical port: supports 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation.
GE electrical port: supports auto-negotiation.
Traffic
control at
ports
Auto-negotiation mode Supported
Query/
Setting of
port
status
Supported
Query of
port types
Supported
EPL
servic
e
Servic
e
specifi
cation
s
Formats
of
Ethernet
data
frames
IEEE 802.1q TAG Supported
Frame
length
range
l Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518
Bound
bandwidt
h
8xVC-4, 24xVC-3, or 63xVC-12
228
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Concaten
ation
granularit
ies
Supports VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-Xv (X 63), VC-3-Xv (X
24), and VC-4-Xv (X 8) granularities.
Encapsul
ation
formats
HDLC Supported
LAPS Supported
GFP-F Supported
MPLS
technolo
gy
Not supported
VLAN
technolo
gy
Supports VLAN transparent transmission.
Maximu
m uplink
bandwidt
h
The maximum uplink bandwidth is 1.25 Gbit/s. An EGT2 board can
adapt to the bandwidth of its slot.
VCTRU
NK
specificat
ions
Number of supported VCTRUNKs: 1
VC-4 numbered 4 of the board support the binding of VC-3 and VC-12
paths. The other VC-4s support the binding of VC-3 paths only.
Protec
tion
schem
es
TPS Not supported
LPT Supports P2P LPT in compliance with ITU-T G.7042.
LAG Not supported
Synch
roniza
tion
Synchron
ous
Ethernet
Not supported
IEEE
1588v2
Not supported
Maint
enanc
ETH
OAM
Support CC, LB test, and LT test. These functions comply with IEEE
802.1ag.
229
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
e
featur
es
Test
Frame
Supports test frames in GFP bearer mode.
Response
to ping
Not supported
Port
mirroring
Not supported
Loopbac
k
capabilit
y
RMON Supports Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level.
Warm
resets
Supported (Warm resets do not affect services.)
Cold
resets
Supported
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events
QoS Not supported
Traffi
c
contro
l
Supports the GE port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.

The EGT1 consists of an Ethernet access unit, an encapsulation/mapping unit, a logic control
Figure 7-6 shows the function block diagram of the EGT1.
230
Figure 7-6 Function block diagram of the EGT1
Backplane
GE
E
t
h
e
r
n
e
t

a
c
c
e
s
s

u
n
i
t
E
n
c
a
p
s
u
l
a
t
i
o
n
/
M
a
p
p
i
n
g

u
n
i
t
System control and
communication unit
Service bus
Control bus
Logic
control unit
GE
Cross-connect unit
Power
supply unit
to the board

System power supply
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Fuse
System power supply

Table 7-27 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EGT1
1 Ethernet access unit l Receives/Transmits GE signals and performs O/E
conversion.
conversion for GE signals.
for frame signals.
2 Encapsulation/
Mapping unit

Table 7-28 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EGT1
1 Encapsulation/
Mapping unit
231
measurement.
l Sends out the generated GE signals through Ethernet
ports.

Power Supply Unit
units on the board.
Clock Unit
7.3.4 Front Panel
There are indicators and an optical port on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 7-7 Front panel of the EGT1
E
G
T
1
E
G
T
1
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
L
I
N
K
A
C
T
TX1/RX1
O
P
M
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT

232
Indicators
The front panel of the EGT1 has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, LINK, ACT, and OPM.
For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
Table 7-29 Description of the port
Port Description Connector Type Pin Assignment Required
Cable
TX1/
RX1
Receives and
transmits GE
signals.
TX RX
l TX represents
the transmit port.
l RX represents
the receive port.
16.1 Fiber
Jumper

Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EM6F.
The EGT1 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
7.3.6 Valid Slots
The EGT1 can be inserted in one of the slots 1-6 in the chassis.
7.3.7 Feature Code
indicates the type of optical port. EGT1 boards have feature codes.
Table 7-30 Feature code of the EGT1
01 1000BASE-LX, operating at 1310 nm
03 1000BASE-LX, single-fiber bidirectional
optical module (The transmit wavelength is
1310 nm and the receive wavelength is 1490
nm.)
233
04 1000BASE-LX, single-fiber bidirectional
optical module (The transmit wavelength is
1490 nm and the receive wavelength is 1310
nm.)

This section describes the board specifications, including the parameters specified for optical
Table 7-31 lists the technical specifications of the EGT1.
Table 7-31 Technical specifications of the EGT1
Item Performance
Service
ports
GE1,
GE2
GE electrical port See Table 7-32.
GE optical port See Table 7-33 and Table 7-34.
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight 0.60 kg

Table 7-32 Specifications of the EGT1 Ethernet electrical ports
GE electrical
port
signals
RJ45

Item Value
Optical port
type
Optical fiber
type
Transmission
distance (km)
0.5 10 40 80
234
Item Value
Operating
wavelength
(nm)
770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Mean
launched
power (dBm)
-9.5 to -2.5 -9 to -3 -5 to 0 -2 to +5
Receiver
minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
-17 -20 -23 -23
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
0 -3 -3 -3
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
9 9 9 9

Paramete
r
Value
Type of
optical
interface
Transmiss
ion
distance
(km)
10 40
Type of
fiber
Operating
transmit
wavelengt
h (nm)
1490 1310 1490 1310
Operating
receive
wavelengt
h (nm)
1310 1490 1310 1490
235
Paramete
r
Value
Launched
optical
power
range
(dBm)
-9 to -3 -2 to 3
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19.5 -23
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3 -3
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
9 9
236
8 WDM Board
About This Chapter
The OpitX OSN 550 can house the DMD2 board (WDM board).
8.1 DMD2
DMD2 is a bidirectional double channel optical add/drop multiplexing board.
Hardware Description 8 WDM Board
237
8.1 DMD2
DMD2 is a bidirectional double channel optical add/drop multiplexing board.
The functional version of the DMD2 is TNM1.
The main functions and features supported by the DMD2 are adding/dropping and multiplexing.
For detailed functions and features, see Table 8-1.
Table 8-1 Functions and features of the DMD2 board
Functions and
Features
Description
Basic Function Adds/Drops in two directions two channels of wavelength signals to/
from the multiplexed signals respectively.
WDM specifications Supports both the DWDM and CWDM specifications.

NOTE
DMD2 boards use passive optical components so their voltages do not affect services.
The DMD2 unit consists of two parts: the OADM module, the communication module.
Figure 8-1 shows the principle block diagram of the DMD2.
Figure 8-1 Principle block diagram of the DMD2
wIN
eOUT
SCC
Backplane or CTL
Communication module
Drop Add
wD1 wA1
OADM
module
Add Drop
OADM
module
eA1 eD1
wOUT
eIN
eA2 wA2 eD2 wD2
238

Signal Flow
In the east, the DMD2 board receives multiplexed signals through optical port eIN. After the
optical module processes the multiplexed signals, the board splits out two channels of optical
signals from the multiplexed signals and outputs them through optical port eD1 and eD2.
The board also receives through optical port eA1 and eA2 two channels of optical signals and
couples them to the multiplexed signals and outputs the coupled signals through eOUT.
The working principle of west signals is the same as that of east signals; while the signal flows
in the two directions are different.
Module Function
l Optical module
Performs the add/drop multiplexing of two wavelengths respectively in two directions.
l Communication module
Communicates with the SCC unit, to control and operate on each module of the unit.
8.1.4 Front Panel
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 8-2 Front panel of the DMD2
D
M
D
2
wIN wOUT wA1 wD1 wD2 eOUT eD1 eD2 wA2 eIN eA1 eA2
1471 1491
1491 1471

NOTE
The number under the optical port indicates one of the wavelengths that are supported by the optical port.
Indicators
The DMD2 board does not have indicators.
239
Ports
Table 8-2 Types and descriptions of the DMD2 ports
Port Description Connector
Type
Requir
ed
Cable
wIN/
wOUT
Receive or transmit the westward multiplexed
signal.
LC 16.1
Fiber
Jumper
wA1/
wA2
Receive the westward optical signals from the OTU
or integrated client-side equipment, thus adding one
westward channel respectively.
wD1/
wD2
Transmit the westward optical signals to the OTU
or integrated client-side equipment, thus dropping
one westward channel respectively.
eIN/
eOUT
Receive or transmit the eastward multiplexed
signal.
eA1/
eA2
Receive the eastward optical signals from the OTU
or integrated client-side equipment, thus adding one
eastward channel respectively.
eD1/
eD2
Transmit the eastward optical signals to the OTU or
integrated client-side equipment, thus dropping one
eastward channel respectively.

None.
8.1.6 Valid Slots
The DMD2 can be inserted in one of the slots 1-6 in the chassis.
8.1.7 Feature Code
None.
Specifications include optical specifications, mechanical specifications and power consumption.
Table 8-3 lists the technical specifications of the DMD2.
240
Table 8-3 Technical specifications of the DMD2
Item Value
Service ports See Table 8-4 and Table 8-5.
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight 0.72 kg

Table 8-4 Optical port specifications for the DMD2 board in the dense wavelength division
multiplexing (DWDM) system
Optical port Item Value
- Operating frequency
range (THz)
192.10 to 196.00
- Adjacent channel
spacing (GHz)
100
eIN-eD1
eIN-eD2
wIN-wD1
wIN-wD2
1.0 dB spectral width
(nm)
0.2
Insertion loss on the
drop channel (dB)
< 1.5
Adjacent channel
isolation (dB)
> 30
Non-adjacent channel
isolation (dB)
> 40
eA1-eOUT
eA2-eOUT
wA1-wOUT
wA2-wOUT
(nm)
0.2
add channel (dB)
< 1.5
wIN-eOUT
eIN-wOUT
Insertion loss (dB) < 2.2
- Reflectance (dB) < -40

241
Table 8-5 Optical port specifications for the DMD2 board in the coarse wavelength division
multiplexing (CWDM) system
Optical port Item Value
- Operating wavelength
range (nm)
1471 to 1611
- Adjacent channel
spacing (nm)
20
eIN-eD1
eIN-eD2
wIN-wD1
wIN-wD2
(nm)
13.0
drop channel (dB)
< 1.5
Adjacent channel
isolation (dB)
> 30
Non-adjacent channel
isolation (dB)
> 40
eA1-eOUT
eA2-eOUT
wA1-wOUT
wA2-wOUT
(nm)
13.0
add channel (dB)
< 1.5
wIN-eOUT
eIN-wOUT
Insertion loss (dB) < 2.2
- Reflectance (dB) < -40
242
9 Auxiliary Boards
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN 550 supports the auxiliary boards AUX and FAN.
9.1 AUX
The AUX is an auxiliary interface board that provides one orderwire phone port, one 64 kbit/s
synchronous transparent data port or one 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port, one
clock port and alarm input/output ports.
9.2 FAN
The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat for the chassis by means of air cooling.
Hardware Description 9 Auxiliary Boards
243
9.1 AUX
The AUX is an auxiliary interface board that provides one orderwire phone port, one 64 kbit/s
synchronous transparent data port or one 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port, one
clock port and alarm input/output ports.
The functional version of the AUX is TNM1.
The AUX provides one orderwire phone port, one external clock port, one 64 kbit/s synchronous
data port or one 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port, and one outdoor cabinet
monitoring port.
Table 9-1 lists the functions and features that the AUX supports.
Table 9-1 Functions and features that the AUX supports
Synchronous/Asynchronous
transparent data port
Provides one 64 kbit/s synchronous transparent data port
or 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port.
External clock port Provides one 120-ohm, two-channel clock input/output
port for connecting to BITS.
External time port Provides two external time input/output ports.
Alarm input/output ports Provides alarm ports with six inputs and two outputs.
Outdoor cabinet monitoring port Provides one outdoor cabinet monitoring port (sharing one
port physically with an alarm input/output port) for
monitoring the temperature and humidity of an outdoor
cabinet.
Orderwire phone port Provides one orderwire phone port so that operation/
maintenance engineers at different workstations can have
voice communication with each other.

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the AUX.
244
Figure 9-1 Functional block diagram of the AUX
Orderwire
unit
Power
supply unit
Clock unit
Logic
control unit
Board status
detection unit
Backplane
Power dip detection signal
System bus
+3.3 V
System control and
communication unit
Clock
signal
Synchronous/Asynchronous
transparent data port
Orderwire phone port
6-input/2-output alarm ports
Outdoor cabinet monitoring port
Two-channel external clock/time port
System control and
communication unit

Power Supply Unit
l Receives the +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and supplies it to the other units on
the AUX.
l Receives and shuts down control signals.
Orderwire Unit
l Provides one 64 kbit/s synchronous transparent data port or 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous
transparent data port.
l Provides one orderwire phone port.
l Provides 6-input/2-output alarm ports.
l Provides one outdoor cabinet monitoring port.
l Provides one two-channel external clock/time port.
Logic Control Unit
l Provides an interface with the CPU unit and works with the CPU unit to control the board.
l Processes orderwire bytes and overhead bytes.
l Provides board status information.
l Checks the status of the active and standby system control, switching, and timing boards.
l Checks the status of the active and standby clocks.
l Switches system clock reference sources automatically or by running specific commands.
l Detects and reports the status of the key clock for each board in the system.
l Detects the presence of the key clock for each board in the system and reports specific
alarms if any key clock is found lost.
245
Board Status Detection Unit
l Detects board performance data such as board temperature and voltage.
l Controls power shut-down.
l Stores and reads board manufacturing information.
Clock Unit
l Provides clock signals to the logic control unit.
9.1.4 Front Panel
Front Panel Diagram
A
U
X
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
PHONE F1/S1 ALMO ALMI SYNC ALMI2/EXT TOD0 TOD1
Indicators
The front panel of the AUX has the following indicators: STAT and SRV. For status explanation
Ports
Table 9-2 Description of the ports on the AUX
Por
t
Descript
ion
Cable
F1/
S1
64 kbit/s
synchrono
us
transparen
t data port
or 19.2
kbit/s
asynchron
ous
transparen
t data port
RJ45
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
For status
explanation for the
indicators of an
RJ45 port, see
Table 9-3.
l Pin 1: transmitting
asynchronous data signals
l Pin 2: grounding end
l Pin 3: receiving asynchronous
data signals
synchronous data signals (+)
synchronous data signals (-)
l Pin 6: grounding end
l Pin 7: receiving synchronous
data signals (+)
l Pin 8: receiving synchronous
data signals (-)
16.10
Network
Cable
246
Por
t
Descript
ion
Cable
PH
ON
E
Orderwire
phone port
l Pin 4: orderwire call signal
(ring)
l Pin 5: orderwire call signal
(tip)
AL
MO
Alarm
output
port
l Pin 1: the first external alarm
output signal (+)
output signal (-)
l Pin 3: the second external
alarm output signal (+)
output signal (+)
output signal (-)
alarm output signal (-)
alarm output signal (+)
alarm output signal (-)
247
Por
t
Descript
ion
Cable
AL
MI1
Alarm
input port
1 (four
inputs)
input signal
l Pin 2: grounding end for the
first alarm input signal
alarm input signal
l Pin 4: the third external alarm
input signal
second alarm input signal
third alarm input signal
l Pin 7: the fourth external
alarm input signal
fourth alarm input signal
AL
MI2
/
EX
T
Alarm
input port
2 (two
inputs)/
Outdoor
cabinet
monitorin
g port
l Pin 1: the fifth external alarm
input signal
fifth alarm input signal
l Pin 3: receiving outdoor
cabinet monitoring signal (-)
l Pin 4: the sixth external alarm
input signal
sixth alarm input signal
l Pin 6: receiving outdoor
cabinet monitoring signal (+)
l Pin 7: transmitting outdoor
cabinet monitoring signal (-)
l Pin 8: transmitting outdoor
cabinet monitoring signal (+)
248
Por
t
Descript
ion
Cable
SY
NC
120-ohm,
two-
channel
external
clock
input/
output
port
l Pin 1: differential signal input
of external clock 1 (-)
of external clock 1 (+)
of external clock 2 (+)
l Pin 4: differential signal
output of external clock 1 (-)
output of external clock 1 (+)
of external clock 2 (-)
output of external clock 2 (+)
output of external clock 2 (-)
TO
D0
External
time port 1
l Pin 3: 1pps differential input/
output signal (-)
l Pin 4: GND
l Pin 5: GND
output signal (+)
l Pin 7: TOD differential input/
output signal (-)
output signal (+)
TO
D1
External
time port 2
output signal (-)
l Pin 4: GND
l Pin 5: GND
output signal (+)
output signal (-)
output signal (+)
249

properly.
data.
transmitting data.

None.
9.1.6 Valid Slots
The AUX can be inserted in slots 1-6 in the chassis. The slot allocation priority is as follows:
slots 4 and 6 > slots 1 and 2 > slots 3 and 5. The logical slots of the AUX on the NMS are the
9.1.7 Feature Code
None.
Table 9-4 lists the technical specifications of the AUX.
Table 9-4 Technical specifications of the AUX
Item Performance
Ports F1/S1 64 kbit/s synchronous
transparent data port or 19.2
kbit/s asynchronous transparent
data port
See Table 9-5 and Table 9-6.
PHONE Orderwire phone port See Table 9-7.
250
Item Performance
ALMO Alarm output port Not involved
ALMI1 Alarm input port 1 (four inputs) Not involved
ALMI2/
EXT
Alarm input port 2 (two inputs)/
Outdoor cabinet monitoring
port
For the outdoor cabinet
monitoring port, see Table 9-8.
SYNC 120-ohm, two-channel external
clock input/output port
See Table 9-9.
TOD0 External time port 1 See Table 9-10.
TOD1 External time port 2 See Table 9-10.
Dimensions (H x W x D) 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80
mm
Weight 0.30 kg

Table 9-5 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's synchronous data ports
Item Value
Transmission channel Byte F1 in the SDH overhead
Bit rate (kbit/s) 64
Port type Codirectional
Port characteristics In compliance with ITU-T G.703

Table 9-6 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's asynchronous data ports
Item Value
Transmission channel User-defined byte in the SDH overhead
Bit rate (kbit/s) 19.2
Port characteristics In compliance with RS-232

251
Table 9-7 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's orderwire ports
Item Value
Transmission channel Bytes E1 and E2 in the SDH overhead
Orderwire type Addressing call
Pair in each direction One symmetrical pair
Impedance (ohm) 600

Table 9-8 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's outdoor cabinet monitoring ports
Item Value
Port characteristics In compliance with RS-485

Table 9-9 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's external clock ports
Item Value
External synchronous source 2048 kbit/s (in compliance with ITU-T G.703) or 2048 kHz
(in compliance with ITU-T G.703)
Frequency accuracy In compliance with ITU-T G.813
Pull-in or pull-out range
Noise generation
Noise toleration
Noise transfer
Transient response and
holdover performance
Synchronization clock
transfer accuracy
< 50 ppb

Table 9-10 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's external time ports
Item Value
Port type l 1PPS+TOD
l DCLS
Electrical specifications RS-422
252
Item Value
Protocol type l 1PPS+TOD: UBX and NMEA
l DCLS: IRIG-B (DC)

9.2 FAN
The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat for the chassis by means of air cooling.
The functional version of the FAN is TNM1.
The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status.
Table 9-11 lists the functions and features that the FAN supports.
Table 9-11 Functions and features that the FAN supports
Power input Receives two +12 V power supplies from the active and
standby system control, switching, and timing boards. The
two +12 V power supplies provide 1+1 backup for each other.
Number of fans 6
Intelligent fan speed
adjustment
l Adjusts the rotating speed automatically.
l If one fan reports an alarm, the other fans are adjusted to
run at full speed.
Protection Provides soft-start for the power supply of the fans and
protects fans against overcurrent.
OM features l Reports the information about the fan rotating speed,
alarms, version number, and board in-position status.
l Reports specific alarms when a fan fails or is aged.
l Detects the power supply status of a fan, and reports
specific alarms when the power supplied to a fan fails.
l Reports specific alarms when the FAN board is offline and
stops detecting fan status if the FAN board is offline.
l Supports hot board swapping.

253
The FAN consists of a fan unit, a power unit, and a communication monitoring unit.
Figure 9-2 Functional block diagram of the FAN
Fan unit Power unit
Communication
monitoring unit
System control and
communication unit
Backplane
+12 V
Communication
detection signal
Communication
detection signal
+12 V
+12 V

Power Unit
l Receives +12 V power from the backplane.
l Provides the fan power with soft-start and overcurrent protection functions.
Fan Unit
Six air-cooling fans dissipate the heat generated by the system.
Communication Monitoring Unit
l Detects the manufacturing information, PCB version information, and ambient temperature
of the FAN, and reports the information to the system control and communication unit.
l Detects the fan rotating speed and adjusts the speed according to the pulse-width
modulation signal from the system control and communication unit.
9.2.4 Front Panel
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 9-3 shows the front panel of the FAN.
254
Figure 9-3 Front panel of the FAN
FAN
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
OSN 550
OptiX

Indicators
The front panel of the FAN has the following indicators: FAN, CRIT, MAJ, and MIN. For status
NOTE
The CRIT, MAJ, or MIN indicator on the front panel of the FAN indicates the current alarm severity of the
subrack.
ESD Wrist Strap Jack
An ESD wrist strap needs to be connected to the ESD wrist strap jack to achieve the proper
grounding of the human body.
Labels
The front panel of the FAN has the following labels:
l ESD protection label: indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive.
l Fan warning label: warns you not to touch fan leaves before the fan stops.
9.2.5 Valid Slots
The FAN can be inserted in slot 93 in the chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS is
the same as its physical slot.
255
This section describes the board specifications, including dimensions, weight, and power
consumption.
Table 9-12 lists the technical specifications of the FAN.
Table 9-12 Technical specifications of the FAN
Item Performance
Weight 0.30 kg
256
10 Power Boards
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN 550 supports the power boards PIU and APIU.
10.1 UPM
The uninterruptible power module (UPM) consists of a power box and storage batteries. It
provides access to 110 V/220 V AC mains power supplies.
10.2 PIU
The PIU is a power interface board. The OptiX OSN 550 supports two PIUs, each of which
receives one -48 V/-60 V DC power supply.
10.3 APIU
The APIU is an AC power interface board and supplies 100 V to 240 V AC power to the
equipment.
Hardware Description 10 Power Boards
257
10.1 UPM
The uninterruptible power module (UPM) consists of a power box and storage batteries. It
provides access to 110 V/220 V AC mains power supplies.
None.
NOTE
The management module of the UPM is the CAU. On the U2000, you only need to configure the CAU.
The UPM is an external uninterruptible power module. The UPM can directly convert 110 V/
220 V AC mains power into -48 V DC power required by the transmission equipment. The UPM
is suitable for the telecom carriers who cannot provide -48 V DC power supply or requires
batteries.
The UPM power system consists of the GIE4805S power system (converting the 110 V/220 V
power into the 48 V power) and storage batteries. The output power of a single GIE4805S
power system is 340 W. The GIE4805S power system is 1U high. Figure 10-1 shows the
appearance of the GIE4805S power system. The storage batteries of the UPM work with two
GIE4805S power systems. When the external AC power system supplies power normally, the
batteries store power. When the 110 V/220 V AC power supply is interrupted, the batteries can
supply power for 3 to 4 hours.
Figure 10-1 Appearance of the GIE4805S power system
G
IE
4
8
0
5
S

Table 10-1 provide the functions and features of the UPM.
258
Table 10-1 Functions and features of the GIE4805S power system
Function
and
Feature
GIE4805S
Dual hot
backup
function
The power conversion part of the UPM adopts the hot backup design by using
two AC/DC rectifier modules. The two rectifier modules can work
simultaneously and share the load. If one rectifier module fails, the other
rectifier module immediately bears all the load. In this case, the services
running on the equipment are not affected, which improves the stability of the
system.
Hot-
swappable
function
The AC/DC rectifier module of the UPM is hot-swappable. When you replace
a faulty rectifier module, the other rectifier module can still work normally.
Therefore, the maintainability of the system is improved.
Storage
battery
protection
function
The UPM provides the storage battery protection function. When the mains
supply is interrupted, the power system of the equipment automatically
switches to the storage battery, which ensures that the equipment operates
normally. If the storage battery uses the 38AH module, it can supply power
for three to four hours.
Monitoring
function
The UPM provides the monitoring module and the NM monitoring function.
The monitoring module monitors and controls the rectifier module, AC power
distribution, DC power distribution, and parameters and status of the battery
group in real time. The monitoring module also reports the collected
information to the transmission NMS in real time. The storage battery realizes
float charging and current limiting.
Loading
capacity
The loading capability of each rectifier module is 270 W.

The UPM is fed by one 110 V/220 V AC mains power supply. The rectifier module converts
the input power into -48 V DC voltage to provide two DC branches and one battery branch
The UPM consists of the rectifier module and the monitoring module. Figure 10-2 shows the
block diagram of the UPM.
Figure 10-2 UPM function block diagram
Monitoring
module
Rectifier
module
PIU
System control unit
48 V DC 110 V/220 V AC
259

Rectifier Module
The rectifier module converts the 110 V/220 V AC mains power supply into -48 V DC voltage
required by the transmission equipment.
Monitoring Module
When the UPM works normally, the monitoring module controls the rectifier module, storage
battery loop, and load loop, which work according to the preset parameters or user settings. The
monitoring module also monitors the status and data of the rectifier module, storage battery loop,
and load loop.
In the case of a mains supply failure, the equipment is fed by the storage battery group that is
connected to the UPM. The battery group must be connected to the UPM before the mains supply
fails. When the batteries start to discharge due to a mains supply failure, the monitoring module
reports the no-mains-supply alarm. With the discharge of the batteries, the battery voltage starts
to drop. When the battery voltage is lower than 45 V, the monitoring module reports the DC
undervoltage alarm. When the battery voltage reaches 43 V, the battery group enables the power-
off protection function to interrupt the connection between the battery group and the equipment.
As a result, the batteries are automatically protected.
When the mains supply is restored, the UPM resumes normal operations.
10.1.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the UPM has indicators and interfaces of many types.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 10-3 shows the rear view of the GIE4805S power system (subject to the UPM on site).
Figure 10-3 Front panel of the GIE4805S
AC100~240 ALM RUN
RS232
1 3 2
ALM Vout ALM Vout
4
5 6
BAT-
BAT+
48V+
48V-
LOAD1 LOAD2
CAUTION !
DO NOT INVERT POLARITY

BAT
1. AC input
2. Rectifier module/Air outlet 3. Communication interface
4. Battery interface 5. Load 6. Load
260

Indicators
The front panel of the rectifier module on the left of the UPM has the following indicators:
l Fault indicator (ALM) one color (red)
l Output state indicator (Vout) one color (green)
The front panel of the monitoring module on the top panel of the UPM has the following
indicators:
l Power supply system fault indicator (ALM) one color (red)
l Power supply system status indicator (RUN) one color (green)
For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
The front panel of the GIE4805S has four interfaces. Table 10-2 describes the types and usage
of the interfaces of the GIE4805S.
Table 10-2 Interfaces of the GIE4805S power system
Interface Type of
Interface
Usage
AC100240 Power
interface
It is the AC mains input socket for accessing 110 V/220 V
AC power.
Red on/off
button
Button It is on the right side of the front panel of the rectifier
module. You can enable or disable the rectifier module by
pressing the button.
RS-232
communicatio
n interface
RS-232 The UPM communicates with the SCC through this
interface so that the UPM can report alarms to the SCC
and the SCC can control the UPM remotely.
The RS-232 serial port of power system is connected to
the NMS/COM interface of the OptiX OSN equipment to
enable the NMS to monitor the battery group and the
connected power system.
Power output
interface
Power
interface
Three power output interfaces are on the rightmost side of
the power system. The interface at the top is the battery
interface, through which the power system is connected to
the battery input socket at the back of the storage battery
box through a battery cable. The other two interfaces are
the load interfaces and can supply power to the OptiX OSN
equipment by using power cables.

Table 10-3 provides the pin assignments of the RS-232 serial port.
261
Table 10-3 Pin assignments of the RS-232 serial port
Description Pin Status
Pin for receiving data 2 Receives data.
Pin for transmitting data 3 Transmits data.
Pin for common grounding 5 Grounding
There is an alarm indicating that the
rectifier module is faulty.
89 Short-circuited
The rectifier module is normal. 89 Open
There is an alarm indicating that the AC
input fails.
87 Short-circuited
The AC input is normal. 87 Open
There is an undervoltage alarm on battery
discharging.
86 Short-circuited
There is no alarm on battery discharging. 86 Open

10.1.5 Valid Slots
The UPM is case shaped. Hence, the UPM does not occupy a slot in the subrack. The logical
slot of the UPM on the NMS is slot 97.
NOTE
When two system control boards are configured for mutual backup, the UPM management port can be
connected to only the NMS/COM port on the system control board in slot 7.
The technical specifications of the UPM include the power parameters and mechanical
specifications.
Table 10-4 lists the technical specifications of the UPM.
Table 10-4 Technical specifications of the UPM
Item Value
Power parameters See Table 10-5.
Dimensi
ons (H x
W x D)
Power
box
44 mm x 438 mm x 240 mm
Storage
battery
170 mm x 197 mm x 165 mm
Weight < 10 kg
262

Table 10-5 Power parameters for the GIE4805S
Parameter Value
Voltage range of the AC input 90264 V AC
AC input One single-phase three-wire system: 47-63 Hz
Rated input current 3.5 A
Output nominal voltage 54.00.5 V
Rated output current 8 A (two load outputs with each current not more than 5
A)
Number of backup battery groups One (38 Ah)
Charging current of the backup
battery
3 A
Fuse of the backup battery 10 A
Storage battery: DC undercurrent
point
460.5 V
Storage battery: final voltage
point
43.50.5 V
Storage battery: floating charge
voltage
54.00.5 V
Regulated voltage precision 1%
Non-balance of load sharing 5% (50%100% load)
Rated efficiency of the integrated
equipment
80%
Peak-to-peak noise voltage 200 mV
DC voltage drop within the shield
(20C)
500 mV
Electrical network adjustment
rate
0.1%

10.2 PIU
The PIU is a power interface board. The OptiX OSN 550 supports two PIUs, each of which
receives one -48 V/-60 V DC power supply.
263
The functional version of the PIU is TND1.
The PIU supports power access, power protection, surge protection status monitoring, and
information reporting.
Table 10-6 lists the functions and features that the PIU supports.
Table 10-6 Functions and features that the PIU supports
Basic functions Power access Two PIUs are provided and each receives one -48 V
DC or -60 V DC power input.
Maximum
power supply
capability
The maximum power supply capability of each input is
550 W.
Maximum
current
15 A
Power output The PIU provides other boards with -48 V power.
Protection Protection mode Two power input ports form 1+1 HSB.
Power
protection
l Protection against overcurrent
l Protection against short circuits
Surge
protection
Supported
Detection functions l Input power detection
l Surge protection status detection
l Temperature detection
l Detection of input overvoltage, input undervoltage,
and output overvoltage
Maintenance features Hot board swapping

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the PIU.
264
Figure 10-4 Functional block diagram of the PIU
-48 V/-60 V
System control and
Backpl ane
-48 V
+3.3 V
Detecti on
si gnal Detecti on si gnal
Protecti on and
detecti onuni t
EMI fi l teri ng
uni t
Communi cati on
control uni t
Board operati ng i n di stri buted
power suppl y mode

Protection and Detection Unit
The protection and detection unit primarily protects and detects the PIU. It performs the
following functions:
l Provides protection against lightning strike and surge.
l Detects whether the surge-protection circuit fails and reports a surge-protection failure
alarm if there is any.
l Monitors PIU temperature in real time and reports it to the system control and
communication unit through the communication control unit.
EMI Filtering Unit
The EMI filtering unit performs electro-magnetic interference (EMI) filtering.
Communication Control Unit
The communication control unit controls the communication between the system control and
communication unit and the PIU and reports the following information to the system control
and communication unit:
l PIU manufacturing information
l PCB version information
l Surge-protection failure information
l PIU temperature
10.2.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, power ports, and a label on the front panel.
265
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 10-5 Front panel of the PIU
-
4
8
V
-
6
0
V
P
W
R
N
E
G
(
-
)
R
T
N
(
+
)

Indicators
The front panel of the PIU has the following indicator: PWR. For status explanation for the
indicator, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
The PIU receives one power supply. Table 10-7 lists the types of the ports on the PIU and their
respective usage.
Table 10-7 Ports on the PIU
NEG(-) -48 V or -60 V
power input port
2 mm HM power
connector, 2x2 pins
16.2 DC Power Cable
RTN(+) BGND power input
port

Labels
Power caution label: instructs you to read related instructions before performing any power-
related tasks.
266
NOTICE
Do not remove or install a PIU while the equipment is being powered on. That is, turn off all
the power supplies to the PIU before removing or installing it.
10.2.5 Valid Slots
The PIU can be inserted in slots 91 and 92. The logical slots of the PIU on the NMS are the same
as its physical slots.
This section describes the board specifications, including dimensions, weight, power
consumption, and input voltage.
Table 10-8 lists the technical specifications of the PIU.
Table 10-8 Technical specifications of the PIU
Item Performance
Weight 0.12 kg
Input voltage -38.4 V to -72.0 V

10.3 APIU
The APIU is an AC power interface board and supplies 100 V to 240 V AC power to the
equipment.
The functional version of APIU boards is TNF1.
The APIU supports access of 100 V to 240 V AC power and converts it into -53.5 V DC power.
Table 10-9 lists the functions and features that the APIU supports.
267
Table 10-9 Functions and features that the APIU supports
Basic functions Power access One APIU enables access of two 100 V to 240 V AC
power inputs. One APIU supports two power modules:
AC1 and AC2. The two power modules are separately
inserted in two boxes. Both power modules and their
boxes are independently pluggable.
Supply power 200 W
Power output The APIU provides the other boards with -53.5 V
power.
Protection Protection
scheme
1+1 HSB
Power
protection
l Protection against output overvoltage
l Protection against output overcurrent
l Protection against short circuits in output power
l Protection against overtemperature
Surge
protection
Supported
Monitoring functions Input power monitoring
Monitoring of input overvoltage, input undervoltage,
and output overvoltage
Temperature monitoring
Surge protection status monitoring
Maintenance features Hot swapping

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the APIU.
268
Figure 10-6 Functional block diagram of the APIU
System control and
communication unit
Backplane
-53.5 V
+3.3 V
Detection
signal Detection signal
Protection and
detection unit
EMI filtering
unit
Communication
control unit
Board operating in distributed
power supply mode
100~220V

Protection and Detection Unit
The protection and detection unit primarily protects and detects the APIU. It performs the
following functions:
l Provides protection against lightning strike and surge.
l Detects whether the surge-protection circuit fails and reports a surge-protection failure
alarm if there is any.
l Monitors APIU temperature in real time and reports it to the system control and
communication unit through the communication control unit.
EMI Filtering Unit
The EMI filtering unit performs electro-magnetic interference (EMI) filtering.
Communication Control Unit
The communication control unit controls the communication between the system control and
communication unit and the APIU and reports the following information to the system control
and communication unit:
l APIU manufacturing information
l PCB version information
l Surge-protection failure information
l APIU temperature
10.3.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, power ports, and switches on the front panel.
269
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 10-7 Front panel of the APIU
ON
OFF
INPUT
AC1
APIU
ON
OFF
INPUT
OUTPUT
APIU
OUTPUT
100-240V;50/60Hz;3.5A 100-240V;50/60Hz;3.5A
AC2

Indicators
The front panel of the APIU has the INPUT and OUTPUT indicators. For status explanation for
the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
The APIU enables access of two power supplies. Table 10-10 lists the types of the ports on the
APIU and their respective usage.
Table 10-10 Ports on the APIU
~100-240V;
50/60Hz;3.5A
Enables access of
100 V to 240 V AC
power.
Three-phase socket 16.3 AC Power Cable

Labels
Power caution label: instructs you to read related instructions before performing any power-
related tasks.
NOTICE
Do not remove or install a PIU while the equipment is being powered on. That is, turn off all
the power supplies to the PIU before removing or installing it.
Switches
The front panel of the APIU has two ON/OFF switches and they control the two AC power ports.
270
10.3.5 Valid Slots
The APIU can be inserted in two slot pairs: slots 2 and 4 and slots 4 and 6. Slots 4 and 6 are
recommended.
This section describes the board specifications, including dimensions, weight, power
consumption, and input voltage.
Table 10-11 lists the technical specifications of the APIU.
Table 10-11 Technical specifications of the APIU
Item Performance
Weight 1.93 kg
Input voltage 100 V to 240 V AC power
Output voltage -53.5 V DC power
271
11 Outdoor Cabinet
The equipment operating outdoors needs to be installed in an outdoor cabinet.
Appearance and Structure
Figure 11-1 shows the appearance of an APM30H outdoor cabinet. Figure 11-2 shows the
structure of an APM30H outdoor cabinet.
Figure 11-1 Appearance of an APM30H outdoor cabinet
Hardware Description 11 Outdoor Cabinet
272
Figure 11-2 Structure of an APM30H outdoor cabinet
1
2
3 4
5
6
7
1. Cable distribution box 2. PMU module 3. HPMI board 4. Fan board (for internal
circulation)
5. CMUA board 6. PSU module 7. EPS subrack
Technical and Ambient Specifications
Table 11-1 lists the technical and ambient specifications of APM30H outdoor cabinets.
Table 11-1 Technical and ambient specifications of APM30H outdoor cabinets
Item Specification Remarks
Dimensions (H x W x D) 700 mm x 600 mm x 480 mm -
Weight 72 kg -
Heat consumption 700 W -
Operating temperature -40C to +50C. The solar
radiant intensity is 1120
10% W/m
2
.
If the ambient temperature is
below -20C, a heater is
required.
NOTE
The ambient temperature in the
operating environment where a
heater is required refers to the
average of the lowest
temperature every day in the
annually coldest month in the
local place.
Relative humidity 5% RH to 100% RH -
273
Item Specification Remarks
Altitude -60 m to 4000 m After the altitude reaches
3000 m, the highest operating
temperature decreases by 1
C as the altitude increases by
100 m.
Wind speed 67 m/s -
Storage temperature -40C to +70C -
Dust resistance and water
resistance
In compliance with IP55
rating protection
-
Acoustic power In compliance with ETS 300
753 4.1E
-
274
12 Filler Panel
About This Chapter
Filler panels are used to cover vacant slots of a chassis.
12.1 Functions
A filler panel performs electromagnetic shielding for a chassis, prevents foreign objects from
entering a chassis, and ensures proper circulating of cooling air in a chassis.
12.2 Appearance and Valid Slots
This section describes the front panel of and slots valid for a filler panel. The OptiX OSN 550
supports three types of filler panels with different dimensions: filler panel for the PCX and
extended boards, filler panel for the PIU, and filler panel for the APIU.
Hardware Description 12 Filler Panel
275
12.1 Functions
A filler panel performs electromagnetic shielding for a chassis, prevents foreign objects from
entering a chassis, and ensures proper circulating of cooling air in a chassis.
A filler panel provides the following functions:
l Performs electromagnetic shielding for a chassis.
l Prevents foreign objects from entering a chassis.
l Prevents the exposure of internal voltage.
l Ensures proper circulating of cooling air in a chassis.
12.2 Appearance and Valid Slots
This section describes the front panel of and slots valid for a filler panel. The OptiX OSN 550
supports three types of filler panels with different dimensions: filler panel for the PCX and
extended boards, filler panel for the PIU, and filler panel for the APIU.
Appearance
Figure 12-1 Filler panel for the PCX and extended boards
Figure 12-2 Filler panel for the PIU
276
Figure 12-3 Filler panel for the APIU
Valid Slots
Table 12-1 lists the slots valid for a filler panel.
Table 12-1 Slots valid for a filler panel
Type of Filler Panel Valid Slot
Filler panel for the PCX and
extended boards
Slots 1-8
Filler panel for the PIU Slots 91 and 92
Filler panel for the APIU Slots 2 and 4, slots 4 and 6
277
13 Optical Attenuators
Optical attenuators are classified into fixed optical attenuators and mechanical variable optical
attenuators (VOAs).
Fixed Optical Attenuators
A fixed optical attenuator can reduce optical power on an optical path by a fixed value. Fixed
optical attenuators are commonly available in the following attenuation amounts: 2 dB, 5 dB, 7
dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB.
Figure 13-1 shows the appearance of a fixed optical attenuator.
Figure 13-1 Appearance of a fixed optical attenuator

Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuators
A mechanical VOA can adjust optical power on an optical path within a permitted range. The
attenuation adjustment of a VOA ranges from 2 dB to 30 dB.
Figure 13-2 shows the appearance of a common VOA.
Hardware Description 13 Optical Attenuators
278
Figure 13-2 Appearance of a VOA

Hardware Description 13 Optical Attenuators
279
14 Pluggable Optical Modules
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the pluggable optical modules that the OptiX OSN 550 supports. For a
board on which pluggable optical modules are installed, if applicable service categories need to
be changed or faulty optical modules need to be replaced, you need to replace only the optical
modules instead of the board.
14.1 Overview
The following pluggable optical modules are supported: small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
module, enhanced small form-factor pluggable (eSFP) module, 10 Gbit/s small form-factor
pluggable (XFP) module, and coarse/dense wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM/
DWDM) module.
14.2 SFP/eSFP Optical/Electrical Modules
This section lists the SFP/eSFP optical modules that the OptiX OSN 550 supports. SFP/eSFP
optical modules are SFP optical transceivers and are used for SDH optical communication and
Ethernet data communication.
14.3 XFP Optical Modules
This section lists the XFP optical modules that the OptiX OSN 550 supports. XFP optical
modules are 10GE SFP optical transceivers. They are used for 10GE Ethernet data
communication.
14.4 CWDM/DWDM
This topic describes the CWDM/DWDM optical modules of the OptiX OSN 550.
Hardware Description 14 Pluggable Optical Modules
280
14.1 Overview
The following pluggable optical modules are supported: small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
module, enhanced small form-factor pluggable (eSFP) module, 10 Gbit/s small form-factor
pluggable (XFP) module, and coarse/dense wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM/
DWDM) module.
Appearance
Figure 14-1 shows the appearances of an SFP/eSFP optical module, and Figure 14-2 shows the
appearance of an XFP optical module.
Figure 14-1 SFP/eSFP optical module

Dimensions (H x W x D): 8.5 mm x 13.4 mm x 56.5 mm
Figure 14-2 XFP optical module

281
Dimensions (H x W x D): 8.5 mm x 18.3 mm x 78 mm
Part Number
Part numbers identify different types of optical modules and are contained in labels. Labels are
attached to pluggable optical modules, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 14-3 shows a label for a pluggable optical module.
Figure 14-3 Label for a pluggable optical module
NOTE
You can obtain the specifications of an optical module by querying its part number in this document.

14.2 SFP/eSFP Optical/Electrical Modules
This section lists the SFP/eSFP optical modules that the OptiX OSN 550 supports. SFP/eSFP
optical modules are SFP optical transceivers and are used for SDH optical communication and
Ethernet data communication.
Two-Fiber Bidirectional SFP/eSFP Optical Modules
Table 14-1 Two-fiber bidirectional SFP/eSFP optical modules
Part Number Name Specifications Applicable Board
34060286 2.125 Gbit/s eSFP
optical module
Optical transceiver,
eSFP, 850 nm, 2.125
Gbit/s (multirate),
-9.5 dBm, -2.5 dBm,
-17 dBm, LC, MM,
0.5 km
EM6F/PCXLG/
PCXGA/PCXGB/
EG4C/EGS4/EGT1
34060473 1.25 Gbit/s eSFP
optical module
eSFP, 1310 nm, 1.25
Gbit/s, -9 dBm, -3
dBm, -20 dBm, LC,
SM, 10 km
EM6F/PCXLG/
PCXGA/PCXGB/
EG4C/EGS4/EGT1
34060298 Optical transceiver,
eSFP, 1310 nm, 1.25
Gbit/s, -5 dBm, 0
dBm, -23 dBm, LC,
SM, 40 km
EM6F/PCXLG/
PCXGA/PCXGB/
EG4C/EGS4/EGT1
282
eSFP, 1550 nm, 1.25
Gbit/s, -2 dBm, 5
dBm, -23 dBm, LC,
SM, 80 km
EM6F/PCXLG/
PCXGA/PCXGB/
EG4C/EGS4/EGT1
eSFP, 1310 nm, 1.25
Gbit/s, -9.5 dBm, -3
dBm, -20 dBm, LC
(-40 to +85), SM, 10
km
EM6F/PCXGA/
PCXGB/EG4C/
EGS4
eSFP, 1550 nm, 1.25
Gbit/s, -5 dBm, 0
dBm, -22 dBm, LC
(-40 to +85), SM, 40
km
eSFP, 1550 nm, 1.25
Gbit/s, -2 dBm, 5
dBm, -24 dBm, LC
(-40 to +85), SM, 80
km
34060287 155 Mbit/s SFP
optical module
SFP, 1310 nm,
STM-1, -15 dBm, -8
dBm, -31 dBm, LC,
MM, 2 km
EM6F/EF8F/EG4C/
EGS4
34060276 155 Mbit/s eSFP
optical module
eSFP, 1310 nm,
STM-1, -15 dBm, -8
dBm, -31 dBm, LC,
SM, 15 km
EM6F/PCXLX/
PCXLG/EF8F/
EG4C/SL1D/SL1Q/
CXL/CQ1/EGS4
eSFP, 1310 nm,
STM-1, -5 dBm, 0
dBm, -37 dBm, LC,
SM, 40 km
EM6F/PCXLX/
PCXLG/EF8F/
EG4C/SL1D/SL1Q/
CXL/CQ1/EGS4
eSFP, 1550 nm,
STM-1, -5 dBm, 0
dBm, -37 dBm, LC,
SM, 80 km
EM6F/PCXLX/
PCXLG/EF8F/
EG4C/SL1D/SL1Q/
CXL/CQ1/EGS4
283
eSFP (industry),
1310 nm, STM-1,
-15 dBm, -8 dBm,
-31 dBm, LC, SM, 15
km
EM6F/EF8F/EG4C/
CQ1/EGS4
eSFP (industry),
1310 nm, STM-1, -5
dBm, 0 dBm, -37
dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
EM6F/EF8F/EG4C/
CQ1/EGS4
eSFP (industry),
1550 nm, STM-1, -5
dBm, 0 dBm, -37
dBm, LC, SM, 80 km
EM6F/EF8F/EG4C/
CQ1/EGS4
34060277 622 Mbit/s eSFP
optical module
eSFP, 1310 nm,
STM-4, -15 dBm, -8
dBm, -30 dBm, LC,
SM, 15 km
PCXLX/PCXLG/
CXL/SL4D
eSFP, 1310 nm,
STM-4, -3 dBm, 2
dBm, -30 dBm, LC,
SM, 40 km
eSFP, 1550 nm,
STM-4, -3 dBm, 2
dBm, -30 dBm, LC,
SM, 80 km
34060485 2.5 Gbit/s eSFP
optical module
eSFP, 1310 nm, 155
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s,
-5 dBm, 0 dBm, -21
dBm, LC, SM, 15 km
PCXLX/PCXLG/
CXL
eSFP, 1310 nm,
STM-16, -2 dBm, 3
dBm, -29 dBm, LC,
SM, 40 km
PCXLX/PCXLG/
CXL
284
eSFP, 1550 nm,
STM-16, -2 dBm, 3
dBm, -30 dBm, LC,
SM, 80 km
PCXLX/PCXLG/
CXL

Single-Fiber Bidirectional SFP/eSFP Optical Modules
Table 14-2 Single-fiber bidirectional SFP/eSFP optical modules
34060470 1.25 Gbit/s single-
fiber bidirectional
eSFP optical module
eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/
Rx 1490 nm, 1.25
Gbit/s, -9 dBm, -3
dBm, -19.5 dBm,
LC, SM, 10 km
This module can
function as a GE
optical port when
installed on the
EM6F/PCXLG/
PCXGA/PCXGB/
EGT1/EG4C/EGS4
boards.
This module can
function as an
STM-4 optical port
when installed on the
PCXLG/PCXLX/
CXL/SL4D boards.
NOTE
This module can
function as a GE
optical port or an
STM-4 optical port.
eSFP, Tx 1490 nm/
Rx 1310 nm, 1.25
Gbit/s, -9 dBm, -3
dBm, -19.5 dBm,
LC, SM, 10 km
eSFP, 1310 nm (Tx)/
1490 nm (Rx), 1.25
Gbit/s, -2 dBm, 3
dBm, -23 dBm, LC,
SM, 40 km
This module can
function as a GE
optical port when
installed on the
EM6F/PCXLG/
PCXGA/PCXGB/
EGT1/EG4C/EGS4
boards.
This module can
function as an
STM-4 optical port
PCXLG/PCXLX/
CXL/SL4D boards.
285
eSFP, 1490 nm (Tx)/
1310 nm (Rx), 1.25
Gbit/s, -2 dBm, 3
dBm, -23 dBm, LC,
SM, 40 km
NOTE
This module can
function as a GE
optical port or an
STM-4 optical port.
34060363 155 Mbit/s single-
fiber bidirectional
eSFP optical module
eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/
Rx 1550 nm, STM-1,
-15 dBm, -8 dBm,
-32 dBm, LC/PC,
SM, 15 km
This module can
function as an FE
optical port when
installed on the
EM6F/EF8F/EG4C/
EGS4 boards.
This module can
function as an
STM-1 optical port
PCXLG/PCXLX/
CXL/SL1D/SL1Q/
CQ1 boards.
NOTE
This module can
function as an FE
optical port or an
STM-1 optical port.
eSFP, Tx 1550 nm/
Rx 1310 nm, STM-1,
-15 dBm, -8 dBm,
-32 dBm, LC/PC,
SM, 15 km
eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/
Rx 1550 nm, STM-1,
-5 dBm, 0 dBm, -32
dBm, LC/PC, SM, 40
km
This module can
function as an FE
optical port when
installed on the
EM6F/EF8F/EG4C/
EGS4 boards.
This module can
function as an
STM-1 optical port
PCXLG/PCXLX/
CXL/SL1D/SL1Q/
CQ1 boards.
NOTE
This module can
function as an FE
optical port or an
STM-1 optical port.
eSFP, Tx 1550 nm/
Rx 1310 nm, STM-1,
-5 dBm, 0 dBm, -32
dBm, LC/PC, SM, 40
km
286

NOTE
l Optical module specifications are explained as follows in sequence: name, encapsulation form,
operating wavelength, rate, minimum output optical power, maximum output optical power, receiver
sensitivity, optical port type, optical fiber type, and transmission distance.
l Optical module specifications may be updated in various product versions. Contact local Huawei
offices for latest optical module specifications.
14.3 XFP Optical Modules
This section lists the XFP optical modules that the OptiX OSN 550 supports. XFP optical
modules are 10GE SFP optical transceivers. They are used for 10GE Ethernet data
communication.
Two-Fiber Bidirectional XFP Optical Modules
Table 14-3 Two-fiber bidirectional XFP optical modules
Part Number Name Specification Applicable Board
34060362 9.95 Gbit/s to 10.71
Gbit/s XFP optical
module
XFP, 850 nm, 10.3
Gbit/s, -7.3 dBm,
-1.3 dBm, -7.5 dBm,
LC, MM, 0.3 km
PCXLX/PCXX/EX1
XFP, 1310 nm, 9.95
Gbit/s to 10.71 Gbit/
s, -6 dBm, -1 dBm,
-14.4 dBm, LC, SM,
10 km
PCXLX/PCXX/EX1
34060322 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1
Gbit/s XFP optical
module
XFP, 1550 nm, 9.95
Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s,
-1 dBm, 2 dBm, -15
dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
PCXLX/PCXX/EX1
XFP, 1550 nm, 9.95
Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s,
0 dBm, 4 dBm, -24
dBm, LC, SM, 80 km
PCXLX/PCXX/EX1
287
XFP (industry), 1550
nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
11.1 Gbit/s, +2 dBm,
-1 dBm, -15 dBm,
LC, single-mode, 40
km, -40 to 85 C
PCXX/EX1

Single-Fiber Bidirectional XFP Optical Modules
Table 14-4 Single-fiber bidirectional XFP optical modules
34060780 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.35
Gbit/s XFP optical
module
BiDi transceiver,
XFP, 1330 nm(TX)/
1270 nm(RX), 9.95
s, -5 dBm, 0 dBm,
-14 dBm, LC, G.652,
10 km
PCXLX/PCXX/EX1
34060781 BiDi transceiver,
XFP, 1270 nm(TX)/
1330 nm(RX), 9.95
s, -5 dBm, 0 dBm,
-14 dBm, LC, G.652,
10 km
XFP, 1330 nm(TX)/
1270 nm(RX), 9.95
s, 1 dBm, 5 dBm, -15
dBm, LC, G.652, 40
km
XFP, 1270 nm(TX)/
1330 nm(RX), 9.95
s, 1 dBm, 5 dBm, -15
dBm, LC, G.652, 40
km

288
NOTE
sensitivity, optical interface type, optical fiber type, and transmission distance.
14.4 CWDM/DWDM
This topic describes the CWDM/DWDM optical modules of the OptiX OSN 550.
CWDM Optical Module
Table 14-5 lists the part numbers, names, specifications, and applicable boards of STM-1/
STM-4/STM-16/GE CWDM optical modules.
Table 14-5 STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/GE CWDM optical modules
Part
Number
Name Specifications Applicable Board
34060416 125 Mbit/s to
2.67 Gbit/s
CWDM eSFP
optical module
Optical transceiver, eSFP,
1471 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67
Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, -19
dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
PCXLX/PCXLG/PCXGA/
PCXGB/CXL/EM6F/
EG4C/EGS4
34060417 Optical transceiver, eSFP,
1491 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67
dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
1511 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67
dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
1531 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67
dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
1551 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67
dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
1571 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67
dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
289
Part
Number
1591 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67
dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
1611 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67
dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
34060483 100 Mbit/s to
2.67 Gbit/s
CWDM eSFP
optical module
1471 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67
dBm, LC, 80 km
1491 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67
dBm, LC, 80 km
1511 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67
dBm, LC, 80 km
1531 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67
dBm, LC, 80 km
1551 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67
dBm, LC, 80 km
1571 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67
dBm, LC, 80 km
1591 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67
dBm, LC, 80 km
1611 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67
dBm, LC, 80 km

290
Table 14-6 lists the part numbers, names, specifications, and applicable boards of 10 Gbit/s
CWDM optical modules.
Table 14-6 10 Gbit/s CWDM optical modules
Part
Number
34060547 9.95 Gbit/s to
11.1 Gbit/s
CWDM XFP
optical module
Optical transceiver, XFP,
1471 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1
dBm, LC, SM, 70 km
PCXX/PCXLX/EX1
34060548 Optical transceiver, XFP,
1491 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1
dBm, LC, SM, 70 km
1511 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1
dBm, LC, SM, 70 km
1531 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1
dBm, LC, SM, 70 km
1551 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1
dBm, LC, SM, 70 km
1571 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1
dBm, LC, SM, 70 km
1591 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1
dBm, LC, SM, 70 km
1611 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1
dBm, LC, SM, 70 km

DWDM Optical Module
Table 14-7 lists the part numbers, names, specifications, and applicable boards of STM-16
DWDM optical modules.
291
Table 14-7 STM-16 DWDM optical modules
Part
Number
34060366 125 Mbit/s to
2.67 Gbit/s
DWDM eSFP
optical module
1560.61 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm,
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
PCXLX/PCXLG/CXL
1559.79 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1558.98 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1558.17 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1557.36 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1556.55 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1555.75 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1554.94 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1554.13 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1553.33 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
292
Part
Number
1552.52 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1551.72 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1550.92 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1550.12 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1549.32 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1548.51 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1547.72 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1546.92 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1546.12 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1545.32 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
293
Part
Number
1544.53 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1543.73 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1542.94 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1542.14 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1541.35 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1540.56 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1539.77 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1538.98 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1538.19 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1537.40 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
294
Part
Number
1536.61 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1535.82 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1535.04 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1534.25 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1533.47 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1532.68 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1531.90 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1531.12 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1530.33 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km
1529.55 nm, 125 Mbit/s to
-28 dBm, LC, 120 km

295
Table 14-8 lists the part numbers, names, specifications, and applicable boards of 10 Gbit/s
DWDM optical modules.
Table 14-8 10 Gbit/s DWDM optical modules
Part
Number
03030LRD 10.71 Gbit/s
DWDM XFP
optical module
Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 192.10
THz, LC/PC
PCXX/PCXLX/EX1
03030LRF Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 192.20
THz, LC/PC
03030LRG Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 192.30
THz, LC/PC
03030LRH Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 192.40
THz, LC/PC
03030LRJ Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 192.50
THz, LC/PC
03030LRK Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 192.60
THz, LC/PC
03030LRL Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 192.70
THz, LC/PC
03030LRM Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 192.80
THz, LC/PC
03030LRN Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 192.90
THz, LC/PC
296
Part
Number
03030LRP Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 193.00
THz, LC/PC
03030LRQ Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 193.10
THz, LC/PC
03030LRR Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 193.20
THz, LC/PC
03030LRS Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 193.30
THz, LC/PC
03030LRT Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 193.40
THz, LC/PC
03030LRU Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 193.50
THz, LC/PC
03030LRV Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 193.60
THz, LC/PC
03030LRW Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 193.70
THz, LC/PC
03030LRX Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 193.80
THz, LC/PC
03030LRY Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 193.90
THz, LC/PC
297
Part
Number
03030LSA Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 194.00
THz, LC/PC
03030LSB Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 194.10
THz, LC/PC
03030LSC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 194.20
THz, LC/PC
03030LSD Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 194.30
THz, LC/PC
03030LSE Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 194.40
THz, LC/PC
03030LSF Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 194.50
THz, LC/PC
03030LSG Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 194.60
THz, LC/PC
03030LSH Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 194.70
THz, LC/PC
03030LSJ Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 194.80
THz, LC/PC
03030LSK Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 194.90
THz, LC/PC
298
Part
Number
03030LSL Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 195.00
THz, LC/PC
03030LSM Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 195.10
THz, LC/PC
03030LSN Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 195.20
THz, LC/PC
03030LSP Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 195.30
THz, LC/PC
03030LSQ Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm,
195.40THz, LC/PC
03030LSR Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 195.50
THz, LC/PC
03030LSS Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 195.60
THz, LC/PC
03030LST Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 195.70
THz, LC/PC
03030LSU Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 195.80
THz, LC/PC
03030LSV Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 195.90
THz, LC/PC
299
Part
Number
03030LSW Optical transceiver, 19 dBm
to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/
nm, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, 196.00
THz, LC/PC
34060501 9.95 Gbit/s to
11.1 Gbit/s
DWDM XFP
optical module
Optical transceiver, XFP,
1550.92 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
-24 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km
PCXX/PCXLX/EX1
1550.12 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
1531.90 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
1531.12 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
1549.32 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
1530.33 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
1548.51 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
1529.55 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
1551.72 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
300
Part
Number
1532.68 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
1554.13 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
1553.33 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
1552.52 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
1535.04 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
1534.25 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to
1533.47 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to

NOTE
sensitivity, optical interface type, optical fiber type, and transmission distance.
301
15 Pluggable electrical Modules
This chapter describes the pluggable electrical modules that the OptiX OSN 550 supports. For
a board on which pluggable electrical modules are installed, if applicable service categories need
to be changed or faulty electrical modules need to be replaced, you need to replace only the
electrical modules instead of the board.
Appearance
Figure 15-1 GE SFP electrical module

Hardware Description 15 Pluggable electrical Modules
302
Figure 15-2 STM-1 SFP electrical module

SFP Electrical Modules
Table 15-1 SFP electrical modules
34100052 1000BASE-T RJ45
SFP electrical
module
1000BASE-T
(RJ45) SFP
electrical module,
auto-negotiation,
100 m
EM6F/EGS4/EGT1
34100104 STM-1 SFP
electrical module
Electrical active
module-copper
transceiver, SFP,
STM-1e
SL1D/SL1Q/CXL/
CQ1

NOTE
Optical/Electrical module specifications may be updated in various product versions. Contact local Huawei
offices for the latest optical module specifications.
Hardware Description 15 Pluggable electrical Modules
303
16 Cables
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the cables used on the equipment.
16.1 Fiber Jumper
A fiber jumper has one connector at each end.
16.2 DC Power Cable
A DC power cable connects the PIU board in the chassis to a power supply device for access of
power to the chassis.
16.3 AC Power Cable
An AC power cable connects the APIU board in the chassis to a power supply device for access
of AC power to the chassis.
16.4 UPM Power Cable
This section describes the structure, pin assignments, and technical specifications of UPM power
cables.
16.5 PGND Cable
A PGND cable connects the grounding point of an OptiX OSN 550 chassis to the grounding
point of external equipment so that the chassis and external equipment share the same ground.
16.6 STM-1 Cable
An STM-1 cable transmits/receives STM-1 signals. One end of the STM-1 cable has an SAA
connector that is connected to an STM-1 electrical port. The connector at the other end of the
STM-1 cable is connected to a DDF and needs to be prepared on site as required.
16.7 16xE1/T1 Cable
An 16xE1/T1 cable uses Anea 96 connectors and can transmit a maximum of 16 E1/T1 signals.
16.8 21xE1/T1 Cable
16.9 E3/T3 Cable
An E3/T3 cable receives/transmits E3/T3 signals. One end of the E3/T3 cable has an SMB
connector that is connected to an E3/T3 electrical interface board. The other end of the E3/T3
cable is connected to a DDF and its connector needs to be prepared on site as required.
Hardware Description 16 Cables
304
16.10 Network Cable
A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are
terminated with an RJ45 connector.
305
16.1 Fiber Jumper
A fiber jumper has one connector at each end.
A fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper has an LC/PC connector
that is connected to an optical port on the OptiX OSN 550. The connector at the other end of the
fiber jumper varies depending on the type of the interconnected optical port.
Types of Fiber Jumpers
Table 16-1 Types of fiber jumpers
Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable
LC/PC FC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber
2 mm multi-mode fiber
LC/PC LC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber
2 mm multi-mode fiber

Fiber Connectors
The following figures show two common types of fiber connectors: LC/PC connector and FC/
PC connector.
Figure 16-1 LC/PC connector
LC/PC
connector
Protective cap

306
Figure 16-2 FC/PC connector
Protective cap
FC/PC connector

16.2 DC Power Cable
A DC power cable connects the PIU board in the chassis to a power supply device for access of
power to the chassis.
Cable Diagram
Figure 16-3 DC power cable

307
Table 16-2 Power cable specifications
Model Cable Terminal
4 mm
2
power
cable and
terminal
Power cable, 450 V/
750 V, H07Z-K, 4
mm
2
, blue/black, low
smoke zero halogen
cable
Bare crimping terminal, single cord end terminal,
4 mm
2
, 20 A, insertion depth of 10 mm, grey

NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 550, power cables with a 4 mm
2
cross-sectional area can extend for a maximum distance
of 35m meters.
16.3 AC Power Cable
An AC power cable connects the APIU board in the chassis to a power supply device for access
of AC power to the chassis.
Cable Diagram
Figure 16-4 AC power cable

Specifications of an AC power cable connector used on the OptiX OSN 550: C13, straight,
female
16.4 UPM Power Cable
This section describes the structure, pin assignments, and technical specifications of UPM power
cables.
308
Cable Diagram
Figure 16-5 UPM power cable
L
Label 1
Label 2
W1
W2
Main label
1
2
X2
X3
A
X1

Pin Assignments
Table 16-3 Pin assignments of UPM power cables
Cable
Connectors
X2 and X3
Correspondi
ng Cable
Cable Connector
X1
Core Color
X2 W1 1 Blue (-48 V/-60 V power)
X3 W2 2 Black (power ground)

Table 16-4 Technical specifications of UPM power cables
Item Description
Cable connector
X1
Bare crimp terminal, single core end terminal, 2.5 mm
2
Cable connector
X2
Common connector, 2-pin, single row
Cab
le
Model Power cable, 600 V, UL1015, 16 AWG, blue
Power cable, 600 V, UL1015, 16 AWG, black
Number
of cores
1
Fireproof
class
VW-1
Color Blue and black
309
Item Description
Length 1.8 meters

16.5 PGND Cable
A PGND cable connects the grounding point of an OptiX OSN 550 chassis to the grounding
point of external equipment so that the chassis and external equipment share the same ground.
Cable Diagram
Figure 16-6 PGND cable
2
Mai n l abel
H.S.tube Cabl e ti e 1
L
1. Bare crimping terminal, OT 2. Bare crimping terminal, OT

16.6 STM-1 Cable
An STM-1 cable transmits/receives STM-1 signals. One end of the STM-1 cable has an SAA
connector that is connected to an STM-1 electrical port. The connector at the other end of the
STM-1 cable is connected to a DDF and needs to be prepared on site as required.
310
Cable Diagram
Figure 16-7 STM-1 cable
1. Coaxial connector, SAA straight/male 2. Main label 3. Coaxial cable

Pin Assignments
None.
Item Description
Connector Coaxial connector, SAA connector (1.0/2.3), 75-ohm straight/male
Cable model Coaxial cable, 75-ohm, 3.9 mm, 2.1 mm, 0.34 mm, shielded
Number of cores One
Core diameter Diameter of the shield layer (3.9 mm), diameter of the internal
insulation layer (2.1 mm), diameter of the internal conductor (0.34
mm)
Length 10 m
Fireproof class CM

16.7 16xE1/T1 Cable
There are two types of 16xE1/T1 cables: 75-ohm coaxial cables and 120-ohm twisted pair cables.
NOTE
A 75-ohm E1 cable and a 120-ohm E1 cable have the same appearance.
The core diameter of a 75-ohm E1/T1 cable is 1.6 mm. Therefore, use a crimping tool with an opening of
2.5 mm or 1.7 mm to attach the end of the 75-ohm E1/T1 cable on the DDF frame with a 75-1-1 coaxial
connector.
311
Cable Diagram
Figure 16-8 75-ohm/120-ohm 16xE1/T1 cable
Mai n l abel
1
W
X1
A
Vi ew A
Pos.1
Pos.96
Cabl e connector, Anea,
96-pi n, femal e
1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female

Pin Assignments
Table 16-5 provides details about the pin assignments for a 75-ohm 16xE1/T1 cable.
Table 16-5 Pin assignments for a 75-ohm 16xE1/T1 cable
Pin Cor
e
Seri
al
No.
Lab
el
Pin Cor
e
Seri
al
No.
Lab
el
Pin Cor
e
Seri
al
No.
Lab
el
1 Tip 1 R0 13 Tip 13 R6 49 Tip 25 R12
2 Ring 14 Ring 50 Ring
25 Tip 2 T0 37 Tip 14 T6 73 Tip 26 T12
3 Tip 3 R1 15 Tip 15 R7 51 Tip 27 R13
27 Tip 4 T1 39 Tip 16 T7 75 Tip 28 T13
5 Tip 5 R2 17 Tip 17 R8 53 Tip 29 R14
312
Pin Cor
e
Seri
al
No.
Lab
el
Pin Cor
e
Seri
al
No.
Lab
el
Pin Cor
e
Seri
al
No.
Lab
el
29 Tip 6 T2 41 Tip 18 T8 77 Tip 30 T14
7 Tip 7 R3 19 Tip 19 R9 55 Tip 31 R15
31 Tip 8 T3 43 Tip 20 T9 79 Tip 32 T15
9 Tip 9 R4 21 Tip 21 R10
10 Ring 22 Ring
33 Tip 10 T4 45 Tip 22 T10
34 Ring 46 Ring
11 Tip 11 R5 23 Tip 23 R11
12 Ring 24 Ring
35 Tip 12 T5 47 Tip 24 T11
36 Ring 48 Ring

Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
Blu
e
1 Wh
ite
R0 Pai
r
Or
ang
e
15 Wh
ite
R7 Pai
r
Gre
en
53 Wh
ite
R1
4
Pai
r
2 Blu
e
16 Blu
e
54 Blu
e
25 Wh
ite
T0 Pai
r
39 Wh
ite
T7 Pai
r
77 Wh
ite
T1
4
Pai
r
313
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
26 Or
ang
e
40 Or
ang
e
78 Or
ang
e
3 Wh
ite
R1 Pai
r
17 Wh
ite
R8 Pai
r
55 Wh
ite
R1
5
Pai
r
4 Gr
een
18 Gr
een
56 Gr
een
27 Wh
ite
T1 Pai
r
41 Wh
ite
T8 Pai
r
79 Wh
ite
T1
5
Pai
r
28 Br
ow
n
42 Br
ow
n
80 Br
ow
n
5 Wh
ite
R2 Pai
r
19 Wh
ite
R9 Pai
r

6 Gr
ay
20 Gr
ay
29 Re
d
T2 Pai
r
43 Re
d
T9 Pai
r
30 Blu
e
44 Blu
e
7 Re
d
R3 Pai
r
21 Re
d
R1
0
Pai
r
8 Or
ang
e
22 Or
ang
e
31 Re
d
T3 Pai
r
45 Re
d
T1
0
Pai
r
32 Gr
een
46 Gr
een
9 Re
d
R4 Pai
r
23 Re
d
R1
1
Pai
r
10 Br
ow
n
24 Br
ow
n
314
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
33 Re
d
T4 Pai
r
47 Re
d
T1
1
Pai
r
34 Gr
ay
48 Gr
ay
11 Bla
ck
R5 Pai
r
49 Bla
ck
R1
2
Pai
r
12 Blu
e
50 Blu
e
35 Bla
ck
T5 Pai
r
73 Bla
ck
T1
2
Pai
r
36 Or
ang
e
74 Or
ang
e
13 Bla
ck
R6 Pai
r
51 Bla
ck
R1
3
Pai
r
14 Gr
een
52 Gr
een
37 Bla
ck
T6 Pai
r
75 Bla
ck
T1
3
Pai
r
38 Br
ow
n
76 Br
ow
n

Table 16-7 lists the technical specifications for 16xE1/T1 cables used on the OptiX OSN 550.
Table 16-7 Technical specifications for 16xE1/T1 cables used on the OptiX OSN 550
Item Description
Connector type Anea 96
Number of cores 32 cores/pair
Fireproof class IEC60332-3C

315
16.8 21xE1/T1 Cable
There are two types of 21xE1/T1 cables: 75-ohm coaxial cables and 120-ohm twisted pair cables.
NOTE
l A 75-ohm E1 cable and a 120-ohm E1 cable have the same appearance.
l The core diameter of a 75-ohm E1/T1 cable is 1.6 mm. Therefore, use a crimping tool with an opening
of 2.5 mm or 1.7 mm to attach the end of the 75-ohm E1/T1 cable on the DDF frame with a 75-1-1
coaxial connector.
l If a cable with a diameter of 1.6 mm is terminated by a coaxial connector with a diameter of 2.2 mm,
crimp the connector in the orthogonal direction twice.
Cable Diagram
Figure 16-9 75-ohm/120-ohm 21xE1/T1 cable
Mai n l abel
1
W
X1
A
Vi ew A
Pos.1
Pos.96
Cabl e connector, Anea,
96-pi n, femal e
1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female

Pin Assignments
316
Pin Cor
e
Seri
al
No.
Lab
el
Pin Cor
e
Seri
al
No.
Lab
el
Pin Cor
e
Seri
al
No.
Lab
el
1 Tip 1 R0 15 Tip 15 R7 53 Tip 29 R14
25 Tip 2 T0 39 Tip 16 T7 77 Tip 30 T14
3 Tip 3 R1 17 Tip 17 R8 55 Tip 31 R15
27 Tip 4 T1 41 Tip 18 T8 79 Tip 32 T15
5 Tip 5 R2 19 Tip 19 R9 57 Tip 33 R16
29 Tip 6 T2 43 Tip 20 T9 81 Tip 34 T16
7 Tip 7 R3 21 Tip 21 R10 59 Tip 35 R17
31 Tip 8 T3 45 Tip 22 T10 83 Tip 36 T17
9 Tip 9 R4 23 Tip 23 R11 61 Tip 37 R18
33 Tip 10 T4 47 Tip 24 T11 85 Tip 38 T18
11 Tip 11 R5 49 Tip 25 R12 63 Tip 39 R19
35 Tip 12 T5 73 Tip 26 T12 87 Tip 40 T19
13 Tip 13 R6 51 Tip 27 R13 65 Tip 41 R20
37 Tip 14 T6 75 Tip 28 T13 89 Tip 42 T20
317
Pin Cor
e
Seri
al
No.
Lab
el
Pin Cor
e
Seri
al
No.
Lab
el
Pin Cor
e
Seri
al
No.
Lab
el

Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
Blu
e
1 Wh
ite
R0 Pai
r
Or
ang
e
15 Wh
ite
R7 Pai
r
Gre
en
53 Wh
ite
R1
4
Pai
r
2 Blu
e
16 Blu
e
54 Blu
e
25 Wh
ite
T0 Pai
r
39 Wh
ite
T7 Pai
r
77 Wh
ite
T1
4
Pai
r
26 Or
ang
e
40 Or
ang
e
78 Or
ang
e
3 Wh
ite
R1 Pai
r
17 Wh
ite
R8 Pai
r
55 Wh
ite
R1
5
Pai
r
4 Gr
een
18 Gr
een
56 Gr
een
27 Wh
ite
T1 Pai
r
41 Wh
ite
T8 Pai
r
79 Wh
ite
T1
5
Pai
r
28 Br
ow
n
42 Br
ow
n
80 Br
ow
n
5 Wh
ite
R2 Pai
r
19 Wh
ite
R9 Pai
r
57 Wh
ite
R1
6
Pai
r
6 Gr
ay
20 Gr
ay
58 Gr
ay
29 Re
d
T2 Pai
r
43 Re
d
T9 Pai
r
81 Re
d
T1
6
Pai
r
318
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
30 Blu
e
44 Blu
e
82 Blu
e
7 Re
d
R3 Pai
r
21 Re
d
R1
0
Pai
r
59 Re
d
R1
7
Pai
r
8 Or
ang
e
22 Or
ang
e
60 Or
ang
e
31 Re
d
T3 Pai
r
45 Re
d
T1
0
Pai
r
83 Re
d
T1
7
Pai
r
32 Gr
een
46 Gr
een
84 Gr
een
9 Re
d
R4 Pai
r
23 Re
d
R1
1
Pai
r
61 Re
d
R1
8
Pai
r
10 Br
ow
n
24 Br
ow
n
62 Br
ow
n
33 Re
d
T4 Pai
r
47 Re
d
T1
1
Pai
r
85 Re
d
T1
8
Pai
r
34 Gr
ay
48 Gr
ay
86 Gr
ay
11 Bla
ck
R5 Pai
r
49 Bla
ck
R1
2
Pai
r
63 Bla
ck
R1
9
Pai
r
12 Blu
e
50 Blu
e
64 Blu
e
35 Bla
ck
T5 Pai
r
73 Bla
ck
T1
2
Pai
r
87 Bla
ck
T1
9
Pai
r
36 Or
ang
e
74 Or
ang
e
88 Or
ang
e
13 Bla
ck
R6 Pai
r
51 Bla
ck
R1
3
Pai
r
65 Bla
ck
R2
0
Pai
r
14 Gr
een
52 Gr
een
66 Gr
een
319
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
Ri
bb
on
Co
lor
Pi
n
Co
lor
of
the
Co
re
La
bel
Re
lat
io
ns
hi
p
37 Bla
ck
T6 Pai
r
75 Bla
ck
T1
3
Pai
r
89 Bla
ck
T2
0
Pai
r
38 Br
ow
n
76 Br
ow
n
90 Br
ow
n

Table 16-10 lists the technical specifications for 21xE1/T1 cables used on the OptiX OSN
550.
Table 16-10 Technical specifications for 21xE1/T1 cables used on the OptiX OSN 550
Item Description
Connector type Anea 96
Number of cores 42 cores/pair
Fireproof class IEC60332-3C

16.9 E3/T3 Cable
An E3/T3 cable receives/transmits E3/T3 signals. One end of the E3/T3 cable has an SMB
connector that is connected to an E3/T3 electrical interface board. The other end of the E3/T3
cable is connected to a DDF and its connector needs to be prepared on site as required.
Structure
Figure 16-10 Structure of an E3/T3 cable
1. Coaxial connector - SMB 2. Main label 3. Coaxial cable

320
Pin Assignments
None.
Item Description
Connector Coaxial connector, SMB connector, 75 ohms, straight, female
Cable I Coaxial cable, 75 ohms, 3.9 mm, 2.1 mm, 0.34 mm, shielded
Diameter of the shield layer (3.9 mm), diameter of the internal insulation layer
(2.1 mm), diameter of the internal conductor (0.34 mm)
Available lengths: 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 30 m
Cable II Coaxial cable, 75 ohms, 4.4 mm, 2.4 mm, 0.4 mm, shielded, gray
Available lengths: 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 40 m
Cable III Coaxial cable, 75 ohms, 6.7 mm, 3.8 mm, 0.61 mm, shielded, gray
Available lengths: 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 130 m
Cable IV Coaxial cable, 75 ohms, 5.80 mm, 3.71 mm, 0.643 mm, black
Available length: 30 m
Fireproof
class
CM

16.10 Network Cable
A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are
terminated with an RJ45 connector.
Interfaces Using RJ45 Connectors
The following types of interfaces use RJ45 connectors:
l Medium dependent interfaces (MDIs): used by terminal equipment, for example, network
card
l MDI-Xs: used by network equipment
321
The difference between MDIs and MDI-Xs is with regard to pin assignments. Table 16-11
provides details about the pin assignments for ports in MDI mode. Table 16-12 provides details
about the pin assignments for ports in MDI-X mode.
Different cables are used between the interfaces using RJ45 connectors.
l A straight-through cable is used between an MDI and an MDI-X.
l A crossover cable is used between two MDIs.
l A crossover cable is used between two MDI-Xs.
NOTE
The NMS/COM port and Ethernet electrical service ports of the equipment support the auto-MDI/MDI-X
mode. Therefore, straight-through cables and crossover cables can be used to connect the NMS/COM port
and Ethernet electrical service ports to MDIs or MDI-Xs.
(+)
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
(-)
(+)
(-)

(+)
322
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
(-)
(+)
(-)

Cable Diagram
Figure 16-11 Straight-through cable
1. Network port connector,
RJ45
2. Label 1 3. Main label 4. Label 2

323
Figure 16-12 Crossover cable
1. Network port connector, RJ45 2. Label 1 3. Main label 4. Network cable 5. Label 2

Pin Assignments
Table 16-13 Pin assignments for a straight-through cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relationship
X1.1 X2.1 White/Orange Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.3 X2.3 White/Green Twisted pair
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair
X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue
X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown

Table 16-14 Pin assignments for a crossover cable
X1.6 X2.2 Orange Twisted pair
X1.3 X2.1 White/Orange
X1.1 X2.3 White/Green Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair
X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue
X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted pair
324
X1.8 X2.8 Brown

Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Network port connector, RJ45 connector, 8-pin, 8-bit, shielded,
connector, 24 to 26 AWG, CAT 6/configured with the SFTP network
cable
Cable type l Straight-through cable: communication cable, 10015 ohms,
CAT5E SFTP 24 AWG, 8 cores, PANTONE 445U
l Crossover cable: communication cable, 1005 ohms, CAT5E SFTP
24 AWG, 8 cores, PANTONE 646U
Number of cores 8 cores
Fireproof class CM
Length l Straight-through cable: 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m
l Crossover cable: 5 m, 30 m
325
17 Parameter Settings
To use the functions of a board, first set parameters related to the board. This section provides
hyperlinks of board parameter settings.
Table 17-1 lists references for parameter settings on boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports.
Table 17-1 References for parameter settings on boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports
Board Type Board Involved Parameter Setting Reference
System control,
switching, and
timing board
PCX, CXL Parameters for Configuring system control,
switching, and timing board
Packet processing
board
EM6T, EM6F, EF8F,
EG4C, EX1
Parameters for Configuring Ethernet Ports
MD1 Parameters for Configuring CES Ports
CQ1 Parameters for Configuring Channelized
STM-1 Ports
SDH boards SL1D, SL4D, SL1Q Parameters for Configuring SDH Boards
PDH boards SP3D, PL3T Parameters for Configuring PDH Boards
EoS boards EFS8, EGT1, EGS4 l Parameters for Configuring VC-12 Path
Overheads
l Parameters for Configuring Ethernet Ports
Auxiliary board AUX l Parameters for Configuring Broadcast Data
Interfaces
l Parameters for Configuring F1 Data Service
Hardware Description 17 Parameter Settings
326
A Glossary
Numerics
1+1 backup A backup method in which two components mirror each other. If the active component
goes down, the standby component takes over services from the active component to
ensure that the system service is not interrupted.
1:N protection An architecture that has N normal service signals, N working SNCs/trails, and one
protection SNC/trail. It may have one extra service signal.
3G See 3rd Generation.
3R reshaping, retiming, regenerating
3rd Generation (3G) The third generation of digital wireless technology, as defined by the International
Telecommunications Union (ITU). Third generation technology is expected to deliver
data transmission speeds between 144 kbit/s and 2 Mbit/s, compared to the 9.6 kbit/s to
19.2 kbit/s offered by second generation technology.
A
A/D analog/digit
AAA See Authentication, Authorization and Accounting.
AAL See ATM Adaptation Layer.
AAL2 ATM Adaptation Layer Type 2
AAL5 ATM Adaptation Layer Type 5
ABR See available bit rate.
ACAP See adjacent channel alternate polarization.
ACH associated channel header
ACL See access control list.
ACL rule A rule for controlling the access of users.
ADM add/drop multiplexer
AF See assured forwarding.
Hardware Description A Glossary
327
AGC automatic gain control
AIO asynchronous input/output
AIS alarm indication signal
AIS insertion Insertion of AIS in a channel with excessive errors to indicate that it is unavailable. For
a line board, it can be set whether to insert AIS when there are excessive errors in the
B1, B2 and B3 bytes. For tributary board at the E1/T1 level, it can be set whether to
insert AIS when there are excessive errors in BIP-2. For tributary board at the E3 level
or higher, it can be set whether to insert AIS when there are excessive errors in the B3
byte.
ALS See automatic laser shutdown.
AM See adaptive modulation.
AMI See alternate mark inversion.
ANSI See American National Standards Institute.
APD See avalanche photodiode.
APID access point identifier
APS automatic protection switching
APS 1+1 protection A protection architecture that comprises one protection facility and one working facility
and performs switchover by using the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) protocol.
Normally, signals are sent only over the working facility. If an APS switchover event is
detected by the working facility, services are switched over to the protection facility.
ARP See Address Resolution Protocol.
AS See autonomous system.
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASK amplitude shift keying
ATM asynchronous transfer mode
ATM Adaptation
Layer (AAL)
An interface between higher-layer protocols and Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM).
The AAL provides a conversion function to and from ATM for various types of
information, including voice, video, and data.
ATM protection group Logically bound ATM VP network/subnetwork connections that share the same physical
transmission channel. In the VP Group (VPG), a pair of VP connections (working
connection and its protective connection) is used for monitoring the automatic protection
switching, called monitoring connections (APS VPCs). If the monitoring connections
switch over, the whole VPG will switch over to quicken the ATM protection switching
(as quick as the protection switching of the SDH layer).
ATPC See automatic transmit power control.
AU See administrative unit.
AUG See administrative unit group.
AWG arrayed waveguide grating
328
Address Resolution
Protocol (ARP)
An Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. The ARP protocol
enables hosts and routers to determine link layer addresses through ARP requests and
responses. The address resolution is a process by which the host converts the target IP
address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame. The basic function of
ARP is to use the target equipment's IP address to query its MAC address.
American National
Standards Institute
(ANSI)
An organization that defines U.S standards for the information processing industry.
Authentication,
Authorization and
Accounting (AAA)
A mechanism for configuring authentication, authorization, and accounting security
services. Authentication refers to the verification of user identities and the related
network services; authorization refers to the granting of network services to users
according to authentication results; and accounting refers to the tracking of the
consumption of network services by users.
access A link between the customer and the telecommunication network. Many technologies,
such as the copper wire, optical fiber, mobile, microwave and satellite, are used for
access.
access control list
(ACL)
A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to access a
resource.
access layer A layer that connects the end users (or last mile) to the ISP network. The access layer
devices are cost-effective and have high-density interfaces. In an actual network, the
access layer includes the devices and cables between the access points and the UPEs.
access point Any entity that has station functionality and provides access to the distribution services,
via the wireless medium (WM) for associated stations.
accumulation The sum of the service usage, consumption, and recharge fees of a subscriber.
active link A link in the link aggregation group, which is connected to the active interface.
active mode A working mode of EFM OAM. The discovery and remote loopback can only be initiated
by the interface in the active mode.
adaptive modulation
(AM)
A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode according to the
channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment uses a high-
efficiency modulation mode to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrum
utilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment uses the
low-efficiency modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of the link
that carries high-priority services.
adjacency A portion of the local routing information which pertains to the reachability of a single
neighbor ES or IS over a single circuit. Adjacencies are used as input to the Decision
Process for forming paths through the routing domain. A separate adjacency is created
for each neighbor on a circuit, and for each level of routing (i.e. level 1 and level 2) on
a broadcast circuit.
adjacent channel
alternate polarization
(ACAP)
A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontal
polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals.
adjacent concatenation A situation where the virtual containers (VC) to carry concatenated services in SDH are
consecutive in terms of their service in the frame structures, so that they use the same
path overhead (POH).
329
administrative unit
(AU)
The information structure that enables adaptation between the higher order path layer
and the multiplex section layer. The administrative unit consists of an information
payload (the higher order VC) and an AU pointer, which indicates the offset of the
payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start.
administrative unit
group (AUG)
One or more administrative units occupying fixed, defined positions in an STM payload.
An AUG consists of AU-4s.
advanced ACL An ACL that defines ACL rules based on the source addresses, target addresses, protocol
type, such as TCP source or target port, the type of the ICMP protocol, and message
codes.
aggregated link Multiple signaling link sets between two nodes.
aging time The time to live before an object becomes invalid.
air interface The interface between the cellular phone set or wireless modem (usually portable or
mobile) and the active base station.
alarm A message reported when a fault is detected by a device or by the network management
system during the device polling process. Each alarm corresponds to a clear alarm. After
a clear alarm is received, the corresponding alarm is cleared.
alarm box A device that reflects the status of an alarm in visual-audio mode. The alarm box notifies
you of the alarm generation and alarm severity after it is connected to the Signaling
Network Manager server or client and the related parameters are set.
alarm cascading The method of cascading alarm signals from several subracks or cabinets.
alarm correlation
analysis
A process to analyze correlated alarms. For example, if alarm 2 is generated within five
seconds after alarm 1 is generated, and it complies with the conditions defined in the
alarm correlation analysis rule, you can either mask the alarm or raise the level of alarm
2 according to the behavior defined in the alarm correlation rule.
alarm filtering An alarm management method. Alarms are detected and reported to the NMS system,
and whether the alarm information is displayed and saved is decided by the alarm filtering
status. An alarm with the filtering status set to "Filter" is not displayed and saved on the
NMS, but is monitored on the NE.
alarm indication A mechanism to indicate the alarm status of equipment. On the cabinet of an NE, four
differently-colored indicators specify the current status of the NE. When the green
indicator is on, the NE is powered on. When the red indicator is on, a critical alarm has
been generated. When the orange indicator is on, a major alarm has been generated.
When the yellow indicator is on, a minor alarm has been generated. The ALM alarm
indicator on the front panel of a board indicates the current status of the board.
alarm inversion mode A mode for an NE that indicates whether the port is automatically restored to the normal
status after the service is accessed or the fault is removed. There are three alarm inversion
modes: normal, revertible and non-revertible.
alarm notification When an error occurs, the performance measurement system sends performance alarms
to the destination (for example, a file and/or fault management system) designated by
users.
alarm suppression A method to suppress alarms for the alarm management purpose. Alarms that are
suppressed are no longer reported from NEs.
alternate mark
inversion (AMI)
A synchronous clock encoding technique which uses bipolar pulses to represent logical
1 values.
330
analog signal A signal in which information is represented with a continuously variable physical
quantity, such as voltage. Because of this constant changing of the wave shape with
regard to its passing a given point in time or space, an analog signal might have a virtually
indefinite number of states or values. This contrasts with a digital signal that is expressed
as a square wave and therefore has a very limited number of discrete states. Analog
signals, with complicated structures and narrow bandwidth, are vulnerable to external
interference.
assured forwarding
(AF)
One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF.
It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay.
For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic that
exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward the
traffic instead of discarding the packets.
attack An attempt to bypass security controls in a system with the mission of using that system
or compromising it. An attack is usually accomplished by exploiting a current
vulnerability.
attenuation Reduction of signal magnitude or signal loss, usually expressed in decibels.
attenuator A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fiber Link. Generally used to
ensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong.
automatic laser
shutdown (ALS)
A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmitters
and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic transmit
power control (ATPC)
A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected
at the receiver
autonomous system
(AS)
A network set that uses the same routing policy and is managed by the same technology
administration department. Each AS has a unique identifier that is an integer ranging
from 1 to 65535. The identifier is assigned by IANA. An AS can be divided into areas.
availability A capability of providing services at any time. The probability of this capability is called
availability.
available bit rate (ABR) A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possible
forwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-time
quality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.
avalanche photodiode
(APD)
A semiconductor photodetector with integral detection and amplification stages.
Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a region where they free an
avalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but require higher voltages
than other semiconductor electronics.
average delay A performance indicator indicating the average RTT of multiple ping operations or other
probe operations. It is expressed in milliseconds.
B
B-ISDN See broadband integrated services digital network.
BA booster amplifier
BBE background block error
BC boundary clock
BCD binary coded decimal
331
BDI See backward defect indication.
BDI packet A packet used to notify the upstream LSR of the failure event which has occurred on the
downstream LSR through the reverse LSP. The BDI packet can be used in the 1:1/N
protective switchover service.
BE See best effort.
BER bit error rate
BFD See Bidirectional Forwarding Detection.
BGP Border Gateway Protocol
BIP See bit interleaved parity.
BIP-8 See bit interleaved parity-8.
BIP-X bit interleaved parity-X
BITS See building integrated timing supply.
BMC best master clock
BNC See bayonet-neill-concelman.
BOM bill of materials
BPDU See bridge protocol data unit.
BPS board protection switching
BSC See base station controller.
BSS base station subsystem
BTS base transceiver station
BWS backbone wavelength division multiplexing system
Bidirectional
Forwarding Detection
(BFD)
A fast and independent hello protocol that delivers millisecond-level link failure
detection and provides carrier-class availability. After sessions are established between
neighboring systems, the systems can periodically send BFD packets to each other. If
one system fails to receive a BFD packet within the negotiated period, the system regards
that the bidirectional link fails and instructs the upper layer protocol to take actions to
recover the faulty link.
backbone network A network that forms the central interconnection for a connected network. The
communication backbone for a country is WAN. The backbone network is an important
architectural element for building enterprise networks. It provides a path for the exchange
of information between different LANs or subnetworks. A backbone can tie together
diverse networks in the same building, in different buildings in a campus environment,
or over wide areas. Generally, the backbone network's capacity is greater than the
networks connected to it.
backplane An electronic circuit board containing circuits and sockets into which additional
electronic devices on other circuit boards or cards can be plugged.
backup A periodic operation performed on data stored in a database for the purposes of
recovering the data if an error occurs. The backup also refers to the data synchronization
between active and standby boards.
332
backward defect
indication (BDI)
A function that the sink node of a LSP, when detecting a defect, uses to inform the
upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.
bandwidth A range of transmission frequencies a transmission line or channel can carry in a network.
In fact, the bandwidth is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies in
the transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer
rate.
base station area An area of radio coverage consisting of cells served by one or more Base Transceiver
Stations (BTSs) in the same base station site.
base station controller
(BSC)
A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM/CDMA network. It
interworks with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface.
It provides the following functions: radio resource management, base station
management, power control, handover control, and traffic measurement. One BSC
controls and manages one or more BTSs in an actual network.
baseband A form of modulation in which the information is applied directly onto the physical
transmission medium.
bayonet-neill-
concelman (BNC)
A connector used for connecting two coaxial cables.
bearer An information transmission path with defined capacity, delay and bit error rate.
bearer network A network used to carry the messages of a transport-layer protocol between physical
devices.
best effort (BE) A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded
following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of the
network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the time
it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet loss
ratio, and high reliability.
best-effort service A unitary and simple service model. Without being approved, but after notifying the
network, the application can send any number of packets at any time. The network tries
its best to send the packets, but delay and reliability cannot be ensured. Best-Effort is
the default service model of the Internet. It can be applied to various networks, such as
FTP and E-Mail. It is implemented through the First In First-Out (FIFO) queue.
bit error An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding
bit in the received digital signal.
bit interleaved parity
(BIP)
A method of error monitoring. With even parity, the transmitting equipment generates
an X-bit code over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit of
the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered
portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-bit
sequences within the specified portion, and so forth. Even parity is generated by setting
the BIP-X bits so that an even number of 1s exist in each monitored partition of the
signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits in the same bit position within the X-bit
sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes the BIP-X.
bit interleaved parity-8
(BIP-8)
Consists of a parity byte calculated bit-wise across a large number of bytes in a
transmission transport frame. Divide a frame is into several blocks with 8 bits (one byte)
in a parity unit and then arrange the blocks in matrix. Compute the number of "1" or "0"
over each column. Then fill a 1 in the corresponding bit for the result if the number is
odd, otherwise fill a 0.
333
blacklist A method of filtering packets based on their source IP addresses. Compared with ACL,
the match condition for the black list is much simpler. Therefore, the black list can filter
packets at a higher speed and can effectively screen the packet sent from the specific IP
address.
bound path A parallel path with several serial paths bundled together. It improves the data throughput
capacity.
bridge A device that connects two or more networks and forwards packets among them. Bridges
operate at the physical network level. Bridges differ from repeaters because bridges store
and forward complete packets, while repeaters forward all electrical signals. Bridges
differ from routers because bridges use physical addresses, while routers use IP
addresses.
bridge protocol data
unit (BPDU)
Data messages exchanged across switches within an extended LAN that uses a spanning
tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses,
priorities, and costs, and they ensure that the data reaches its intended destination. BPDU
messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a network topology. These
loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridge interfaces and placing
redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
bridging The act of simultaneously transmitting identical traffic on the working and protection
channels.
broadband integrated
services digital network
(B-ISDN)
A standard defined by the ITU-T to handle high-bandwidth applications, such as voice.
It currently uses the ATM technology to transmit data over SONNET-based circuits at
155 to 622 Mbit/s or higher speed.
broadcast A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is
determined by the broadcast address.
broadcast address A network address in computer networking that allows information to be sent to all nodes
on a network, rather than to a specific network host.
broadcast domain A group of network stations that receives broadcast packets originating from any device
within the group. The broadcast domain also refers to the set of ports between which a
device forwards a multicast, broadcast, or unknown destination frame.
building integrated
timing supply (BITS)
In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can use
a device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect the
synchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals to
the building integrated device. This device is called BITS.
built-in WDM A function which integrates some simple WDM systems into products that belong to the
OSN series. That is, the OSN products can add or drop several wavelengths directly.
burst A process of forming data into a block of the proper size, uninterruptedly sending the
block in a fast operation, waiting for a long time, and preparing for the next fast sending.
C
CAC See connection admission control.
CAR committed access rate
334
CAS multiframe A multiframe set up based on timeslot 16. Each CAS multiframe contains 16 E1 PCM
frames. Among the 8 bits of timeslot 16 in the first frame, the first 4 bits are used for
multiframe synchronization. The multiframe alignment signal (MFAS) for
synchronization is 0000. The last 4 bits are used as the not multiframe alignment signal
(NMFAS). The NMFAS is XYXX. For the other 15 frames, timeslot 16 is used to
transmit exchange and multiplexing (E&M) signaling corresponding to each timeslot.
CBR See constant bit rate.
CBS See committed burst size.
CC See continuity check.
CCDP See co-channel dual polarization.
CCS See Common Channel Signaling.
CDVT cell delay variation tolerance
CE See customer edge.
CES See circuit emulation service.
CFM connectivity fault management
CFR cell fill rate
CIR committed information rate
CIST See Common and Internal Spanning Tree.
CLEI common language equipment identification
CLK clock card
CLNP connectionless network protocol
CLP See cell loss priority.
CMI coded mark inversion
CO central office
CPU See central processing unit.
CR connection request
CRC See cyclic redundancy check.
CRC-4 multiframe A multiframe recommended by ITU-T G.704 and set up based on the first bit of timeslot
0. The CRC-4 multiframe is different from the CAS multiframe in principle and
implementation. Each CRC-4 multiframe contains 16 PCM frames. Each CRC-4
multiframe consists of two CRC-4 sub-multiframes. Each CRC-4 sub-multiframe is a
CRC-4 check block that contains 2048 (256 x 8) bits. Bits C1 to C4 of a check block can
check the previous check block.
CSA Canadian Standards Association
CSES consecutive severely errored second
CSF Client Signal Fail
CSMA/CD See carrier sense multiple access with collision detection.
CST See common spanning tree.
335
CTC common transmit clock
CV connectivity verification
CV packet A type of packet that is generated at the frequency of 1/s on the source end LSR of an
LSP, and is terminated on the destination end LSR of the LSP. A CV packet is transmitted
from the source end LSR to the destination LSR along the LSP. A CV packet contains
the unique identifier (TTSI) of the LSP so that all types of abnormalities on the path can
be detected.
CW control word
CWDM See coarse wavelength division multiplexing.
Common Channel
Signaling (CCS)
A signaling system used in telephone networks that separates signaling information from
user data. A specified channel is exclusively designated to carry signaling information
for all other channels in the system.
Common and Internal
Spanning Tree (CIST)
The single spanning tree jointly calculated by STP and RSTP, the logical connectivity
using MST bridges and regions, and MSTP. The CIST ensures that all LANs in the
bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.
cabinet Free-standing and self-supporting enclosure for housing electrical and/or electronic
equipment. It is usually fitted with doors and/or side panels which may or may not be
removable.
cable distribution plate A component, which is used to arrange cables in order.
cable tie A tie used to bind cables.
carrier An organization that has telecom network resources and can provide communications
service.
carrier sense multiple
access with collision
detection (CSMA/CD)
Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) is a computer
networking access method in which:
l A carrier sensing scheme is used.
l A transmitting data station that detects another signal while transmitting a frame,
stops transmitting that frame, transmits a jam signal, and then waits for a random
time interval before trying to send that frame again.
cell loss priority (CLP) A field in the ATM cell header that determines the probability of a cell being dropped
if the network becomes congested. Cells with CLP = 0 are insured traffic, which is
unlikely to be dropped. Cells with CLP = 1 are best-effort traffic, which might be
dropped.
central processing unit
(CPU)
The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets
and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute
instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer's
main data-transfer path, the bus.
centralized alarm The alarms of all the hosts connecting to the Operation and Maintenance Unit (OMU).
336
channel A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or speed between two or more
locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio (microwave),
fiber, or any combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted per second
in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per second. For
example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s), and Tb/s
(1012 bit/s).
channel spacing The center-to-center difference in frequencies or wavelengths between adjacent channels
in a WDM device.
check criteria A set of rules for checking and analyzing device echo information. The check criteria
for an alarm collection item need to be set through the configuration file.
circuit emulation
service (CES)
A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the
transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM
cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the
interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES
technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original
sequence at the reception end.
clock selection An algorithm used for selecting the best clock for clock synchronization. For different
peers (multiple servers or peers configured for a client), a peer sends clock
synchronization packets to each server or passive peer. After receiving the response
packets, it uses the clock selection algorithm to select the best clock.
clock source A device that provides standard time for the NTP configuration.
clock synchronization A process of synchronizing clocks, in which the signal frequency traces the reference
frequency, but the start points do not need to be consistent. This process is (also known
as frequency synchronization).
clock tracing The method of keeping the time on each node synchronized with a clock source in the
network.
co-channel dual
polarization (CCDP)
A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical
polarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization has twice
the transmission capacity of the single polarization.
coarse wavelength
division multiplexing
(CWDM)
A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into
the same fiber. CWDM spaces wavelengths at a distance of several nm. CWDM does
not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.
collision A condition in which two packets are being transmitted over a medium at the same time.
Their interference makes both unintelligible.
committed burst size
(CBS)
A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum burst
IP packet size when information is transferred at the committed information rate. This
parameter must be greater than 0 but should be not less than the maximum length of an
IP packet to be forwarded.
common spanning tree
(CST)
A single spanning tree that connects all the MST regions in a network. Every MST region
is considered as a switch; therefore, the CST can be considered as their spanning tree
generated with STP/RSTP.
composite service An aggregation of a series of services relevant to each other.
conference An IP multimedia session that have two or more participants. Each conference has a
focus and can be identified uniquely.
337
congestion Extra intra-network or inter-network traffic resulting in decreased network service
efficiency.
congestion
management
A flow control measure to solve the problem of network resource competition. When
the network congestion occurs, it places packets into the queue for buffer and determines
the packet forwarding order.
connection An association of transmission channels or telecommunication circuits, switching and
other functional units set up to provide for the transfer of signals between two or more
network points, to support a single communication.
connection admission
control (CAC)
A control process in which the network takes actions in the call set-up phase (or call re-
negotiation phase) to determine which connection request is admitted.
connection point A reference point where the output of a trail termination source or a connection is bound
to the input of another connection, or where the output of a connection is bound to the
input of a trail termination sink or another connection. The connection point is
characterized by the information which passes across it. A bidirectional connection point
is formed by the association of a contradirectional pair.
connectionless Pertaining to a method of data presentation. The data has a complete destination address
and is delivered by the network on a best-effort basis, independent of other data being
exchanged between the same pair of users.
constant bit rate (CBR) A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on
the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise
clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.
container A set of hardware or software devices. In software domain, it refers to the environment
variables and processes. In hardware domain, it refers to a type of topology node that
contains nodes, usually refers to one device with multiple frames; each node stands for
a frame.
continuity check (CC) An Ethernet connectivity fault management (CFM) method used to detect the
connectivity between MEPs by having each MEP periodically transmit a Continuity
Check Message (CCM).
control VLAN A VLAN that transmits only protocol packets.
control channel The channel used to transmit digital control information from the base station to a cell
phone or vice-versa.
convergence layer A "bridge" between the access layer and the core layer. The convergence layer provides
the convergence and forwarding functions for the access layer. It processes all the traffic
from the access layer devices, and provides the uplinks to the core layer. Compared with
the access layer, the convergence layer devices should have higher performance, fewer
interfaces and higher switching rate. In the real network, the convergence layer refers to
the network between UPEs and PE-AGGs.
cooling system The system that controls or influences climate by decreasing the air temperature only.
core layer A layer that functions as the backbone of high speed switching for networks and provides
high speed forwarding communications. It has a backbone transmission structure that
provides high reliability, high throughput, and low delay. The core layer devices must
have a good redundancy, error tolerance, manageability, adaptability, and they support
dual-system hot backup or load balancing technologies. In a real network, the core layer
includes the IP/MPLS backbone network consisting of NPEs and backbone routers.
338
correlation The similarities when two random processes vary with time.
corruption The alteration of the information in IMS networks for the purpose of deception. For
example, attackers corrupt the correct charging information to evade being charged.
cross-connection The connection of channels between the tributary board and the line board, or between
line boards inside the NE. Network services are realized through the cross-connections
of NEs.
crossover cable A twisted pair patch cable wired in such a way as to route the transmit signals from one
piece of equipment to the receive signals of another piece of equipment, and vice versa.
crystal oscillator An oscillator that produces electrical oscillations at a frequency determined by the
physical characteristics of a piezoelectric quartz crystal.
customer edge (CE) A part of the BGP/MPLS IP VPN model that provides interfaces for directly connecting
to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.
cutover To migrate the data of an application system to another application system, which then
provides services.
cyclic redundancy
check (CRC)
A procedure used to check for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a
complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending
device performs the calculation before performing the transmission and includes the
generated number in the packet it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device
then repeats the same calculation. If both devices obtain the same result, the transmission
is considered to be error free. This procedure is known as a redundancy check because
each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
D
D/A digital-analog converter
DB database
DC direct current
DC-C See DC-return common (with ground).
DC-I See DC-return isolate (with ground).
DC-return common
(with ground) (DC-C)
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between
the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DC-return isolate (with
ground) (DC-I)
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND
on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DCC See data communications channel.
DCE See data circuit-terminating equipment.
DCF data communication function
DCM See dispersion compensation module.
DCN See data communication network.
DDF digital distribution frame
339
DDN See digital data network.
DHCP See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.
DLAG See distributed link aggregation group.
DM See delay measurement.
DNI dual node interconnection
DRDB dynamic random database
DS interior node A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node.
DS node A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node.
DSCP differentiated services code point
DSL See digital subscriber line.
DSLAM See digital subscriber line access multiplexer.
DSP digital signal processing
DTE See data terminal equipment.
DTR data terminal ready
DVB digital video broadcasting
DVB-ASI digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface
DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol.
DWDM See dense wavelength division multiplexing.
Distance Vector
Multicast Routing
Protocol (DVMRP)
An Internet gateway protocol based primarily on the RIP. The DVMRP protocol
implements a typical dense mode IP multicast solution and uses IGMP to exchange
routing datagrams with its neighbors.
Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol
(DHCP)
A client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters
specific to the DHCP client host requesting information the host requires to participate
on the Internet network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocating IP addresses
to hosts.
data backup A method of copying key data to the backup storage area to prevent data loss in case the
original storage area is damaged or a failure occurs.
data circuit-
terminating equipment
(DCE)
The equipment that provides the signal conversion and coding between the data terminal
equipment (DTE) and the line. A DCE is located at a data station. The DCE may be
separate equipment, or an integral part of the DTE or intermediate equipment. The DCE
may perform other functions that are normally performed at the network end of the line.
data communication
network (DCN)
A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the data
communication function.
data communications
channel (DCC)
The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to
transmit information on the operation, management, maintenance, and provisioning
(OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channel composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as
the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel composed of bytes D4-D12 is
referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.
340
data flow A process that involves processing the data extracted from the source system, such as
filtering, integration, calculation, and summary, finding and solving data inconsistency,
and deleting invalid data so that the processed data meets the requirements of the
destination system for the input data.
data mapping An algorithm that is used to convert the data between heterogeneous data models.
data restoration A method for retrieving data that is lost due to damage or misoperations.
data terminal
equipment (DTE)
A user device composing the UNI. The DTE accesses the data network through the DCE
equipment (for example, a modem) and usually uses the clock signals produced by DCE.
datagram A kind of protocol data unit (PDU) which is used in Connectionless Network Protocol
(CLNP), such as IP datagram, UDP datagram.
defect A limited interruption in the ability of an item to perform a required function.
delay measurement
(DM)
The time elapsed since the start of transmission of the first bit of the frame by a source
node until the reception of the last bit of the loopbacked frame by the same source node,
when the loopback is performed at the frame's destination node.
demodulation In communications, the means by which a modem converts data from modulated carrier
frequencies (waves that have been modified in such a way that variations in amplitude
and frequency represent meaningful information) over a telephone line. Data is converted
to the digital form needed by a computer to which the modem is attached, with as little
distortion as possible.
dense wavelength
division multiplexing
(DWDM)
The technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation
of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific frequency
spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in the same
fiber.
designated port A port defined in the STP protocol. On each switch that runs the STP protocol, the traffic
from the root bridge is forwarded to the designated port. The subnet connected to the
STP switch receives the data traffic from the root bridge. All the ports on the root bridge
are designated ports. On each subnet, there is only one designated port. When a network
topology is stable, only the root port and the designated port forward traffic. Other non-
designated ports are in the blocking state, and they receive STP packets, but does not
forward user traffic.
destruction A process during which the information and resources in a network are changed
unexpectedly and the meanings of the information and resources are deleted or changed.
digital data network
(DDN)
A data transmission network that is designed to transmit data on digital channels (such
as the fiber channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel).
digital modulation A method that controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of the carrier
based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, the information can
be transmitted by the carrier.
digital network A telecommunication network where information is first converted into distinct
electronic pulses and then transmitted to a digital bit stream.
341
digital signal A signal in which information is represented by a limited number of discrete states
number of discrete states (for example, high and low voltages) rather than by fluctuating
levels in a continuous stream, as in an analog signal. In the pulse code modulation (PCM)
technology, the 8 kHz sampling frequency is used and a byte contains 8 bits in length.
Therefore, a digital signal is also referred to as a byte-based code stream. Digital signals,
with simple structures and broad bandwidth, are easy to shape or regenerate, and are not
easily affected by external interference.
digital subscriber line
(DSL)
A technology for providing digital connections over the copper wire or the local
telephone network. DSL performs data communication over the POTS lines without
affecting the POTS service.
access multiplexer
(DSLAM)
A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company, that
receives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections and
uses multiplexing techniques to put these signals on a high-speed backbone line.
dispersion The dependence of refraction on the wavelength of light. Different wavelengths are
transmitted in an optical medium at different speeds. Wavelengths reach the end of the
medium at different times. As a result, the light pulse spreads and the dispersion occurs.
dispersion
compensation module
(DCM)
A type of module that contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for the
dispersion of the transmitting fiber.
distributed link
aggregation group
(DLAG)
A board-level port protection technology that detects unidirectional fiber cuts and
negotiates with the opposite port. In the case of a link down failure on a port or hardware
failure on a board, services are automatically switched to the slave board, thereby
achieving 1+1 protection for the inter-board ports.
domain A logical subscriber group based on which the subscriber rights are controlled.
dotted decimal notation A format of IP address. IP addresses in this format are separated into four parts by a dot
"." with each part is in the decimal numeral.
download To obtain data from an upper-layer device or the server.
downstream In an access network, the direction of transmission toward the subscriber end of the link.
dual-ended switching A protection method in which switching is performed at both ends of a protected entity,
such as a connection or path, even if a unidirectional failure occurs.
dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to simultaneously radiate or receive two independent radio waves
orthogonally polarized.
E
E-Aggr See Ethernet aggregation.
E-LAN See Ethernet local area network.
E-Line See Ethernet line.
EA encryption algorithm
EBS See excess burst size.
ECC See embedded control channel.
EDFA See erbium-doped fiber amplifier.
342
EEPROM See electrically erasable programable read-only memory.
EF See expedited forwarding.
EFCI explicit forward congestion indication
EFM Ethernet in the First Mile
EFM OAM Ethernet in the first mile OAM
EIA See Electronic Industries Alliance.
EIR See excess information rate.
EMC See electromagnetic compatibility.
EMI See electromagnetic interference.
EMS element management system
EPD early packet discard
EPL See Ethernet private line.
EPLAN See Ethernet private LAN service.
ERPS Ethernet ring protection switching
ESC See electric supervisory channel.
ESCON See enterprise system connection.
ESD electrostatic discharge
ESN See equipment serial number.
ETS European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI See European Telecommunications Standards Institute.
EVC Ethernet virtual connection
EVPL See Ethernet virtual private line.
EVPLAN See Ethernet virtual private LAN service.
EXP See experimental bits.
Electronic Industries
Alliance (EIA)
An association based in Washington, D.C., with members from various electronics
manufacturers. It sets standards for electronic components. RS-232-C, for example, is
the EIA standard for connecting serial components.
EoD See Ethernet over dual domains.
Ethernet A LAN technology that uses the carrier sense multiple access with collision detection
(CSMA/CD) media access control method. The Ethernet network is highly reliable and
easy to maintain. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000
Mbit/s, or 10,000 Mbit/s.
Ethernet aggregation
(E-Aggr)
A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual
connection).
Ethernet line (E-Line) A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual
connection).
343
Ethernet local area
network (E-LAN)
A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet
virtual connection).
Ethernet over dual
domains (EoD)
A type of boards. EoD boards bridge the PSN and TDM networks, enabling Ethernet
service transmission across PSN and TDM networks.
Ethernet private LAN
service (EPLAN)
A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
networks. This service is carried over dedicated bandwidth between multipoint-to-
multipoint connections.
Ethernet private line
(EPL)
networks. This service is carried over dedicated bandwidth between point-to-point
connections.
Ethernet virtual
private LAN service
(EVPLAN)
networks. This service is carried over shared bandwidth between multipoint-to-
multipoint connections.
Ethernet virtual
private line (EVPL)
networks. This service is carried over shared bandwidth between point-to-point
connections.
European
Telecommunications
Standards Institute
(ETSI)
A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
eSFP enhanced small form-factor pluggable
egress The egress LER. The group is transferred along the LSP consisting of a series of LSRs
after the group is labeled.
electric supervisory
channel (ESC)
A technology that implements communication among all the nodes and transmission of
monitoring data in an optical transmission network. The monitoring data of ESC is
introduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals.
electrically erasable
programable read-only
memory (EEPROM)
A type of EPROM that can be erased with an electrical signal. It is useful for stable
storage for long periods without electricity while still allowing reprograming. EEPROMs
contain less memory than RAM, take longer to reprogram, and can be reprogramed only
a limited number of times before wearing out.
electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)
A condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its
individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without
causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic
interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.
electromagnetic
interference (EMI)
Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or
limits the performance of electronics/electrical equipment.
embedded control
channel (ECC)
A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer
to enable the transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM)
information between NEs.
emergency
maintenance
A type of measure taken to quickly rectify an emergency fault to recover the proper
running of the related system or device and to reduce losses.
344
encapsulation A technology for layered protocols, in which a lower-level protocol accepts a message
from a higher-level protocol and places it in the data portion of the lower-level frame.
Protocol A's packets have complete header information, and are carried by protocol B
as data. Packets that encapsulate protocol A have a B header, an A header, followed by
the information that protocol A is carrying. Note that A could equal to B, as in IP inside
IP.
engineering label A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.
enterprise system
connection (ESCON)
A path protocol that connects the host to various control units in a storage system.
Enterprise system connection is a serial bit stream transmission protocol that operates a
rate of 200 Mbit/s.
entity A part, device, subsystem, functional unit, equipment, or system that can be considered
individually.
equalization A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate for
the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading.
equipment serial
number (ESN)
A string of characters that identify a piece of equipment and ensures correct allocation
of a license file to the specified equipment. It is also called "equipment fingerprint".
erbium-doped fiber
amplifier (EDFA)
An optical device that amplifies optical signals. This device uses a short optical fiber
doped with the rare-earth element, Erbium. The signal to be amplified and a pump laser
are multiplexed into the doped fiber, and the signal is amplified by interacting with
doping ions. When the amplifier passes an external light source pump, it amplifies the
optical signals in a specific wavelength range.
error tolerance The ability of a system or component to continue normal operation despite the presence
of erroneous inputs.
event An event indicates the information record of the status change between the system and
the managed object, including the threshold alarm of the system and the alarm reported
by the managed object.
excess burst size (EBS) A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, traffic
control is achieved by token buckets C and E. The excess burst size parameter defines
the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the
information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be
greater than 0 but should be not less than the maximum length of an IP packet to be
forwarded.
excess information rate
(EIR)
The bandwidth for excessive or burst traffic above the CIR; it equals the result of the
actual transmission rate without the safety rate.
exercise switching An operation to check whether the protection switching protocol functions properly. The
protection switching is not really performed.
expedited forwarding
(EF)
The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that
demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF
traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP
value of EF PHB is "101110".
experimental bits
(EXP)
A field in the MPLS packet header, three bits long. This field is always used to identify
the CoS of the MPLS packet.
345
extended ID The number of the subnet to which an NE belongs, used to identify different network
segments in a wide area network (WAN). Together, the ID and extended ID form the
physical ID of the NE.
external links The links between the current Web site and other Web sites. Generally, external links
refer to links from other Web sites to the current Web site.
extract To read the data required by the destination system from the source system.
F
F1 byte The user path byte, which belongs to the family of regenerator section overhead bytes.
F1 bytes are reserved for network providers, who use them primarily as a temporary data
or voice channel to transmit maintenance information.
FC See Fibre Channel.
FDB flash database
FDD See frequency division duplex.
FDDI See fiber distributed data interface.
FDI See forward defect indication.
FDI packet See forward defect indication packet.
FDV See frame delay variation.
FE port See fast Ethernet port.
FEC See forward error correction.
FFD fast failure detection
FFD packet A path failure detection method independent from CV. Different from a CV packet, the
frequency for generating FFD packets is configurable to satisfy different service
requirements. By default, the frequency is 20/s. An FFD packet contains information the
same as that in a CV packet. The destination end LSR processes FFD packets in the same
way for processing CV packets.
FICON See Fiber Connect.
FIFO first in first out queuing
FLR See frame loss ratio.
FPGA See field programmable gate array.
FPS See fast protection switching.
FQ See flow queue.
FR See frame relay.
FRU field replaceable unit
FTN FEC to NHLFE
FTP File Transfer Protocol
Fiber Connect
(FICON)
A new generation connection protocol that connects the host to various control units. It
carries a single byte command protocol through the physical path of fiber channel, and
provides a higher transmission rate and better performance than ESCON.
346
Fibre Channel (FC) A high-speed transport technology used to build SANs. FC is primarily used for
transporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays, but it can also be used on networks
carrying ATM and IP traffic. FC supports single-mode and multi-mode fiber
connections, and can run on twisted-pair copper wires and coaxial cables. FC provides
both connection-oriented and connectionless services.
fairness A feature in which for any link specified in a ring network, the source node is provided
with certain bandwidth capacities if the data packets transmitted by the source node are
constrained by the fairness algorithm.
fast Ethernet port (FE
port)
The port that provides a rate of 100 Mbit/s.
fast protection
switching (FPS)
A type of pseudo wire automatic protection switching (PW APS). When the working
PW is faulty, the source transmits services to the protection PW and the sink receives
the services from the protection PW. FPS generally works with the interworking function
(IWF) to provide end-to-end protection for services.
fault A failure to operate correctly. A fault does not include failures caused by preventative
maintenance, insufficient external resources, or intentional settings.
fault alarm A type of alarm caused by hardware and/or software faults, for example, board failure,
or by the exception that occurs in major functions. After handling, a fault alarm can be
cleared, upon which the NE reports a recovery alarm. Fault alarms are of higher severity
than event alarms.
fault detection The process of determining that a fault has occurred.
fault notification A process wherein a fault is notified. For example, when a fault occurs on the local
interface, the local interface notifies the peer of the fault through OAMPDUs. The local
interface then records the fault in the log, and reports it to the NMS.
feeder 1. A radio frequency transmission line interconnecting an antenna and a transmitter or
receiver. 2. For an antenna comprising more than one driven element, a radio frequency
transmission Line interconnecting the antenna input and a driven element.
fiber distributed data
interface (FDDI)
A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for high-
speed fiber-optic LANs. FDDI provides specifications for transmission rates of 100
megabits per second on token ring networks.
fiber trough A trough used for routing fibers.
field programmable
gate array (FPGA)
A semi-customized circuit that is used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit
(ASIC) field and developed based on programmable components. FPGA remedies many
of the deficiencies of customized circuits, and allows the use of many more gate arrays.
firewall A combination of a series of components set between different networks or network
security domains. By monitoring, limiting, and changing the data traffic across the
firewall, it masks the interior information, structure and running state of the network as
much as possible to protect the network security.
fixed bandwidth The bandwidth that is fully reserved and is allocated periodically in a GPON system to
ensure the quality of cell transmission. If a T-CONT is provided with a fixed bandwidth
and does not transmit cells, the OLT can still allocate/assign the fixed bandwidth.
Therefore, idle cells are transmitted to the upstream OLT from the ONU/ONT.
347
flash memory A type of special electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM) and
can be erased and rewritten in blocks at a time instead of only one byte. The data stored
in flash memory will not be lost if the flash memory is powered off.
flooding A type of incident, such as insertion of a large volume of data, that results in denial of
service.
flow An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On boards, it is a group of
packets that have the same quality of service (QoS) operation.
flow queue (FQ) The same type of services of a user is considered one service flow. HQoS performs queue
scheduling according to the services of each user. The service flows of each user are
classified into four FQs, namely, CS, EF, AF, and BE. CS is assigned a traffic shaping
percentage for Priority Queuing (PQ); EF, AF, and BE are assigned weights for Weighted
Fair Queuing (WFQ). The preceding two scheduling modes occupy a certain bandwidth
each; they can act at the same time without interfering each other.
forward defect
indication (FDI)
A packet generated and traced forward to the sink node of the LSP by the node that first
detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the defect and its location. Its
primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected higher level client LSPs
and (in turn) their client layers.
forward defect
indication packet (FDI
packet)
A packet that responds to the detected failure event. It is used to suppress alarms of the
upper layer network where failure has occurred.
forward error
correction (FEC)
A bit error correction technology that adds correction information to the payload at the
transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during
transmission can be corrected at the receive end.
fragmentation A process of breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network node
that does not support the original size of the packet.
frame delay variation
(FDV)
A measurement of the variations in the frame delay between a pair of service frames,
where the service frames belong to the same CoS instance on a point to point ETH
connection.
frame loss ratio (FLR) A ratio, is expressed as a percentage, of the number of service frames not delivered
divided by the total number of service frames during time interval T, where the number
of service frames not delivered is the difference between the number of service frames
arriving at the ingress ETH flow point and the number of service frames delivered at the
egress ETH flow point in a point-to-point ETH connection.
frame relay (FR) A packet-switching protocol used for WANs. Frame relay transmits variable-length
packets at up to 2 Mbit/s over predetermined, set paths known as PVCs (permanent
virtual circuits). It is a variant of X.25 but sacrifices X.25's error detection for the sake
of speed.
free-run mode An operating condition of a clock, the output signal of which is strongly influenced by
the oscillating element and not controlled by servo phase-locking techniques. In this
mode the clock has never had a network reference input, or the clock has lost external
reference and has no access to stored data, that could be acquired from a previously
connected external reference. Free-run begins when the clock output no longer reflects
the influence of a connected external reference, or transition from it. Free-run terminates
when the clock output has achieved lock to an external reference.
348
frequency division
duplex (FDD)
An application in which channels are divided by frequency. In an FDD system, the uplink
and downlink use different frequencies. Downlink data is sent through bursts. Both
uplink and downlink transmission use frames with fixed time length.
full rate A type of data transmission rate. The service bandwidth can be 9.6 kbit/s, 4.8 kbit/s, or
2.4 kbit/s.
fuse A safety device that protects an electric circuit from excessive current, consisting of or
containing a metal element that melts when current exceeds a specific amperage, thereby
opening the circuit.
G
G-ACH generic associated channel header
GAL generic associated channel header label
GCC general communication channel
GCRA generic cell rate algorithm
GFC generic flow control
GFP See Generic Framing Procedure.
GNE See gateway network element.
GPS See Global Positioning System.
GRE See Generic Routing Encapsulation.
GSM See Global System for Mobile Communications.
GTS See generic traffic shaping.
GUI graphical user interface
Generic Framing
Procedure (GFP)
A framing and encapsulated method that can be applied to any data type. GFP is defined
by ITU-T G.7041.
Generic Routing
Encapsulation (GRE)
A mechanism for encapsulating any network layer protocol over any other network. GRE
is used for encapsulating IP datagrams tunneled through the Internet. GRE serves as a
Layer 3 tunneling protocol and provides a tunnel for transparently transmitting data
packets.
Global Positioning
System (GPS)
A global navigation satellite system that provides reliable positioning, navigation, and
timing services to users worldwide.
Global System for
Mobile
Communications
(GSM)
The second-generation mobile networking standard defined by European
Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI). It is aimed at designing a standard for
global mobile phone networks. The standard allows a subscriber to use a phone globally.
GSM consists of three main parts: mobile switching subsystem (MSS), base station
subsystem (BSS), and mobile station (MS).
gain The difference between the optical power from the input optical interface of the optical
amplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber,
which expressed in dB.
gateway A device that connects two network segments using different protocols. It is used to
translate the data in the two network segments.
349
gateway network
element (GNE)
An NE that serves as a gateway for other NEs to communicate with a network
management system.
general flow control A flow control that is applicable to the A interface, C/D interface, and trunks and can be
achieved by integrating multiple function modules. It is adopted when the traffic is heavy,
or location update and authentication of multiple subscribers are performed after the
system restarts. It can efficiently prevent system breakdown caused by link congestion
or CPU overload.
generic traffic shaping
(GTS)
A traffic control measure that proactively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This is
to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream router
to avoid packet discarding and congestion.
ground terminal A connection terminal on a communication device. It is used to connect the device with
ground cables, maintaining a tight connection between the device and the grounding
electrode.
H
HCS higher order connection supervision
HDB3 high density bipolar of order 3 code
HDLC High-Level Data Link Control
HDTV See high definition television.
HEC See header error control.
HPA higher order path adaptation
HPT higher order path termination
HQoS See hierarchical quality of service.
HSDPA See High Speed Downlink Packet Access.
HSI high-speed Internet
High Speed Downlink
Packet Access
(HSDPA)
A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirement
for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables the
maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing the
WCDMA network topology.
hang up A call processing mode used by an attendant to end the conversation with a user.
hardware loopback A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interface
of a board to the output optical interface of the board to achieve signal loopback.
header error control
(HEC)
A field within the ATM frame whose purpose is to correct any single bit error in the cell
Header and also to detect any multi-bit errors. It actually performs a CRC check in the
first four header bits and also at the receiving end.
hello packet The commonest packet which is periodically sent by a router to its neighbors. It contains
information about the DR, Backup Designated Router (BDR), known neighbors and
timer values.
350
hierarchical quality of
service (HQoS)
A type of QoS that controls the traffic of users and performs the scheduling according
to the priority of user services. HQoS has an advanced traffic statistics function, and the
administrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the bandwidth
can be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis.
high definition
television (HDTV)
A type of TV that is capable of displaying at least 720 progressive or 1080 interlaced
active scan lines. It must be capable of displaying a 16:9 image using at least 540
progressive or 810 interlaced active scan lines.
historical performance
data
Performance data that is stored in the history register or that has been automatically
reported and stored in the NMS.
hop A network connection between two distant nodes. For Internet operation a hop represents
a small step on the route from one main computer to another.
hot patch A patch that is used to repair a deficiency in the software or add a new feature to a program
without restarting the software and interrupting the service. For the equipment using the
built-in system, a hot patch can be loaded, activated, confirmed, deactivated, deleted, or
queried.
I
IANA See Internet Assigned Numbers Authority.
IC See integrated circuit.
ICC ITU carrier code
ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol.
ICP IMA Control Protocol
IDU See indoor unit.
IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
IF See intermediate frequency.
IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol.
IGMP snooping A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages
and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyzing Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) packets between hosts and Layer 3 devices. In this
manner, the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.
IGP See Interior Gateway Protocol.
ILM incoming label map
IMA See inverse multiplexing over ATM.
IMA frame A control unit in the IMA protocol. It is a logical frame defined as M consecutive cells,
numbered 0 to M-l, transmitted on each of the N links in an IMA group.
IP Internet Protocol
IP address A 32-bit (4-byte) binary number that uniquely identifies a host connected to the Internet.
An IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation, consisting of the decimal values
of its 4 bytes, separated with periods; for example, 127.0.0.1. The first three bytes of the
IP address identify the network to which the host is connected, and the last byte identifies
the host itself.
351
IPA See intelligent power adjustment.
IPTV See Internet Protocol television.
IPv4 See Internet Protocol version 4.
IPv6 See Internet Protocol version 6.
IS-IS See Intermediate System to Intermediate System.
ISDN integrated services digital network
ISO International Organization for Standardization
ISP See Internet service provider.
IST internal spanning tree
ITC independent transmit clock
ITU See International Telecommunication Union.
IWF Interworking Function
Institute of Electrical
and Electronics
Engineers (IEEE)
A professional association of electrical and electronics engineers based in the United
States, but with membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on
electrical, electronics, and computer engineering, and produces many important
technology standards.
Interior Gateway
Protocol (IGP)
A routing protocol that is used within an autonomous system. The IGP runs in small-
sized and medium-sized networks. The commonly used IGPs are the routing information
protocol (RIP), the interior gateway routing protocol (IGRP), the enhanced IGRP
(EIGRP), and the open shortest path first (OSPF).
Intermediate System to
Intermediate System
(IS-IS)
A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forward
datagram or packets through a packet-based network.
International
Telecommunication
Union (ITU)
A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential recommendation
bodies, responsible for recommending standards for telecommunication (ITU-T) and
radio networks (ITU-R).
Internet Assigned
Numbers Authority
(IANA)
A department operated by the IAB. IANA delegates authority for IP address-space
allocation and domain-name assignment to the NIC and other organizations. IANA also
maintains a database of assigned protocol identifiers used in the TCP/IP suite, including
autonomous system numbers.
Internet Control
Message Protocol
(ICMP)
A network layer protocol that provides message control and error reporting between a
host server and an Internet gateway.
Internet Group
Management Protocol
(IGMP)
One of the TCP/IP protocols for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast
groups. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain
multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol
television (IPTV)
A system that provides TV services over the IP network. In the IPTV system, media
streams from satellites, terrestrial, and studios are converted by the encoder to the media
streams applicable to the IP network. Then the media streams are transmitted to the
terminal layer on the IP network. Media content is displayed on a TV set after media
streams are processed by specified receiving devices (for example, an STB).
352
Internet Protocol
version 4 (IPv4)
The current version of the Internet Protocol (IP). IPv4 utilizes a 32bit address which is
assigned to hosts. An address belongs to one of five classes (A, B, C, D, or E) and is
written as 4 octets separated by periods and may range from 0.0.0.0 through to
255.255.255.255. Each IPv4 address consists of a network number, an optional
subnetwork number, and a host number. The network and subnetwork numbers together
are used for routing, and the host number is used to address an individual host within the
network or subnetwork.
Internet Protocol
version 6 (IPv6)
An update version of IPv4, which is designed by the Internet Engineering Task Force
(IETF) and is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). It is a new version of the Internet
Protocol. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while
an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
Internet service
provider (ISP)
An organization that offers users access to the Internet and related services.
inbound Data transmission from the external link to the router for the routers that support the
NetStream feature.
indicator Description of a performance feature collected from the managed devices by the
performance collector.
indoor unit (IDU) The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing,
multiplexing/demultiplexing, and intermediate frequency (IF) processing for services.
input jitter tolerance The measure of a receiver's ability to tolerate jitter on an incoming waveform.
insertion loss The loss of power that results from inserting a component, such as a connector, coupler,
or splice, into a previously continuous path.
integrated circuit (IC) A combination of inseparable associated circuit elements that are formed in place and
interconnected on or within a single base material to perform a microcircuit function.
intelligent power
adjustment (IPA)
A technology that reduces the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacent
regeneration section in the upstream to a safe level if the system detects the loss of optical
signals on the link. IPA helps ensure that maintenance engineers are not injured by the
laser escaping from a broken fiber or a connector that is not plugged in properly.
interleaving A process of systematically changing the bit sequence of a digital signal, usually as part
of the channel coding, in order to reduce the influence of error bursts that may occur
during transmission.
intermediate frequency
(IF)
The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF
signal.
inverse multiplexing
over ATM (IMA)
A technique that involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a
cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate
is approximately the sum of the link rates.
J
jitter The measure of short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and
control system instability.
jumper A connection wire for connecting two pins.
K
353
K byte A general designation of K1 byte and K2 byte in the SDH.
L
L2 switching The switching based on the data link layer.
L2VPN Layer 2 virtual private network
LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol.
LACPDU Link Aggregation Control Protocol data unit
LAG See link aggregation group.
LAN See local area network.
LAPS Link Access Protocol-SDH
LB See loopback.
LBM See loopback message.
LBR See loopback reply.
LC Lucent connector
LCAS See link capacity adjustment scheme.
LCN local communications network
LCT local craft terminal
LDP Label Distribution Protocol
LED See light emitting diode.
LER See label edge router.
LIFO See last in first out.
LIU logical interface unit
LL logical link
LLC See logical link control.
LLID local loopback ID
LM See loss measurement.
LOC loss of continuity
LOM loss of multiframe
LOP loss of pointer
LOS See loss of signal.
LP lower order path
LPA lower order path adaptation
LPF See low-pass filter.
LPT link-state pass through
LSP See label switched path.
354
LSR See label switching router.
LT linktrace
LTM See linktrace message.
LTR See linktrace reply.
LU line unit
Layer 2 switching A data forwarding method. In a LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch
transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address
is at the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called Layer 2
switching.
Link Aggregation
Control Protocol
(LACP)
A dynamic link aggregation protocol that improves the transmission speed and
reliability. The two ends of the link send LACP packets to inform each other of their
parameters and form a logical aggregation link. After the aggregation link is formed,
LACP maintains the link status in real time and dynamically adjusts the ports on the
aggregation link upon detecting the failure of a physical port.
label A short identifier that is of fixed length and local significance. It is used to uniquely
identify the FEC to which a packet belongs. It does not contain topology information. It
is carried in the header of a packet and does not contain topology information.
label distribution Packets with the same destination address belong to an FEC. A label out of an MPLS
label resource pool is allocated to the FEC. LSRs record the relationship of the label and
the FEC. Then, LSRs sends a message and advertises to upstream LSRs about the label
and FEC relationship in message. The process is called label distribution.
label edge router (LER) A device that sits at the edge of an MPLS domain, that uses routing information to assign
labels to datagrams and then forwards them into the MPLS domain.
label space Value range of the label allocated to peers.
label switched path
(LSP)
A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label
switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on
common routing mechanisms or through configuration.
label switching router
(LSR)
Basic element of an MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is
composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for
allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and
removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups
received in the label forwarding table.
laser A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser
light has better coherence than ordinary light. Semi-conductor lasers provide the light
used in a fiber system.
last in first out (LIFO) A play mode of the voice mails, the last voice mail is played firstly.
layer A concept used to allow transport network functionality to be described hierarchically
as successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transfer
of its characteristic information.
license A permission that the vendor provides for the user with a specific function, capacity, and
duration of a product. A license can be a file or a serial number. Usually the license
consists of encrypted codes. The operation authority granted varies with the level of the
license.
355
light emitting diode
(LED)
A display and lighting technology used in almost every electrical and electronic product
on the market, from a tiny on/off light to digital readouts, flashlights, traffic lights, and
perimeter lighting. LEDs are also used as the light source in multimode fibers, optical
mice, and laser printers.
line rate The maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of line rate equals the
maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.
linear MSP linear multiplex section protection
link aggregation group
(LAG)
An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link
aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were
a single link.
link capacity
adjustment scheme
(LCAS)
LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a
control mechanism to hitless increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the
bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links
that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation,
increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the
responsibility of the network and element management systems.
link monitoring A mechanism for an interface to notify the peer of the fault when the interface detects
that the number of errored frames, errored codes, or errored frame seconds reaches or
exceeds the specified threshold.
link protection Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link is
a downstream link adjacent to the point of local repair (PLR). When the PLR fails to
provide node protection, the link protection should be provided.
linktrace message
(LTM)
The message sent by the initiator MEP of 802.1ag MAC Trace to the destination MEP.
LTM includes the Time to Live (TTL) and the MAC address of the destination MEP2.
linktrace reply (LTR) For 802.1ag MAC Trace, the destination MEP replies with a response message to the
source MEP after the destination MEP receives the LTM, and the response message is
called LTR. LTR also includes the TTL that equals the result of the TTL of LTM minus
1.
load balancing The distribution of activity across two or more servers or components in order to avoid
overloading any one with too many requests or too much traffic.
loading A process of importing information from the storage device to the memory to facilitate
processing (when the information is data) or execution (when the information is
program).
local MEP An MEP of a device on a network enabled with Ethernet CFM.
local area network
(LAN)
A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square
kilometers or within a single building, featuring high speed and low error rate. Current
LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and run at 1,000
Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
logical interface An interface that does not exist physically and comes into being through configuration.
It can also exchange data.
logical link control
(LLC)
According to the IEEE 802 family of standards, Logical Link Control (LLC) is the upper
sublayer of the OSI data link layer. The LLC is the same for the various physical media
(such as Ethernet, token ring, WLAN).
356
loopback (LB) A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the
signal or message can be analyzed for errors. The loopback can be a inloop or outloop.
loopback message
(LBM)
The loopback packet sent by the node that supports 802.2ag MAC Ping to the destination
node. LBM message carries its own sending time.
loopback reply (LBR) A response message involved in the 802.2ag MAC Ping function, with which the
destination MEP replies to the source MEP after the destination MEP receives the LBM.
The LBR carries the sending time of LBM, the receiving time of LBM and the sending
time of LBR.
loss measurement (LM) A method used to collect counter values applicable for ingress and egress service frames
where the counters maintain a count of transmitted and received data frames between a
pair of MEPs.
loss of signal (LOS) No transitions occurring in the received signal.
low-pass filter (LPF) A filter designed to transmit electromagnetic frequencies below a certain value, while
excluding those of a higher frequency.
lower threshold A lower performance limit which when exceeded by a performance event counter will
trigger a threshold-crossing event.
M
MA maintenance association
MAC See Media Access Control.
MAC address A link layer address or physical address. It is six bytes long.
MAC address aging A function that deletes MAC address entries of a device when no packets are received
from this device within a specified time period.
MADM multiple add/drop multiplexer
MAN See metropolitan area network.
MBS maximum burst size
MCF message communication function
MCR minimum cell rate
MD See maintenance domain.
MDP message dispatch process
ME See maintenance entity.
MEG maintenance entity group
MEL maintenance entity group level
MEP See maintenance entity group end point.
MFAS See multiframe alignment signal.
MIP See maintenance entity group intermediate point.
MLD See multicast listener discovery.
MP maintenance point
357
MPID maintenance point identification
MPLS See Multiprotocol Label Switching.
MPLS TE multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering
MPLS VPN See multiprotocol label switching virtual private network.
MS multiplex section
MSA multiplex section adaptation
MSB most significant bit
MSOH multiplex section overhead
MSP See multiplex section protection.
MST See multiplex section termination.
MST region See Multiple Spanning Tree region.
MSTI See multiple spanning tree instance.
MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.
MTBF See mean time between failures.
MTIE maximum time interval error
MTTR See mean time to repair.
MTU See maximum transmission unit.
MUX See multiplexer.
Media Access Control
(MAC)
A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the
data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting
the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol
checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control
information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are
transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC
protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted
correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control
information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol (MSTP)
A protocol that can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks
redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case,
the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The
protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This
solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/
RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
Multiple Spanning
Tree region (MST
region)
A region that consists of switches that support the MSTP in the LAN and links among
them. Switches physically and directly connected and configured with the same MST
region attributes belong to the same MST region.
Multiprotocol Label
Switching (MPLS)
A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link
layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of
IP routing and control protocols.
358
main topology A basic component of a human-machine interface. It is the default client interface of the
NMS and intuitively displays the structure of a network, NEs on the network, subnets in
the network as well as the NE communication and running status, reflecting the overall
network running status.
maintenance domain
(MD)
The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by connectivity
fault management (CFM). The devices in a maintenance domain are managed by a single
Internet service provider (ISP).
maintenance entity
(ME)
An ME consists of a pair of maintenance entity group end points (MEPs), two ends of a
transport trail, and maintenance association intermediate points (MIPs) on the trail.
maintenance entity
group end point (MEP)
An end point of a MEG, which is able to initialize and stop the transmission of OAM
data packets for fault management and performance monitoring.
maintenance entity
group intermediate
point (MIP)
An intermediate point in a MEG, which is able to forward OAM packets and respond to
some OAM packets, but unable to initiate the transmission of OAM packets or perform
any operations on network connections.
management
information
The information that is used for network management in a transport network.
maximum transmission
unit (MTU)
The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies,
depending on the network576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on
Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbit/s token ring. Responsibility for determining the
size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted
across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one
that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks
involved.
mean time between
failures (MTBF)
The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure
of the reliability of the system.
mean time to repair
(MTTR)
The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.
measurement period The interval for NEs to report measurement results to the Network Management System
(NMS).
medium A physical medium for storing computer information. A medium is used for data
duplication and keeping the data for some time. Original data can be obtained from a
medium.
member A basic element for forming a dimension according to the hierarchy of each level. Each
member represents a data element in a dimension. For example, January 1997 is a typical
member of the time dimension.
metropolitan area
network (MAN)
A medium-scale computer network with area larger than that covered by a LAN and
smaller than that covered by a WAN. It interconnects multiple LAN networks in a
geographic region of a city.
microwave The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum with much longer wavelengths than infrared
radiation, typically above about 1 mm.
mirroring The duplication of data for backup or to distribute network traffic among several
computers with identical data.
359
monitoring A method that an inspector uses to inspect a service agent. By monitoring a service agent,
an inspector can check each detailed operation performed by the service agent during
the conversation and operate the GUI used by the service agent. The inspector helps the
service agent to provide better service.
mounting An auxiliary or associated condition or component of a device.
mounting ear A piece of angle plate on a rack. The mounting ear has holes that can be used to fix
network elements or components.
multicast A process of transmitting data packets from one source to many destinations. The
destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address
ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast
group rather than a host.
multicast listener
discovery (MLD)
A protocol used by an IPv6 router to discover the multicast listeners on their directly
connected network segments, and to set up and maintain member relationships. On IPv6
networks, after MLD is configured on the receiver hosts and the multicast router to which
the hosts are directly connected, the hosts can dynamically join related groups and the
multicast router can manage members on the local network.
multiframe alignment
signal (MFAS)
A distinctive signal inserted into every multiframe or once into every n multiframes,
always occupying the same relative position within the multiframe, and used to establish
and maintain multiframe alignment.
multiple spanning tree
instance (MSTI)
A type of spanning trees calculated by MSTP within an MST Region, to provide a simply
and fully connected active topology for frames classified as belonging to a VLAN that
is mapped to the MSTI by the MST Configuration. A VLAN cannot be assigned to
multiple MSTIs.
multiplex section
protection (MSP)
A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and
including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a
"protection" channel.
multiplex section
termination (MST)
A function that generates the multiplex section overhead (MSOH) during the formation
of an SDH frame signal and that terminates the MSOH in the reverse direction.
multiplexer (MUX) Equipment that combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of
aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate channels
being fixed.
multiplexing A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher
order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex
section.
multiprotocol label
switching virtual
private network
(MPLS VPN)
An Internet Protocol (IP) virtual private network (VPN) based on the multiprotocol label
switching (MPLS) technology. It applies the MPLS technology for network routers and
switches, simplifies the routing mode of core routers, and combines traditional routing
technology and label switching technology. It can be used to construct the broadband
Intranet and Extranet to meet various service requirements.
N
N+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection
channel.
NAS network access server
360
NC See NTP client.
NE ID An ID that indicates a managed device in the network. In the network, each NE has a
unique NE ID.
NGN See next generation network.
NHLFE next hop label forwarding entry
NLP normal link pulse
NM network management
NMC network management center
NNI network-to-network interface
NP See network processor.
NPC See network parameter control.
NPE network provider edge
NRT-VBR non-real-time variable bit rate
NRZ non-return to zero
NRZ code non-return-to-zero code
NRZI non-return to zero inverted
NSAP See network service access point.
NSF non-stop forwarding
NTP Network Time Protocol
NTP client (NC) A bottom-level device in the time synchronization network. An NTP client obtains time
from its upper-level NTP server without providing the time synchronization service.
Compared with the top-level NTP server, the intermediate NTP server sometimes is
called an NTP client.
network layer Layer 3 of the seven-layer OSI model of computer networking. The network layer
provides routing and addressing so that two terminal systems are interconnected. In
addition, the network layer provides congestion control and traffic control. In the TCP/
IP protocol suite, the functions of the network layer are specified and implemented by
IP protocols. Therefore, the network layer is also called IP layer.
network parameter
control (NPC)
During communications, UPC is implemented to monitor the actual traffic on each virtual
circuit that is input to the network. Once the specified parameter is exceeded, measures
will be taken to control. NPC is similar to UPC in function. The difference is that the
incoming traffic monitoring function is divided into UPC and NPC according to their
positions. UPC locates at the user/network interface, while NPC at the network interface.
network processor (NP) An integrated circuit which has a feature set specifically targeted at the networking
application domain. Network Processors are typically software programmable devices
and would have generic characteristics similar to general purpose CPUs that are
commonly used in many different types of equipment and products.
network segment Part of a network on which all message traffic is common to all nodes; that is, a message
broadcast from one node on the segment is received by all other nodes on the segment.
network service A service that needs to be enabled at the network layer and maintained as a basic service.
361
network service access
point (NSAP)
A network address defined by ISO, at which the OSI Network Service is made available
to a Network service user by the Network service provider.
network storm A phenomenon that occurs during data communication. To be specific, mass broadcast
packets are transmitted in a short time; the network is congested; transmission quality
and availability of the network decrease rapidly. The network storm is caused by network
connection or configuration problems.
next generation
network (NGN)
A packet-based network aimed to address requirement of various services. It adopts an
integrated and open network framework. In NGN, services are separated from call
control; call control is separated from bearer. In this way, services are independent of
network. NGN can provide various services, such as voice services, data services,
multimedia services or the integration of several services.
noise figure A measure of degradation of the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), caused by components in
a radio frequency (RF) signal chain. The noise figure is defined as the ratio of the output
noise power of a device to the portion thereof attributable to thermal noise in the input
termination at standard noise temperature T0 (usually 290 K). The noise figure is thus
the ratio of actual output noise to that which would remain if the device itself did not
introduce noise. It is a number by which the performance of a radio receiver can be
specified.
non-GNE See non-gateway network element.
non-gateway network
element (non-GNE)
A network element that communicates with the NM application layer through the
gateway NE application layer.
O
O&M operation and maintenance
OA optical amplifier
OADM See optical add/drop multiplexer.
OAM See operation, administration and maintenance.
OAMPDU operation, administration and maintenance protocol data unit
OAU See optical amplifier unit.
OC ordinary clock
OCP optical channel protection
OCS optical core switching
ODF optical distribution frame
ODU See outdoor unit.
OFS out-of-frame second
OHA overhead access
OHP overhead processing
OLT optical line terminal
ONU See optical network unit.
OPEX operating expense
362
OPU optical channel payload unit
OSC See optical supervisory channel.
OSN optical switch node
OSNR See optical signal-to-noise ratio.
OSPF See Open Shortest Path First.
OTDR See optical time domain reflectometer.
OTM optical terminal multiplexer
OTN optical transport network
OTU See optical transponder unit.
OTUk optical channel transport unit - k
Open Shortest Path
First (OSPF)
A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing that uses
cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed of the network topology,
which is identical on all routers in the area.
offline Pertaining to the disconnection between a device or a service unit and the system or the
network, or no running of a device and service unit.
online A state indicating that a computer device or program is activated and is ready for
operations, and can communicate with a computer or can be controlled by the computer.
operation,
administration and
maintenance (OAM)
A set of network management functions that cover fault detection, notification, location,
and repair.
optical add/drop
multiplexer (OADM)
A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel
and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel.
optical amplifier unit
(OAU)
A board that is mainly responsible for amplifying optical signals. The OAU can be used
in both the transmitting direction and the receiving direction.
optical attenuator A passive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. An optical attenuator is
used to ensure that the optical power of a signal at the receive end is not excessively
high.
optical connector A component attached to the end of an optical fiber that allows the fiber to connect to
another fiber or an optical source.
optical fiber A thin filament of glass or other transparent material, through which a signal-encoded
light beam may be transmitted using total internal reflection.
optical interface A component that connects several transmit or receive units.
optical network unit
(ONU)
A form of Access Node that converts optical signals transmitted via fiber to electrical
signals that can be transmitted via coaxial cable or twisted pair copper wiring to
individual subscribers.
optical signal-to-noise
ratio (OSNR)
The ratio of signal power to noise power in a transmission link. OSNR is the most
important index for measuring the performance of a DWDM system.
363
optical splitter A passive component, which is used for splitting and sending optical power to multiple
ONUs connected by an optical fiber. In a GPON system that consists of the OLT, ONU,
splitter, and optical fibers, according to the split ratio, the optical signal over the optical
fiber connected to the OLT is splitted into multiple channels of optical signals and send
each channel to each ONU. Split ratio determines how many channels of optical signals
an optical fiber can be split to.
optical supervisory
channel (OSC)
A technology that uses specific optical wavelengths to realize communication among
nodes in optical transmission network and transmit the monitoring data in a certain
channel.
optical time domain
reflectometer (OTDR)
A device that sends a series of short pulses of light down a fiber-optic cable and measures
the strength of the return pulses. An OTDR is used to measure fiber length and light loss,
and to locate fiber faults.
optical transponder
unit (OTU)
A device or subsystem that converts accessed client signals into a G.694.1/G.694.2-
compliant WDM wavelength.
orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or
maintenance engineers of different stations.
outdoor unit (ODU) The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequency
conversion and amplification for radio frequency (RF) signals.
P
P2MP point-to-multipoint
P2P See point-to-point service.
PA power amplifier
PADR PPPoE active discovery request
PBS See peak burst size.
PCB See printed circuit board.
PCM See pulse code modulation.
PCR See peak cell rate.
PCS physical coding sublayer
PDH See plesiochronous digital hierarchy.
PDU See power distribution unit.
PE See provider edge.
PGND cable A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, one
half of the cable is yellow, whereas the other half is green.
PHB See per-hop behavior.
PIM-DM Protocol Independent Multicast - Dense Mode
PIM-SM Protocol Independent Multicast - Sparse Mode
PKT partition knowledge table
PLL See phase-locked loop.
364
PM performance monitoring
PMD polarization mode dispersion
POH path overhead
POS See packet over SDH/SONET.
PPD partial packet discard
PPI PDH physical interface
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
PPPoE Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
PPS port protection switching
PQ See priority queuing.
PRBS See pseudo random binary sequence.
PRC primary reference clock
PSD See power spectrum density.
PSN See packet switched network.
PSTN See public switched telephone network.
PSU power supply unit
PT payload type
PTI payload type indicator
PTN packet transport network
PTP Precision Time Protocol
PVC permanent virtual channel
PVID See port default VLAN ID.
PVP See permanent virtual path.
PW See pseudo wire.
PWE3 See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge.
packet discarding A function of discarding the packets from unknown VLAN domain or broadcast packets.
Packet Discarding is used to prevent the situation where unknown packets or broadcast
packets use the bandwidth on a link, improving the reliability of service transmission.
packet forwarding An action performed by a router to forward a received datagram, where the destination
IP address does not match the IP address of the router, to another router or destination
host on the router list.
packet loss The discarding of data packets in a network when a device is overloaded and cannot
accept any incoming data at a given moment.
packet over SDH/
SONET (POS)
A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The POS
interface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the transport of
packet data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN.
365
packet rate The number of bits or bytes passed within a specified time. It is expressed in bits/s or
bytes/s.
packet switched
network (PSN)
A telecommunications network that works in packet switching mode.
packet switching A network technology in which information is transmitted by means of exchanging
packets and the bandwidth of a channel can be shared by multiple connections.
paired slots Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on the
backplane.
parity bit A check bit appended to an array of binary digits to make the sum of all the binary digits,
including the check bit, always odd or always even.
parity check A method for character level error detection. An extra bit is added to a string of bits,
usually a 7-bit ASCII character, so that the total number of bits 1 is odd or even (odd or
even parity). Both ends of a data transmission must use the same parity. When the
transmitting device frames a character, it counts the numbers of 1s in the frame and
attaches the appropriate parity bit. The recipient counts the 1s and, if there is parity error,
may ask for the data to be retransmitted.
parts replacement A maintenance operation of removing a faulty part or a part to be examined from a
running device and then installing a new part.
passive mode A working mode of EFM OAM. An interface in the passive mode cannot initiate the
discovery and remote loopback.
patch An independent software unit used for fixing the bugs in software.
peak burst size (PBS) A parameter that defines the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst IP
packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate.
peak cell rate (PCR) The maximum rate at which an ATM connection can accept cells.
peer BGP speakers that exchange information with each other.
per-hop behavior
(PHB)
IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop
behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network should
select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETF
defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF),
assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).
performance alarm An alarm generated when the actual result of a measurement entity equals the predefined
logical expression for threshold or exceeds the predefined threshold.
performance
parameters
The performance parameters identify some indexes to scale the general performance of
the system. The indexes include the number of managed nodes, number of supported
clients and log database capacity. The parameters are sorted into static parameters,
dynamic parameters and networking bandwidth parameters.
performance register The memory space for performance event counts, including 15-min current performance
register, 24-hour current performance register, 15-min historical performance register,
24-hour historical performance register, UAT register and CSES register. The object of
performance event monitoring is the board functional module, so every board functional
module has a performance register. A performance register is used to count the
performance events taking place within a period of operation time, so as to evaluate the
quality of operation from the angle of statistics.
366
performance threshold A limit for generating an alarm for a selected entity. When the measurement result
reaches or exceeds the preset alarm threshold, the performance management system
generates a performance alarm.
permanent virtual path
(PVP)
Virtual path that consists of PVCs.
phase The relative position in time within a single period of a signal.
phase-locked loop
(PLL)
A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector that compares the frequency of a
voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or reference-
frequency generator. The output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop filter,
is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with the
incoming or reference frequency.
physical layer Layer 1 in the Open System Interconnection (OSI) architecture; the layer that provides
services to transmit bits or groups of bits over a transmission link between open systems
and which entails electrical, mechanical and handshaking.
physical link The link between two physical network elements (NEs). When the user creates NEs or
refreshes the device status, the system automatically creates the physical link according
to the topology structure information on the device. The remark information of a physical
link can be modified, but the physical link cannot be deleted.
ping A method used to test whether a device in the IP network is reachable according to the
sent ICMP Echo messages and received response messages.
ping test A test that is performed to send a data packet to the target IP address (a unique IP address
on the device on the network) to check whether the target host exists according to the
data packet of the same size returned from the target host.
plesiochronous digital
hierarchy (PDH)
A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum
rate 64 kit/s into rates of 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s.
point-to-point service
(P2P)
A service between two terminal users. In P2P services, senders and recipients are
terminal users.
pointer An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect to
the frame reference of the transport entity on which this pointer is supported.
polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed or
rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is
perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called vertically
polarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the
plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the
tip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this
electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.
policy A set of rules that are applied when the conditions for triggering an event are met.
policy template A template that is used to define the calculation rules of a charging event, for example,
rating, debiting and accumulating. A policy template may contain the parameters to be
instantiated. They can be used when the attributes of the condition judgment, calculation
method, and action functions are carried out.
polling A mechanism for the NMS to query the agent status and other data on a regular basis.
port default VLAN ID
(PVID)
A default VLAN ID of a port. It is allocated to a data frame if the data frame carries no
VLAN tag when reaching the port.
367
port priority The priority that is used when a port attaches tags to Layer 2 packets. Packets received
on ports with higher priorities are forwarded preferentially.
power adjustment A method for dynamically and properly assigning power according to the real-time status
of a wireless network. When an AP runs under an AC for the first time, the AP uses its
maximum transmit power. When getting reports from its neighbors (that is, other APs
that are detected by the AP and managed by the same AC), the AP determines to increase
or decrease its power according to the report conclusion.
power box A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies
power for the subracks in the cabinet.
power control A process in which the MS or BS uses certain rules to adjust and control the transmit
power according to the change in the channel condition and the power of the received
signal.
power distribution unit
(PDU)
A unit that performs AC or DC power distribution.
power module The module that converts the external power input into the power supply for internal
use. Power modules are classified into AC power modules and DC power modules.
power off An operation that switches off devices during upgrade or expansion.
power on To start up a computer; to begin a cold boot procedure; to turn on the power
power spectrum
density (PSD)
The power layout of random signals in the frequency domain.
printed circuit board
(PCB)
A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components
using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto
a non-conductive substrate.
priority queuing (PQ) A queue scheduling algorithm based on the absolute priority. According to the PQ
algorithm, services of higher priorities are ensured with greater bandwidth, lower
latency, and less jitter. Packets of lower priorities must wait to be sent till all packets of
higher priorities are sent. In this manner, services of higher priorities are processed earlier
than others.
private line A line, such as a subscriber cable and trunk cable, which are leased by the
telecommunication carrier and are used to meet the special user requirements.
protection path A path in a protection group that transports services when a fault occurs on the working
path.
provider edge (PE) A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is
responsible for managing VPN users, establishing LSPs between PEs, and exchanging
routing information between sites of the same VPN. A PE performs the mapping and
forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. A PE can be
a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
pseudo random binary
sequence (PRBS)
A sequence that is random in the sense that the value of each element is independent of
the values of any of the other elements, similar to a real random sequence.
pseudo wire (PW) An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established
and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is
maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.
368
pseudo wire emulation
edge-to-edge (PWE3)
An end-to-end Layer 2 transmission technology. It emulates the essential attributes of a
telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a packet switched network
(PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed time division
multiplexing (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real
situation.
public switched
telephone network
(PSTN)
A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the public
subscribers. Sometimes it is called POTS.
pulse A variation above or below a normal level and a given duration in electrical energy.
pulse code modulation
(PCM)
A method of encoding information in a signal by changing the amplitude of pulses.
Unlike pulse amplitude modulation (PAM), in which pulse amplitude can change
continuously, pulse code modulation limits pulse amplitudes to several predefined
values. Because the signal is discrete, or digital, rather than analog, pulse code
modulation is more immune to noise than PAM.
Q
QA Q adaptation
QAM See quadrature amplitude modulation.
QPSK See quadrature phase shift keying.
QinQ A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It add a public VLAN
tag to a frame with a private VLAN tag to allow the frame with double VLAN tags to
be transmitted over the service provider's backbone network based on the public VLAN
tag. This provides a layer 2 VPN tunnel for customers and enables transparent
transmission of packets over private VLANs.
QoS See quality of service.
quadrature amplitude
modulation (QAM)
Both an analog and a digital modulation scheme. It conveys two analog message signals,
or two digital bit streams, by changing (modulating) the amplitudes of two carrier waves,
using the amplitude-shift keying (ASK) digital modulation scheme or amplitude
modulation (AM) analog modulation scheme. These two waves, usually sinusoids, are
out of phase with each other by 90 and are thus called quadrature carriers or quadrature
components hence the name of the scheme.
quadrature phase shift
keying (QPSK)
A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation and
the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period
or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots are
evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform two-
bit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER.
quality of service (QoS) A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel.
Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss
ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the
transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a
service provider to meet the demands of users.
R
RADIUS See Remote Authentication Dial In User Service.
369
RAI remote alarm indication
RDI remote defect indication
RED See random early detection.
REG See regenerator.
REI remote error indication
RF See radio frequency.
RIP See Routing Information Protocol.
RMEP remote maintenance association end point
RNC See radio network controller.
ROPA See remote optical pumping amplifier.
RP rendezvous point
RPR resilient packet ring
RS232 See Reference Standard 232.
RS422 The specification that defines the electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digital
interface circuits. The interface can change to RS232 via the hardware jumper and others
are the same as RS232.
RSL See received signal level.
RSOH regenerator section overhead
RSSI See received signal strength indicator.
RST regenerator section termination
RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.
RTN radio transmission node
RTP See Real-Time Transport Protocol.
Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol (RSTP)
An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) that provides faster spanning tree
convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with
the STP protocol.
Real-Time Transport
Protocol (RTP)
A protocol defined by the IETF for transmitting audio and video streams. RTP is based
on UDP. In the RTP header, a time stamp is defined to ensure that audio and video data
can be transmitted and synchronized in real time. H.323 is based on RTP.
Reference Standard
232 (RS232)
A standard that defines the electrical characteristics, timing, and meaning of signals, and
the physical size and pinout of connectors.
Remote Authentication
Dial In User Service
(RADIUS)
A security service that authenticates and authorizes dial-up users and is a centralized
access control mechanism. RADIUS uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) as its
transmission protocol to ensure real-time quality. RADIUS also supports the
retransmission and multi-server mechanisms to ensure good reliability.
RoHS restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances
370
Routing Information
Protocol (RIP)
A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route
based on the smallest hop count between the source and destination. RIP is a distance
vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers
and is known to waste bandwidth.
radio frequency (RF) A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an
electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave.
The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The AC
with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classified
into such high-frequency current.
radio network
controller (RNC)
A device in a radio network subsystem that is in charge of controlling the usage and
integrity of radio resources.
radio propagation
model
An empirical mathematical formulation for the characterization of radio wave
propagation as a function of frequency, distance and other conditions. A single model is
usually developed to predict the behavior of propagation for all similar links under
similar constraints.
random early detection
(RED)
A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according
to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronization
resulting from traditional tail drop can be prevented.
rate limiting A traffic management technology used to limit the total rate of packet sending on a
physical interface or a Tunnel interface. Rate limiting is directly enabled on the interface
to control the traffic passing the interface.
real-time variable bit
rate (rt-VBR)
A parameter intended for real-time applications, such as compressed voice over IP
(VoIP) and video conferencing. The rt-VBR is characterized by a peak cell rate (PCR),
sustained cell rate (SCR), and maximum burst size (MBS). You can expect the source
device to transmit in bursts and at a rate that varies with time.
reboot To start the system again. Programs or data will be reloaded to all boards.
received signal level
(RSL)
The signal level at a receiver input terminal.
received signal strength
indicator (RSSI)
The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the
receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDD
within a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna
receiver sensitivity The minimum acceptable value of mean received power at point Rn (a reference point
at an input to a receiver optical connector) to achieve a 1x10-12 BER when the FEC is
enabled.
recognition Consumer awareness of having seen or heard an advertising message.
reference clock A stable and high-precision autonomous clock that provides frequencies as a reference
for other clocks.
reflectance The ratio of the reflected optical power to the incident optical power.
regeneration The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes,
waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits.
regenerator (REG) A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals.
371
relay An electronic control device that has a control system and a system to be controlled. The
relay of the telepresence system is used to control the power of telepresence equipment
and is controlled by the telepresence host.
remote optical
pumping amplifier
(ROPA)
A remote optical amplifier subsystem designed for applications where power supply and
monitoring systems are unavailable. The ROPA subsystem is a power compensation
solution to the ultra-long distance long hop (LHP) transmission.
reservation An action that the charging module performs to freeze a subscriber's balance amount,
free resources, credits, or quotas before the subscriber uses services. This action ensures
that the subscriber has sufficient balance to pay for services.
resistance The ability to impede (resist) the flow of electric current. With the exception of
superconductors, all substances have a greater or lesser degree of resistance. Substances
with very low resistance, such as metals, conduct electricity well and are called
conductors. Substances with very high resistance, such as glass and rubber, conduct
electricity poorly and are called nonconductors or insulators.
resource sharing A physical resource belonging to two or more protection subnetworks.
response A message that is returned to the requester to notify the requester of the status of the
request packet.
robustness The ability of a system to maintain function even with changes in internal structure or
external environment.
rollback A return to a previous condition through cancellation of a certain operation.
root alarm An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. Some lower-level
alarms always accompany a root alarm.
route The path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. Routes can change
dynamically.
router A device on the network layer that selects routes in the network. The router selects the
optimal route according to the destination address of the received packet through a
network and forwards the packet to the next router. The last router is responsible for
sending the packet to the destination host. Can be used to connect a LAN to a LAN, a
WAN to a WAN, or a LAN to the Internet.
routing The determination of a path that a data unit (frame, packet, message) traverses from
source to destination.
routing protocol A formula used by routers to determine the appropriate path onto which data should be
forwarded.
rt-VBR See real-time variable bit rate.
S
372
S1 byte A byte to transmit network synchronization status information. On an SDH network,
each NE traces hop by hop to the same clock reference source through a specific clock
synchronization path, realizing synchronization on the entire network. If a clock
reference source traced by an NE is missing, this NE will trace another clock reference
source of a lower level. To implement protection switching of clocks in the whole
network, the NE must learn about clock quality information of the clock reference source
it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte to transmit network synchronization status
information. It uses the lower four bits of the multiplex section overhead S1 byte to
indicate 16 types of synchronization quality grades. Auto protection switching of clocks
in a synchronous network can be implemented using S1 byte and a proper switching
protocol.
SAN storage area network
SAToP Structure-Agnostic Time Division Multiplexing over Packet
SC square connector
SCR sustainable cell rate
SD See signal degrade.
SD trigger flag A signal degrade trigger flag that determines whether to perform a switching when SD
occurs. The SD trigger flag can be set by using the network management system.
SD-SDI See standard definition-serial digital interface signal.
SDH See synchronous digital hierarchy.
SDP serious disturbance period
SDRAM See synchronous dynamic random access memory.
SELV safety extra-low voltage
SEMF synchronous equipment management function
SES severely errored second
SETS SDH equipment timing source
SF See signal fail.
SFP small form-factor pluggable
SFTP See Secure File Transfer Protocol.
SHDSL See single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line.
SMSR side mode suppression ratio
SNC subnetwork connection
SNCMP subnetwork connection multipath protection
SNCP subnetwork connection protection
SNCTP subnetwork connection tunnel protection
SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol.
SNR See signal-to-noise ratio.
SOH section overhead
373
SONET See synchronous optical network.
SPE See superstratum provider edge.
SSL See Secure Sockets Layer.
SSM See Synchronization Status Message.
SSMB synchronization status message byte
SSU synchronization supply unit
STD system target decoder
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
SVC switched virtual connection
Secure File Transfer
Protocol (SFTP)
A network protocol designed to provide secure file transfer over SSH.
Secure Sockets Layer
(SSL)
A security protocol that works at a socket level. This layer exists between the TCP layer
and the application layer to encrypt/decode data and authenticate concerned entities.
Simple Network
Management Protocol
(SNMP)
A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify
the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the
transmission of management information between any two points. The polling
mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which
can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the
network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control
information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
Synchronization Status
Message (SSM)
A message that carries the quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link.
SSM messages provide upstream clock information to nodes on an SDH network or
synchronization network.
security Protection of a computer system and its data from harm or loss. A major focus of
computer security, especially on systems accessed by many people or through
communication lines, is preventing system access by unauthorized individuals.
security service A service, provided by a layer of communicating open systems, which ensures adequate
security of the systems or of data transfer.
self-healing A function of establishing a replacement connection by network without the network
management connection function. When a connection failure occurs, the replacement
connection is found by the network elements and rerouted depending on network
resources available at that time.
serial port An input/output location (channel) that sends and receives data to and from a computer's
CPU or a communications device one bit at a time. Serial ports are used for serial data
communication and as interfaces with some peripheral devices, such as mice and printers.
service flow An MAC-layer-based unidirectional transmission service. It is used to transmit data
packets, and is characterized by a set of QoS parameters, such as latency, jitter, and
throughput.
service level The level of service quality of an evaluated party in a specified period, determined by
an evaluating party.
service protection A measure that ensures that services can be received at the receive end.
374
session A logical connection between two nodes on a network for the exchange of data. It
generally can apply to any link between any two data devices. A session is also used
simply to describe the connection time.
shaping A process of delaying packets within a traffic stream to cause it to conform to specific
defined traffic profile.
signal degrade (SD) A signal indicating that associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect
condition is active.
signal fail (SF) A signal indicating that associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect
condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
signal-to-noise ratio
(SNR)
The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a
given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and
is usually expressed in dB.
signaling The information exchange concerning the establishment and control of a
telecommunication circuit and the management of the network.
single-ended switching A protection mechanism that takes switching action only at the affected end of the
protected entity in the case of a unidirectional failure.
single-pair high-speed
(SHDSL)
A symmetric digital subscriber line technology developed from HDSL, SDSL, and
HDSL2, which is defined in ITU-T G.991.2. The SHDSL port is connected to the user
terminal through the plain telephone subscriber line and uses trellis coded pulse
amplitude modulation (TC-PAM) technology to transmit high-speed data and provide
the broadband access service.
single-polarized
antenna
An antenna intended to radiate or receive radio waves with only one specified
polarization.
slicing Dividing data into the information units proper for transmission.
smooth upgrade Process of upgrading the system files without service interruption
span The physical reach between two pieces of WDM equipment.
standard definition-
serial digital interface
signal (SD-SDI)
Standard definition video signal transported by serial digital interface.
static ARP A protocol that binds some IP addresses to a specified gateway. The packet of these IP
addresses must be forwarded through this gateway.
static route A route that cannot adapt to the change of network topology. Operators must configure
it manually. When a network topology is simple, the network can work in the normal
state if only the static route is configured. It can improve network performance and ensure
bandwidth for important applications. Its disadvantage is as follows: When a network is
faulty or the topology changes, the static route does not change automatically. It must
be changed by the operators.
statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be
transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to
active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices
to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques.
375
steering A protection switching mode defined in ITU-T G.8132, which is applicable to packet-
based T-MPLS ring networks and similar to SDH transoceanic multiplex section
protection (MSP). In this mode, the switching is triggered by the source and sink nodes
of a service.
stress The force, or combination of forces, which produces a strain; force exerted in any
direction or manner between contiguous bodies, or parts of bodies, and taking specific
names according to its direction, or mode of action, as thrust or pressure, pull or tension,
shear or tangential stress.
subnet A type of smaller networks that form a larger network according to a rule, for example,
according to different districts. This facilitates the management of the large network.
subnet mask The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are
destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the device and is matched
with the IP address.
superstratum provider
edge (SPE)
Core devices that are located within a VPLS full-meshed network. The UPE devices that
are connected with the SPE devices are similar to the CE devices. The PWs set up
between the UPE devices and the SPE devices serve as the ACs of the SPE devices. The
SPE devices must learn the MAC addresses of all the sites on UPE side and those of the
UPE interfaces that are connected with the SPE. SPE is sometimes called NPE.
switching capacity The backplane bandwidth or switching bandwidth. The switching capacity is the
maximum data that can be processed by the interface processor of a switch and the data
bus. The backplane bandwidth indicates the overall data switching capability of a switch,
in Gbit/s.
switching priority A priority assigned to boards that share protection. If multiple boards that are sharing
protection fail, the services of the board with the highest priority are switched to the
protection board. If two or more boards have the same priority, the services of whichever
board fails first are switched.
synchronous digital
hierarchy (SDH)
A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. SDH defines the
transmission features of digital signals, such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,
transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-
ISDN.
synchronous dynamic
random access memory
(SDRAM)
A new type of DRAM that can run at much higher clock speeds than conventional
memory. SDRAM actually synchronizes itself with the CPU's bus and is capable of
running at 100 MHz, about three times faster than conventional FPM RAM, and about
twice as fast as EDO DRAM or BEDO DRAM. SDRAM is replacing EDO DRAM in
computers.
synchronous optical
network (SONET)
A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications carriers to
connect networks based on fiber optical cable. SONET is designed to handle multiple
data types (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of 51.84 Mbit/s, but
multiples of this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbit/s.
T
TCI tag control information
TCM tandem connection monitor
TCN topology change notification
376
TCP See Transmission Control Protocol.
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TDC tunable dispersion compensator
TDM See time division multiplexing.
TE terminal equipment
TFTP See Trivial File Transfer Protocol.
TIM trace identifier mismatch
TLV See type-length-value.
TM See terminal multiplexer.
TMN See telecommunications management network.
TOD time of day
TPID tag protocol identifier
TPS See tributary protection switching.
TPS protection The equipment level protection that uses one standby tributary board to protect N
tributary boards. When a fault occurs on the working board, the SCC issues the switching
command, and the payload of the working board can be automatically switched over to
the specified protection board and the protection board takes over as the working board.
After the fault is rectified, the service is automatically switched to the original board.
TSD trail signal degrade
TTI trail trace identifier
TTL See time to live.
TTSI See trail termination source identifier.
TU tributary unit
TU-LOP tributary unit loss of pointer
TUG tributary unit group
Tc committed rate measurement interval
Telnet A standard terminal emulation protocol in the TCP/IP protocol stack. Telnet allows users
to log in to remote systems and use resources as if they were connected to a local system.
Telnet is defined in RFC 854.
Transmission Control
Protocol (TCP)
The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to
be sent using Internet Protocol (IP), and the reassembly and verification of the complete
messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable
in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in
the ISO/OSI reference model.
Trivial File Transfer
Protocol (TFTP)
A small and simple alternative to FTP for transferring files. TFTP is intended for
applications that do not need complex interactions between the client and server. TFTP
restricts operations to simple file transfers and does not provide authentication.
377
tail drop A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded when
the queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-wide
synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism.
tangent ring A concept borrowed from geometry. Two tangent rings have a common node between
them. The common node often leads to single-point failures.
telecommunications
management network
(TMN)
A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications
network. TMN manages the planning, provisioning, installation, and OAM of
equipment, networks, and services.
terminal multiplexer
(TM)
A device used at a network terminal either to multiplex multiple channels of low rate
signals into one channel of high rate signals, or to demultiplex one channel of high rate
signals into multiple channels of low rate signals.
threshold A limitation on an amount, scale, or level. Changes will occur when a threshold is
reached.
threshold alarm The alarm occurs when the monitored value exceeds the threshold.
throughput The maximum transmission rate of the tested object (system, equipment, connection,
service type) when no packet is discarded. Throughput can be measured with bandwidth.
throughput capability The data input/output capability of the data transmission interface.
time division
multiplexing (TDM)
A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots
(TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots
in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over
one channel.
time to live (TTL) A specified period of time for best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets from
looping endlessly.
timer Symbolic representation for a timer object (for example, a timer object may have a
primitive designated as T-Start Request). Various MAC entities utilize timer entities that
provide triggers for certain MAC state transitions.
timestamp The current time of an event that is recorded by a computer. By using mechanisms such
as the Network Time Protocol (NTP), a computer maintains accurate current time,
calibrated to minute fractions of a second.
token bucket algorithm The token bucket is a container for tokens. The capacity of a token bucket is limited, and
the number of tokens determines the traffic rate of permitted packets. The token bucket
polices the traffic. Users place the tokens into the bucket regularly according to the preset
rate. If the tokens in the bucket exceed the capacity, no tokens can be put in. Packets can
be forwarded when the bucket has tokens, otherwise they cannot be transferred till there
are new tokens in the bucket. This scheme adjusts the rate of packet input.
topology The configuration or layout of a network formed by the connections between devices on
a local area network (LAN) or between two or more LANs.
topology discovery A technique to accurately determine the exact layout of a network using a few
assumptions about the network architecture and simple tools.
trTCM See two rate three color marker.
traceroute A program that prints the path to a destination. Traceroute sends a sequence of datagrams
with the time-to-live (TTL) set to 1,2, and so on, and uses ICMP time exceeded messages
that return to determine routers along the path.
378
traffic The product of the number of calls made and received and the average duration of each
call in a measurement period.
traffic classification A function that enables you to classify traffic into different classes with different
priorities according to some criteria. Each class of traffic has a specified QoS in the entire
network. In this way, different traffic packets can be treated differently.
traffic policy A full set of QoS policies formed by association of traffic classification and QoS actions.
traffic shaping A way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guarantee the
performance and minimize the delay. It actively adjusts the output speed of traffic in the
scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layer devices,
avoiding packet loss and congestion.
traffic statistics An activity of measuring and collecting statistics of various data on devices and
telecommunications networks. With the statistics, operators can be aware of the
operating status, signaling, users, system resource usage of the devices or networks. The
statistics also help the operators manage the device operating, locate problems, monitor
and maintain the networks, and plan the networks.
trail management
function
A network level management function of the network management system. This function
enables you to configure end-to-end services, view graphic interface and visual routes
of a trail, query detailed information of a trail, filter, search and locate a trail quickly,
manage and maintain trails in a centralized manner, manage alarms and performance
data by trail, and print a trail report.
trail termination source
identifier (TTSI)
A TTSI uniquely identifies an LSP in the network. A TTSI is carried in the connectivity
verification (CV) packet for checking the connectivity of a trail. If it matches the TTSI
received by the sink point, the trail has no connectivity defect.
transaction Business between the customer and carrier, such as payment, and account adjustment.
transfer A process of transferring the account balance of an account to another account.
transit A packet is transmitted along an LSP consisting of a series of LSRs after the packet is
labeled. The intermediate nodes are named transits.
transit node All the nodes except the master node on an RRPP ring.
transmission delay The period from the time when a site starts to transmit a data frame to the time when the
site finishes the data frame transmission. It consists of the transmission latency and the
equipment forwarding latency.
transmit power control A technical mechanism used within some networking devices in order to prevent too
much unwanted interference between different wireless networks.
transparent
transmission
A process during which the signaling protocol or data is not processed in the content but
encapsulated in the format for the processing of the next phase.
tray A component that can be installed in a cabinet for holding chassis or other components.
tributary loopback A fault can be located for each service path by performing loopback to each path of the
tributary board. There are three kinds of loopback modes: no loopback, outloop, and
inloop.
tributary protection
switching (TPS)
A function that uses a standby tributary processing board to protect N tributary
processing boards.
trunk Physical communications line between two offices. It transports media signals such as
speech, data and video signals.
379
trunk link A link used to transport VLAN communication between two switches.
trunk port A switch port used to connect to other switches. The trunk port can connect to only the
trunk link. Only VLANs allowed to pass through a trunk port can be configured on the
trunk port.
tunnel A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs.
In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel
ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel
is an MPLS tunnel.
tunnel ID A group of information, including the token, slot number of an outgoing interface, tunnel
type, and location method.
twisted pair cable A type of cable that consists of two independently insulated wires twisted around one
another for the purposes of canceling out electromagnetic interference which can cause
crosstalk. The number of twists per meter makes up part of the specifications for a given
type of cable. The greater the number of twists is, the more crosstalk is reduced.
two rate three color
marker (trTCM)
An algorithm that meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates,
Peak Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their
associated burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it
exceeds the PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it
exceeds or does not exceed the CIR.
type-length-value
(TLV)
An encoding type that features high efficiency and expansibility. It is also called Code-
Length-Value (CLV). T indicates that different types can be defined through different
values. L indicates the total length of the value field. V indicates the actual data of the
TLV and is most important. TLV encoding features high expansibility. New TLVs can
be added to support new features, which is flexible in describing information loaded in
packets.
U
UART universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter
UAS unavailable second
UAT See unavailable time event.
UBR unspecified bit rate
UBR+ Unspecified Bit Rate Plus
UDP See User Datagram Protocol.
UNI See user-to-network interface.
UPC See usage parameter control.
UPE user-end provider edge
UPI user payload identifier
UPM uninterruptible power module
UPS uninterruptible power supply
380
User Datagram
Protocol (UDP)
A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a
datagram to an application program on another. UDP uses IP to deliver datagrams. UDP
provides application programs with the unreliable connectionless packet delivery
service. That is, UDP messages may be lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of
order. The destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet
is received.
unavailable time event
(UAT)
An event that is reported when the monitored object generates 10 consecutive severely
errored seconds.
unicast The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient.
unknown multicast
packet
A packet for which no forwarding entry is found in the multicast forwarding table.
uplink A transmission channel through which radio signals or other signals are transmitted to
the central office.
uplink tunnel GTP Tunnel from the Mobile Node to the SGSN.
upper limit A maximum consumption amount that a carrier sets for a subscriber in a bill cycle. If
the consumption amount if a subscriber exceeds the maximum consumption amount, the
OCS system deducts only the maximum consumption amount from the account of the
subscriber.
upstream In an access network, the direction that is far from the subscriber end of the link.
upstream board A board that provides the upstream transmission function. Through an upstream board,
services can be transmitted upstream to the upper-layer device.
usage parameter
control (UPC)
During communications, UPC is implemented to monitor the actual traffic on each virtual
circuit that is input to the network. Once the specified parameter is exceeded, measures
will be taken to control. NPC is similar to UPC in function. The difference is that the
incoming traffic monitoring function is divided into UPC and NPC according to their
positions. UPC locates at the user/network interface, while NPC at the network interface.
user-to-network
interface (UNI)
The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for
example, ATM switches).
V
V-NNI virtual network-network interface
V-UNI See virtual user-network interface.
V.24 The physical layer interface specification between DTE and DCE defined by the ITU-
T. It complies with EIA/TIA-232.
VAS See value-added service.
VB virtual bridge
VBR See variable bit rate.
VC trunk See virtual container trunk.
VCC See virtual channel connection.
VCCV virtual circuit connectivity verification
VCG See virtual concatenation group.
381
VCI virtual channel identifier
VCTRUNK A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal
port of a data service processing board.
VIP very important person
VLAN virtual local area network
VLAN mapping A technology that enables user packets to be transmitted over the public network by
translating private VLAN tags into public VLAN tags. When user packets arrive at the
destination private network, VLAN mapping translates public VLAN tags back into
private VLAN tags. In this manner, user packets are correctly transmitted to the
destination.
VLAN mapping table One of the properties of the MST region, which describes mappings between VLANs
and spanning tree instances.
VLAN stacking A technology that adds a VLAN tag to each incoming packet. The VLAN stacking
technology implements transparent transmission of C-VLANs in the ISP network to
realize the application of Layer 2 Virtual Private Network (VPN).
VP See virtual path.
VPI See virtual path identifier.
VPLS See virtual private LAN service.
VPN virtual private network
VRRP See Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol.
VSI virtual switch interface
Virtual Router
Redundancy Protocol
(VRRP)
A protocol designed for multicast or broadcast LANs such as an Ethernet. A group of
routers (including an active router and several backup routers) in a LAN is regarded as
a virtual router, which is called a backup group. The virtual router has its own IP address.
The host in the network communicates with other networks through this virtual router.
If the active router in the backup group fails, one of the backup routers in this backup
group becomes active and provides routing service for the host in the network.
value-added service
(VAS)
A service provided by carriers and service providers (SPs) together for subscribers based
on voice, data, images, SMS messages, and so on. Communication network technologies,
computer technologies, and Internet technologies are used to provide value-added
services.
variable bit rate (VBR) One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a
permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth
and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls.
virtual channel
connection (VCC)
A VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A point-
to-multipoint VCC is a set of ATM virtual connections between two or multiple end
points.
virtual circuit A channel or circuit established between two points on a data communications network
with packet switching. Virtual circuits can be permanent virtual circuits (PVCs) or
switched virtual circuits (SVCs) .
virtual concatenation
group (VCG)
A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same
virtual concatenation link.
382
virtual container trunk
(VC trunk)
The logical path formed by some cascaded VCs.
virtual fiber The fiber that is created between different devices. A virtual fiber represents the optical
path that bears SDH services in a WDM system.
virtual path (VP) A bundle of virtual channels, all of which are switched transparently across an ATM
network based on a common VPI.
virtual path identifier
(VPI)
The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies to which
virtual path the cell belongs.
virtual private LAN
service (VPLS)
A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLS
enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the
MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.
virtual user-network
interface (V-UNI)
A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service
classification and traffic control in HQoS.
voltage drop The voltage developed across a component or conductor by the flow of current through
the resistance or impedance of that component or conductor.
W
WCDMA See Wideband Code Division Multiple Access.
WDM wavelength division multiplexing
WFQ See weighted fair queuing.
WLAN See wireless local area network.
WRED See weighted random early detection.
WRR weighted round robin
WTR See wait to restore.
Web LCT The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located at the NE
management layer of the transport network.
Wideband Code
Division Multiple
Access (WCDMA)
A standard defined by the ITU-T for the third-generation wireless technology derived
from the Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology.
wait to restore (WTR) The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line.
wavelength The distance between successive peaks or troughs in a traveling wave, that is, the distance
over which a wave is transmitted within a vibration period.
weighted fair queuing
(WFQ)
A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This
scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according
to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priority
queues can be scheduled.
weighted random early
detection (WRED)
A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCP
synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-priority
packet when calculating the packet loss ratio.
383
wireless local area
network (WLAN)
A hybrid of the computer network and the wireless communication technology. It uses
wireless multiple address channels as transmission media and carriers out data interaction
through electromagnetic wave to implement the functions of the traditional LAN.
working path A path allocated to transport the normal traffic.
working service A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled working.
wrapping A protection switching mode defined in ITU-T G.8132, which is applicable to packet-
based T-MPLS ring networks and similar to SDH two-fiber bidirectional multiplex
section protection (MSP). In this mode, the switching is triggered by the node that detects
a failure. For details, see ITU-T G.841.
X
X.21 ITU-T standard for serial communications over synchronous digital lines. It is mainly
used in Europe and Japan.
X.25 A data link layer protocol. It defines the communication in the Public Data Network
(PDN) between a host and a remote terminal.
Y
Y.1731 The OAM protocol introduced by the ITU-T. Besides the contents defined by
IEEE802.1ag, ITU-T Recommendation Y.173 also defines the following combined
OAM messages: Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), Remote Defect Indication (RDI),
Locked Signal (LCK), Test Signal, Automatic Protection Switching (APS), Maintenance
Communication Channel (MCC), Experimental (EXP), and Vendor Specific (VSP) for
fault management and performance monitoring, such as frame loss measurement (LM),
and delay measurement (DM).
384

OptiX OSN 550 Hardware Description (V100R007)

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

OptiX OSN 550 Hardware Description (V100R007)

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service Optical Transmission

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi